Home

Voice Processing Solutions Installation and Service Manual

1. CENTIGRAM COMMUNICATIONS CORPORATION References Diagnostic Specification Part Number 2750 0009 01 Rev A June 24 1991 Prepared by Walter Croft HIS Encore PMS Integration Centigram Document Part No 2750 0009 00 VoiceMemo Encore PMS Integration ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION Definitions ACK CDR cdrmenu EECO ENQ eecomenu hisinit hismwi hisrev hisresync hissnd mwla NAK OAA PMS TTY An ascii control character used in the RS232C serial protocol for positive acknowledgement of a single character or full message packet A group of routines data and files that allow the VoiceMemo system to do call detailed recording of selected information for diagnostics A VoiceMemo routine that runs only when the system administrator requests to inspect or modify the CDR log file and or configuration An OAA record that stores the configured data set up by eecomenu An ascii control character used in the RS232C serial protocol It is used to request retransmission of the Iast character or full message packet A VoiceMemo routine that runs only when the system administrator requests to inspect or modify the EECO OAA record for the HIS Encore PMS integration A VoiceMemo routine that is started by hissnd to read though all mailboxes on the system and update message waiting for any with message waiting type 16 A VoiceMemo routine that receives message waiting update requests from the mwla reformats the d
2. C Q x Input an M for RS232 Only Applications Menu The next menu will be as follows m Input P for the serial port number choose a serial port and input E for EECO PMS integration F for HIS PMS Integration or D for Encore PMS Integration RS232 Only Appication e Linegroup Only Applications Linegroup and RS232 Only Applications RS232 Only Applications DTMF to PBX Message tights Pre Extension Dial String Define tine Groups Network Menu Auto Gather System Billing System 75 Menu System 85 Menu SL 1 MERIDIAN Menu Report Current Configuration Quit Forget Changes Exit Save Changes Serial Port selected 1 serial port 1 or 2 AC Message Waiting Lights BSR BBL Pager Centigram standard interface Encore PMS integration PMS integration EECO PMS INTEGRATION HIS PMS Integration Hitachi DX ITT Programmable SL 1 background terminal facility SL 1 multiple message waiting set ports Tip Ring Message Waiting Lamps Video dispatch Citywide SMD No serial port MWI Exit Page 3 User will then read the following for example PMS integration selected on serial port 1 Connect cable to VoiceMemo Serial Port 1 connector Exit completely out of the Offline Menu WARNING REBOOT to enable reconfiguration changes Exit completely out of the Offline Menu Please exit out of the Main Menu as follows MAIN MENU M Mailbox maintenance R Report generati
3. Phone Lindine Phone Line a Workstation Remote RS232 Straight through cable Figure 3 Console and Remote Maintenance Connection to MITEL MAIL 33 Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processina Solutions b PBX Integration SX 2000 PABX TM Trademark of Mitel Corporation n Copyright 1996 Mitel Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada 1996 Centigram Communications Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Centigram Communications Corporation 91 East Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 REPRODUCTION Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may copy this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright notice above is included in all reproductions PROPRIETARY TERMS The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Centigram Communications Corporation AIP CallAgent CallText Centigram PROSE Speaklit SpeechPlus SPEECH TruVoice VGS VoiceMemo FaxMemo OneView PROSE 2000 Version 101992 Centigram Communications Corporation All other brand and product names are claimed or re
4. hissnd Unable to attach port Internal error or configuration error check configuration and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started with a port number that can not be attached by this task Check the configuration of all CPU serial ports of the system for conflicts If the configuration is altered to repair the problem reboot the system and monitor for reoccurrence hissnd Unable to attach name intemal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started and is not able to attach a task name for its use hissnd Unable to open serial port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started and it is not able to open the serial port that it just attached to this task hissnd Unable to get stty on RS232 port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed oa console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started and it is not able to get the current TTY options of the serial port hissnd Unable to SET stty on RS232 port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report con
5. All system backups have been performed Install Optional Feature With System Online cr 5402 Page 1 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later The procedure describes how to install an optional feature with the system online Be sure the Optional Feature Diskette s and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial number s for all disk s in the system Note The serial number on the OneView Optional Feature diskette must match the serial number of the hard disk on which OneView is being installed If you receive an error message about an incorrect serial number contact your support organization CAUTION If you are loading a revision support disk RSD do it after completion of this procedure Loading the RSD first could create an incorrect configuration Reference Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the System Maintenance Vienu Map 2 Additional Options Menu Select the Add Optional Feature s program Select A Add Optional Feature s Prompt Enter Y to add optional features N to stop Response Y for Yes Install the optional feature Prompt Insert Optional Feature floppy disk in the floppy drive Enter any key when ready Response Insert the Optional Feature diskette then press Enter After you have installed the Optional Feature software the system asks if you want to install another optional feature Prompt Do you want to install another optional feature Response Y to install a
6. 11 Load the prompts diskettes Prompt Insert the Ist diskette containing the prompts and press return Response Insert Prompts Disk 1 then press Enter to continue Prompt Wait until drive light is out insert language disc 1 hit CR when ready Response Press Enter again to continue 12 The prompts are copied to multiple hard disks as applicable The process can take many minutes depending on the number of hard disks The server then requests the remaining diskettes Prompt Working Wait until drive light goes out insert language disc 2 hit CR when ready Response Insert the specified diskette then press Enter to continue 13 When the prompts are complete the server displays the number of directory entries pointer sectors and speech blocks used for the server prompts Prompt For this prompt partition vid 1 XXXX directory entries allocated out of xxxx available XXXX pointer sectors allocated out of xxx available xxxx speech blocks allocated out of xxxxx available Starting up processes please wait 14 The server has an option for adding and RSD or patch Prompt Do you want to install an RSD or Patch Response Enter Y to add an RSD or patch Otherwise press Enter Doc Rev A CP 6267 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 15 To complete the update process you must load the Module Enable diskette and all the optional features Prompt Does the system have Opt
7. P Pre company name dial string M _ he mailbox greeting dial string X Exit Make any required changes from the default settings Enter X to Exit back to the In band Application menu 6 Enter K to select KEY O for attendant transfer during greeting y n prompt KEY O for attendant transfer during greeting y n N Y Enter Y to allow Key 0 attendant transfer 7 Enter F to select the Dial By Name menu Dial By Name L Last Name First flag Y N Number of names threshold 3 E Exact Match Break Y S Single Digit Access N M Suppress Mailbox Number N X Exit Make any required changes from the default settings Enter X to Exit back to the In band Application menu 25 8 Enter P to select the Passcode Menu Passcode Menu M Minimum Passcode Length 4 N Maximum Passcode Length 10 C Passcode Trip Count 5 P Passcode Trip Period 24 X Exit Make any required changes from the default settings Enter X to Exit back to the in band Application menu 9 Enter R to select the Receptionist menu Receptionist D Dialing Plan Options F Flow Options P PBX Dial String Definitions 2 T Trunk Extension Treatment Types X Exit 10 Enter D to select the Dialing Plan Options Dialing Plan Options hAqnpngapu pppu eee eee ged P Dialing Plan 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 D Delete Digits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F Offset Table T Timeout for
8. Prompt Invalid backup diskette need formatting Enter Y for formatting or N to quit Response Y to format the diskette N to abort the backup process The system formats the diskette if required then proceeds with the backup Insert more diskettes as specified by the server The server produces a report to the console when the backup is complete then returns to the System Maintenance Menu Menu Map 1 Doc Rev A ce 5704 Page 1 of 3 Perform a System Restore system restore VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to perform a system restore It is assumed the Series 6 server has been shut down and all modules disabled using the process described in CP 6268 WARNING During this procedure the server cannot process calls Centigram recommends that you run this process during periods of low call traffic Step Reference 4 l Boot the system All modules boot to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu since they are disabled 2 Initiate the floppy backup Prompt Enter one of the names Response system restore 3 The server starts the process Enter the number of backup diskettes to be restored Prompt How many backup floppies do you have Response Number of diskettes from the last floppy backup 4 Insert diskette s when directed Prompt Insert Backup Diskette 1 in floppy drive Enter Y when ready or N to quit Response Insert the diskette and ent
9. WARNING Observe all equipment safety and ESD precautions detailed in this manual DANGER To prevent injury either to yourself or others follow QSHA safety recommendations when lifting equipment Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference 1 Make sure the site is ready as specified in the Installing New Systems section of this manual 2 Place the Model 70 near an unused 20 amp AC outlet and away from sources of heat and magnetism Make sure that the installation area is properly ventilated WARNING Make sure the Model 70 power is off 3 Connect the module to a dedicated 20 amp AC wall plug U S For international installation a 220 volt power supply is required Note When connecting to a 220 volt power supply be sure the rear panel voltage switch is set to 220 volts prior to connection 4 Ground the cabinet of the module according to Centigram recommendations and TR 1900 the standards set by your organization 5 If installing a printer connect it to Serial port 2 and test it as recommended by the CP 6215 manufacturer s user manual 6 Connect the console to the Console port or Serial port 1 VT1 00 compatible CP 6216 terminal and keyboard and leave its power switch off 7 If you do not have worksheets with you contact your project manager to determine how the customer wants the Model 70 lines configured 8
10. 1 or 66 a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks Reference Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Menu Map 8 2 Enable the disk Select E Enable SCSI BUS or disk Prompt SCSI Enable Menu Select D Enable a SCSI disk Prompt Select one of the following disks 0 0 O 1 Which Disk bus sesilId Response Enter the two digit SCSI ID of the disk to be enabled 3 Verify the desired disk has been enabled Prompt SCSI Enable Menu Response X Select D Display Status of all SCSI Buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing status of all disks Verify the disk is listed as ENA OUTSYN OUTDAT or OUTSFW Doc Rev A ce 022 Page 1 of 2 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exception VoiceMemo Relase 6 0A and later This procedure contains instructions for setting any phoneline exception Phoneline exception changes take effect on the next new call after saving the settings A table for converting port numbers to line numbers follows the procedure Step Reference D Add a Phoneline Exception 1 Reach the Phoneline Exceptions Menu Aenu Map 10 2 Select line to change Select A Add exception 4 Prompt Keep entering triplets then enter lt CR gt on a line by itself line triplets to change Response The line triplets to change module number line card number port number Press Enter when ou are finished entering triplet
11. 8 Change the hardware removing the disk to be replaced CP 6221 Ch 4 9 Install the new hard disk and replace the cabinet cover CP 6224 Ch 4 10 Turn on the system power 1 1 Reach the VoiceMemo Hardware Configuration Menu then go to the Disk Menu Map 12 Configuration Menu 12 Replace the disk Select S Replace a disk of redundant pairs Prompt Please insert service diskette into floppy drive hit lt RETURN gt when ready Response Insert the diskette and press Enter Prompt Specify one of the following bus Id pairs nin n n Which Disk Response n n represents the two digit disk IDs of the disks installed in the server available to be replaced Enter the two digit disk ID of the disk to be replaced The server configures the disk When the process is complete the server prompts with the serial number of the new disk Prompt Serial number is Xxxx 13 Update the redundancy of the new disk CP7015 Doe Rev A Offline Disk Replacement CP 65 92 Non Redundant Redundant Systems Step Page 1 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 QA and later This procedure describes how to replace a defective or malfunctioning hard disk with a new hard disk in a non redundant or redundant Centigram Series 6 server This procedure must be performed while the server is offline Although this procedure can be used for redundant systems Centigram recommends CP 6283 Online Disk Replacement Redundant Systems for redundant d
12. A Operator Station 201setu Figure 1 Post Installation Test Equipment Setup Test Answering Capabilities 3 Plug a working telephone Test Set B into an Model 70 port 4 Call on Test Telephone A and ensure that the Model 70 answers with the appropriate greeting If a port does not answer see Table 1 for frequent problems and where to go for more details 5 Repeat the above steps for each additional port Doc Rev A CI 6201 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step Note This test cannot be done on installations with full PBX integration where each port is linked to the telephone extension through software In such installations plug in all telephone lines then call each individually See the test plan provided with the integration software package for full details Table 1 Frequent Problems and Reference Documents Possible Problem Reference Document Line card jumpers Loop E amp M Technical Specification in the settings Replacing FRUs chapter Line card jumpers addressing Technical Specification in the Replacing FRUs chapter Line card not seating properly CP 6220 in Chapter 4 Line group programming VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Doc Rv A CP 6201 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Check Accuracy of Voice Prompts 6 Create two mailboxes on the system console using Unlimited Fe
13. All other line card problems l vu A at CON Bo ge e m Replacing FRUs What to Do Use another telephone line and make test calls If quality improves it is probably not the line cards Check line current between the telephone switch and the line card DB level should be 6 to 12 Check for noise on CO trunks Test the telephone lines signal to noise ratio Check for nearby sources of hum or noise R F FM motors etc Connect the appropriate line filter to the line card Using a Digigrabber check dB level of DTMF digit If 3 to 8 then need 600 ohm load Check levels on telephone lines to ensure they are normal Make sure user s phone is working With an oscilloscope check line noise Check power supply voltages Replace line card CP 6220 Ensure that switch S l is in the Ready position Exchange the phone line not applicable for Integrations Read and interpret Logfile Report Use either a 2500 set or a hand set to test ringing DTMF and speech path With power off reset line card and retry Check backplane fuse With power off reseat line card C1 6220 With power off replace the line card with a new one reconfigured for the application CP 6220 4 11 Replacing FRUs What Happens System and Miscellaneous Problems Silence when prompt should be heard Server resets without apparent reason Company greeting sounds distorted 1 What to Do Check
14. Bit errors where the count represents the number of bits incorrectly interpreted by the T line receiver in the digital trunk interface e Local alarms is the count of the local alarms that have occurred during the count period e Remote alarms is the count of the remote alarms that have received during the count period Configuration Digital trunk connectivity configuration is done off line through the Physical Resource Configuration Manager After you have planned the system and the Dual TI Digital Trunk Connectivity module and physically installed the telephony card configuration for adding a Dual Tl card and for a digital trunk connection consists of the following Selecting the physical slot assignment for the card Setting the number of the module in which the card is installed Configuring the I O port address of the card Setting the signaling used by the trunk l Setting the sequence number of the trunk Configuring the framing format D4 or ESF Configuring the coding format for the PCM bit stream AMI AMI with ZCS or BSZS Note Its architecture being based on an AT bus the server does sense in which slot a card is installed The VoiceMemo application therefore must be told where the cards are in terms of a logical slot assignment Their slot assignments can be any unused slot number within the range of total possible physical slots By convention however these ogical slot assignme
15. Pager and Message Delivery Message Waiting Type 5 uses one or more VoiceMemo line ports to outdial to external paging systems or telephone numbers Norstar AIP VoiceMemo System integration Ports Enhanced _ In band and Receptionist Il Applications lt _ gt gt ATA Message Waiting E DTMF to PBX Message Waiting A VMI can also be used for 3009E1B the Message Waiting interface Figure D 1 Norstar Integration Structure Hardware and Software Requirements The AIP VoiceMemo system software requirements are e Release 5 02 or later Enhanced In band Integration optional feature The AIP system hardware requirements are C One line card port for every incoming phone line e One line card port for DTMF to PBX message wait control e Additional line card ports to place any outgoing calls paging fax etc The Norstar software requirements are DR2 The Norstar hardware requirements are One 1 two port VMI unit for each two VoiceMemo Receptionist ports One 1 line through a VMI or ATA for message wait control Norstar Feature Interactions and limitations The following interactons and limitations may affect the integration of a VoiceMemo system and a Norstar KSU The DR2 does not support Call Forward Busy e The Compact DR2 has no Call Forward No Answer hd The DR3 and DR4 support Call Forward Busy if the station is in use on any line e Call Forward Busy is a syst
16. Series 6 server Model 640 and Model 120 modules can support up to two Dual TI Digital Trunk Interface cards with two trunks per module for Series 6 server to network connections for example for incoming to help line connections A Model 1201 and a Model 70 can each support a single trunk For redundancy incoming ports can be divided between two trunk interface cards so long as the total port capacity is not exceeded i Tip To optimize fault tolerance on your system configure your trunks with the voice application circuits evenly divided between each trunk Thus in a module with four trunks a single trunk going out of service results in the loss of only one fourth of your total available circuits For example for a Model 640 equipped with four digital trunks that is two Dual T Digital Trunk Interface cards configure lines groups to use only 15 ports PCM channels on each trunk The user can set line coding for AM1 alternate mark inversion AMI with ZCS zero code suppression or B8ZS binary eighth 0 suppression The trunk can be disabled using the standard all ones AK signal By default the clock is slaved to the incoming PCM signal from the network on trunk 0 T1 Connectivity Functional Operation From the standpoint of implementation the T trunk is expected to be the primary trunk interface to the local switch The T1 Trunk Interface Card handles T1 frame multiplexing and demultiplexing clock extraction and
17. X Exil 6 Enter the following information for Template 4 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data 633 Ax SX EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action m V3 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X T Timeout 10 EDITTEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X E Error Action H EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T EN C X C Comment Call Forward No Answer External EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 4 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDITTEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template m 4 D Data s 633 dx sx A Action V3 T Timeout 10 E Error Action s H N Next Templates m C Comment Call Forward No Answer External X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Current Template m Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 5 to select template 5 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter key to expand menu Press Enter to display Template 5 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template wm 5 D Data A Action T Timeout E Eror Action N Next Templates m C Comment a X Exit 7 Enter the following information for Template 5 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data 623 dx Sx EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action a V3 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X T Timeout 10 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU MD A T E N C X E Error Action H ED
18. use atext ml start mailbox t text_count m2 end_mailbox verbose atext j Set text count for mailbox Enter a number in the range 1 to 99999999999 l or a range of mailboxes separated by a hyphen Set text count for mailbox 100 New text count O 255 2 Text count is used to announce user of an existing electronic message waiting at either the hotel motel front desk or at the user s E mail system User must have the correct FCOS to allow announcement New text count 0 255 2 Set text count for mailbox atext Set text count for mailbox 100 New text count O 255 3 2 Set text count for mailbox atext mi 101t 2 atext ml 102 t 1 v Mailbox 102 Text count set to 1 atext Set text count for mailbox 103 105 New text count O 255 5 Set text count for mailbox atext ml 103 m2 105 y t 3 Mailbox 103 Text count set to 3 Mailbox 104 Text count set to 3 Mailbox 105 Text count set to 3 3 Mailboxes affected Note that when an individual mailbox is modified the actual text count is shown Page 18 8 0 9 0 Communication Description This integration is based on communication between the PMS and VMS via an RS232 Full Duplex link The connection should be a DB25 pin male connector 8 1 link Setup Baud 1200 Asynchronous Bits IO Start 1 Data 7 Parity 1 stop 1 Panty Even Note A Null Modem adapter may be needed with an Encore PMS Integration
19. 20 Pager System 2 Pager Name UNBILLED Access code T9 Hold time 20 Port term2 RS 232 Serial Port application Programmable Programmed values for Port term2 Initialization string Reply string Pre DN ON string s atdt76 Pre DN OFF string atdt7 Post DN ON string m Nr Post DN OFF string m Dept Code as DN Unplayed msg count sent Delay between message waiting requests 5 Delay between Post DN and Trailer string 5 Trailer string ATHYr Suppress message light updates m y Basic Network configuration info Local Network Node I Links installed 2 Network host link answer originate mode 29 TCP IP System Wide Host Configuration Domain name software HCMS oaolN srdoe tdett IP Address Host Name Port Irq Vendor 1 1P 1 3 134 199 54 147 oneview 0280 10 ALTA 1 ost Card Gateway Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address I al 134 199 54 25 I 255 255 255 0 134 199 54 255 SMARTCARD TABLE host card port name cpu owner intr addr The following optional features are enabled Analog Networking Receptionist Networking FaxMemo Enhanced In band TCP IP OneView Call Agent Disk Redundancy Prompt Language Configuration English END Press any key to continue 17 Enter X two times to return to the Main Menu Check the report to ensure that the line group is programmed correctly This completes the Enhanced In Band programming Mailboxes f
20. 22 Press X to return to the Online configuration menu 23 Press X again to save your changes and exit Doc Rev A pp 7 01 Page of Tasks VoiceMemo Release 5 03 Set In band Module Numbers and Number of This procedure describes how to set the number of in band tasks for each module that has in band integration ports Note You do not need to perform this procedure on a Release 5 04 system Step Reference Reach the Linegroup Only Applications menu Menu Map 13 2 Select the line group that you defined for your Enhanced In band application 3 Select Enhanced Ipband to reach the Inband Integration Menu 4 Select a module for the in band integration ports Select F Host number Prompt Host number for Inband Response Enter a module number 1 4 5 Set the number of in band tasks to run on that module Select G Number of Inband Tasks on this host Prompt Number of Inband Tasks on this host 1 16 Response Enter the number of tasks 1 16 to run on the specified module 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all modules with in band integration ports Doc Rev A pp 022 Page 1 of 2 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exception oe ne This procedure describes how to set any phoneline exception Phoneline exception changes take effect on the next new call after saving the settings A table for converting port numbers to line numbers follows the procedure Step Reference Add
21. At the Change IO Port Address Menu select the input output address for which the card is configured The possible allowable addresses are 0x300h the default address for card 0 and 0x2300h for card 1 Exit to the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Menu when you are done From the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x where x is the slot number entered in step 4 reach the Configuration Menu for El El Carrier at trunk 0 to configure the digital trunk At the Configuration Menu for EI El Carrier at trunk 0 set the logical number of the trunk Trunk configuration consists of setting the trunk number framing and coding Select T set Trunk number Prompt Input your choice for help T F C D Response 0 or 1 From the Configuration Menu for E1 E Carrier at trunk 0 reach the Configure Frame Format for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Trunk 0 Menu Doc Rev A Reference Menu Map 13 TR 2005 Menu Map 13 Menu Map 13 Menu Map Step 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 cl 3151 Page 3 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later At the Configure Frame Format for DUAL El in AT slot x Trunk y where y is the trunk number you entered in step 1 I select the framing format you want for the trunk You can set the trunk for CEPT framing or for CRC framing Because you have not yet set the trunk coding format the default HDB3 coding appear
22. CAUTION Protect your server from ESD damage during handling of all com onents Step Reference D Observe Precautions 1 Put on a grounded wrist strap and attach the other end to the cabinet Doing so protects the component from electrostatic discharge 2 Shut down the system and turn off the power if you have not already done so CAUTION Removing a component while the power is on can severely damage the component you are working on and other peripherals 3 Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet 4 When removing a component place it on a nonconductive surface such as an anti static bag Make sure you have the anti static bags before you begin 5 Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables from the server Doc Rey A CP 6222 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference QD Remove the Drive Carrier WARNING When the drive carrier is removed from the server the power switch terminals are accessible These terminals can have hazardous voltages present even when the power switch is turned off Unplug the server before performing the procedure Failure to do so can result in personal injury and or equipment damage 6 Remove the cabinet cover CP 6224 7 Disconnect the data and power cables from both the floppy disk drive and the hard disk 8 Remove the four screws th
23. Conditional greetings can be used by enabling FCOS 161 Conditional Greetings When this FCOS is set mailboxes must be initialized before these conditional greetings can be recorded MESSAGE WAITING CONSIDERATIONS 1 Message waiting indications activated from an ONS voice mail port with Class of service option COV ONS E amp M Voice Mail Port ENABLED and in a voice mail hunt group type can ONLY be deactivated from a port with this COS option ENABLED within the same voice mail hunt group These are call me back callback messages which are readable from a display set NOTE This applies to PBX software level MS2007 only The maximum number of call me back messages permitted on any one PBX is controlled by the purchased dimension MFRD level Message waiting indications activated from an ONS voice mail port with Class of service option COV ONS E amp M Voice Mail Port DISABLED can be deactivated from any port with this COS option DISABLED These are Dialed Message Waiting messages which are only lamp indicators on all sets i Call me back and Dialed Message Waiting indications are retained after a main control activity switch reload or restart occurs This is true for software loads MS2005 L08 1 and above Prior to this these messages were not retained making it necessary for the voice mail system to reactivate messages Class of service option Message Deactivate on off hook does not
24. Dual El Offline Configuration VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Though typically a factory installed standard feature the El digital trunk connectivity feature may be retrofitted to a system in the field Use this procedure if you are adding a Dual El Digital Trunk Interface card to a Series 6 server that you already have This procedure gives you the instructions for configuring the feature software to support a El digital trunk El trunk configuration is done offline using the Resource Manager In this procedure you set the Module number in which the El card resides I O port address of the card Trunk number 0 and 1 framing format CEPT4 or CRC and coding HDB3 or AMI Note Though you find digital signaling options for E amp M loop starts DID and ground start trunks the VoiceMemoa application allows only CCS that is SS7 for El trunk connectivity Please refer to the S7 Integration Manual for more information Step Reference 1 Reach the offline Resource Configuration Menu Menu Map 13 2 Add a resource card Select A Add resource card Prompt Available slots are x x x 9 x II x x x Input your choice Response The card number according to the Model of the Series 6 server Model 640 server cards occupy slots 9 and 11 Model 12085 server cards occupy slots 6 and 8 Model 1201 server cards occupy slot 6 Model 70 server cards occupy slot type 3 3 At the Add Board to Database Menu add the di
25. NOTES Please refer to MITEL MA L Volume 2 Reference and Configuration for message waiting configuration Pager Notification and FaxMemo cannot use the Smart Card Interface Using the Smart Card for message waiting simply involves a data connection from a data port on the Smart Card RS232 to a modem connected to an ONS port on the SX 2000 This port accesses the modem goes off hook and dials the message activate or deactivate access code on the PBX Digital E amp M Trunks T1 E amp M may be used with MS2007 MR3 N16 1 1 when flash on Digital E amp M is supported on the PBX software SX 2000 ICS PROGRAMMING 1 Feature Access Code Assignment Call Hold Retrieve Call Forwarding Busy External Call Forwarding Busy Internal Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer External Call Forwarding No Answer Internal Message Waiting Activate Message Waiting Deactivate 11 62 63 64 65 66 90 91 NOTE These FACs are programmable and are referenced when programming the MITEL MAIL database see page 13 Class of Service Subscriber s E Call Forwarding External Destination Call Forward No Answer Timer 0 1 25 sec Multiline Set Callback Message Erasure E amp M Trunks COV ONS E amp M Voice Mail Port Public Network Access via DPNSS Public Network to Public Network Connection Allowed No Answer Recall Timer O 45 s ONS Ports COV ONS E amp M Voice Mail Por
26. cc cccccccccceeeceeeeenenenenenenenenes A 3 Incidence of Harmi ooir rira ect te ae een eee A 3 Rights of the Telephone Compan y cccccescessesssesescseseneeeeeeseeseesenes A 3 Coin Service or Party Line Use EAEE AEE E A 3 list of Centigram Procedures Index Menu Maps About This Manual This manual describes how to install and service the Series 6 Communications Server Model 70 Who Should Read This Manual This manual is intended for Centigram Certified Technicians CCTs responsible for installing and servicing the Model 70 voice mail server Technicians must have experience with voice mail servers PC hardware component installation and an understanding of basic telecommunications principles They must have completed the VoiceMemo Phase I and Phase II Installation and Maintenance courses and the Model 70 update training If you do not meet these criteria do not attempt to install or service the Model 70 Please contact your regional office or the Centigram Regional Operations Manager How to Use This Manual This manual contains reference information task lists a collection of procedures for performing those tasks and reader aids such as menu maps Kut Task list Use the task list starting with a principal task to install a new server or service an existing server Each task is described in more detail in a procedure For example if you are installing a new server look on the task list in t
27. 1 sx V1 20 H Next Comment Direct internal call No stuffed digit T5 2 Xx v5 20 H Next Comment Direct external call T6 3 0 sx Odx V4 20 H Next Comment Busy forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source and destination T7 3 0 sx dx V4 20 H Next Comment Busy forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source T8 Next Comment T9 Next Comment T10 Next Comment TIl Next Comment T12 Next Comment T13 Next Comment T14 Next Comment T15 Next Comment T16 Next Comment T17 Next Comment T18 Next Comment TEO Next Fujitsu Starlog 3 sx Odx V4 20 H Busy forwarded call Stuffed 0 in destination 3 sx dx V4 20 H Busy forwarded call No stuffed digits 4 0 sx 0 dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source and destination 4 0 sx dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source 4 sx 0 dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded call Stuffed O in destination 4 sx dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded call No stuffed digits 5 0 sx 0 dx V2 20 H Forward All forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source and destination 5 Cl sx dx V2 20 H Forward All forwarded call Stuffed 0 in source 5 sx Odx V2 20 H Forward All forwarded call Stuffed 0 in destination 5 sx dx V2 20 H Forward All forwarded call No stuffed digits 8 Xx 0 dx V4 20 H Busy forwarded external call Stuffed 0 in destination 8 Xx
28. Comments Local Login Template 8 Data 64 dx sx 64 Programmed FAC for Call Forward Always Action V2 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments CFA Template 9 Data Action V5 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments Auto Att VM 9 After defining the templates enter X to Exit and return to the Enhanced In band menu 10 Enter 0 to Show Application Ensure that all Templates are set up correctly Install the Enhanced In Band Application 1 Enter to Install Application from the Enhanced In band menu Enter the Application Name This name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as it appears in the Application Name field refer to page 12 2 Enter S to save the application 3 Enter X to Exit and save changes 4 Make any other necessary program changes 5 Activate the inactive configuration 6 Run a Configuration Report to confirm programming NOTE This will result in service outage The following reports provide example configurations for Enhanced n band Signaling and ONS Message Waiting Key areas that should also be programmed for initial setup in the Online Menu are highlighted in bold text SYSTEM CONFIGURATION November 1995 8 30 am Group 1 Mitel Enhanced Integration lines 0A 0B 1A 1 B Application ENHANCED IN BAND Dial plan 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 A Administrator mbox 6668 General Greeting mbox Atten
29. Connect the telephone lines CP 6261 9 Turn on the console a Doc Rev A CP 6590 Page 2 of 2 Release 6 0A and later Step 10 11 12 14 15 16 Turn on the system and wait for initialization Run the Online System Verify of all records and all speech and prompts Restart the server and wait for initialization Test basic telephony functions If needed connect an external modem to Serial port 2 This connection requires a null modem cable Run a System Information Report and send it to the printer if installed Examine the System Information Report and confirm that all features ordered are included 17 Check the quality of your hardware installation 18 19 20 21 22 Complete your post implementation documentation Configure system software Configure any optional features Configure mailboxes Arrange a meeting with your project manager for customer turnover and to discuss further plans including a test plan Doc Rev A Reference ZP 7001 ZP 6201 X6270 TP 1340 VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual CP 6258 Voicememo Reference and Configuration Manual VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual System Implementation Guide cr 7001 f Page 1 of 4 Run Verify With System Online VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to run an online system verify An offline verify combines verification of bot
30. HDB3 coding X eXit D Display current configuration CX eXit F reset to deFault S Show board configuration W shoW default configuration CX eXit K digital card clocK reference Digital Clock Reference Configuration Menu I set to Internal clock reference N set to Network clock reference D set to Default clock reference S Show current clock reference F show deFault clock reference X eXit Index A AIS El 1 6 TI 2 10 alarm failure timing 2 11 reporting 2 10 alarms carrier group alarm 2 1 alternate mark inversion 2 5 AMI 2 16 CP 3151 AMI with ZCS 2 16 analog applications mixing digital and analog 2 6 analog trunks mixed with digital 1 2 with El digital trunks 1 5 automatic exit avoiding xii B B8ZS 2 1 6 backup clock source automatic switchover 1 10 2 16 bearer channels 1 4 bipolar violations 2 6 bit errors El 1 6 T1 2 10 bus clock MVIP bus 1 5 2 9 bus master MVIP bus 1 5 2 9 C c7 12 capacity El digital trunks 1 3 T digital trunks 2 7 CAS 2 4 CCITT Recommendation G 704 1 4 1 431 1 4 ccs 1 2 1 9 CEPT framing 1 9 CGA 2 12 CGA alarm yellow alarm 2 11 channel 16 El 1 4 channel banks network clock 2 9 clock El network 1 5 T network 2 9 clock reference CP 3 152 configuration offline El CP 3151 T1 CP 3150 connections different PBXs COs or a mix 2 7 console tips xi CRC error checking 1 3 CRC framing 1 9
31. INSTALLED DIS K bea Disk 0 BUS 0 2049 MB CONFIGURA TION x Drive 1 f Active 0 0 C CONTINUE configuration is correct S SCAN all disks s search for installed disks X EXIT disk configuration abort disk configuration Enter desired option C S X Response C to continue The server displays the following messages Configuring disk 0 0 Initializing virtual drives System hours increased 7 Confirm the configuration Prompt System Configuration Number of Hosts Hosts present Number of disks Active disk IDs Redundant disk IDs Enter Y to confirm the change Response Review the information for accuracy Y if the information is correct N to reenter the information 8 The server continues then requests the first software diskette Prompt When drive light goes out insert disk J and press return Response 1 ert the specified diskette then press Enter a Doe Rev A Cl 6267 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step 9 The server then requests the remaining diskettes Insert the diskettes when prompted Prompt When drive light goes out insert disk 2 and press return Response Insert the specified diskette then press Enter to continue 10 After all the software diskettes have been loaded load the prompts Prompt Do you want to install prompts to the system Y N Response Y
32. IO Port Address 0X300 Resources 48 Net Dat 48 Net Sig T1 E1 Carrier configuration Trunk 0 Configuration D3 D4 B8ZS CAS Trunk 1 Configuration D3 D4 AMI ZCS CAS Trunk Type for each channel Chal 00 O01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 I Type E amp M E amp M E amp M E amp M E amp M LS LS LS LS LS LS LS Chnl 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Type LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS Chnl 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Type LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS Chnl 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Type LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS Figure 1 Typical Trunk Configuration List 2 1 From the Resource Configuration Menu reach the Digital Clock Reference Venu Map 13 Configuration Menu 22 From the Digital Clock Reference Configuration Menu select the clock reference for the digital trunks Your options include a reference derived from the network RxD signal and the default clock reference trunk 0 Note the internal clock reference is provided for those applications where the server is connected to channel banks and no network clock reference is available 23 Exit back to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu when you are done 24 If you have completed your digital trunk connectivity feature configuration activate the configuration If you have not completed configuring digital trunk connectivity go to the appropriate procedure Doc Rev A CP 3151 Page 1 of 4
33. Paging type Enter either CAP or ID depending on which type of TNPP page packets will be sent to the Paging Terminal Inertia Enter the inertia value for this TNPP serial link This number represents the number of nodes that a packet may pass through before it is removed from the TNPP network System Message Enter a system message Example Call VoiceMemo This message will appear on alpha numeric pagers under certain circumstances If a page is not a cut through page and the mailbox does not have post pager digits configured the system message will be sent Display TNPP System Information Select this option to display the TNPP System information that has been configured for each link TNPP Timing Parameters Menu the TNPP specification No changes are necessary for a standard configuration TNPP Link Number Enter the TNPP link number to be configured Inter char time within packet tict This parameter represents the amount of time that WoiceMemo will wait between characters in a packet before generating a timeout The name of the timeout event is tict This applies to packets that are being received by VoiceMemo Currently the only packet that is received by VoiceMemo is a zero packet from the Paging Terminal Timeout on response with idle receiver tnm This parameter represents the amount of time that VoiceMemo will wait for a response from the Paging Terminal when the VoiceMemo side of the link is idle If the time expires
34. TEXT MESSAGE MW Where the message is sent in hex ex 4 is 34H See Message Format Table Table 1 0 A 2 byte number 00 64 representing the Feature Class of Service to use when modifying the mailbox set up via the console configuration menus A 2 byte number 00 99 representing the number of unplayed messages in the guest mailbox valid ranges 30H to 39H A 2 byte number 00 99 representing the number of all unplayed messages with URGENT priority found in the guest mailbox valid ranges 30H to 39H A 2 byte number 00 99 representing the number of unread text messages in the PMS system valid ranges 30H to 39H Note All messages are of a fixed length record 76 bytes space padded 10 0 Diagnostic Information See Appendix A for detailed diagnostic information available through the error log file the CDR file and the system console Page 20 VoiceMemo Encore PMS Message Format Message Text ofijelsiatsfel7 sfofioln i v4 is stx r se se sp se se se se se se se sp se erx ec STX a ee T sx s pox s sp se sp sp se ex tre sm v pox wp ure sp sx s ox sp sp sp se sp sp rx tac sx e pox sp sp sp sp sp se Enx tac STX MBOX MBOX ETX LRC Doo ae ee ee een ote pox na se sp se se Per ac Table 1 0 Message Format Table Page 21 Appendix A HIS and Encore Diagnostic Specification Page 22
35. Verify Distribution Lists M Verify Mailboxes N Verify AMIS Lists T Verify Phoneline Exceptions or S Verify Statistics Data Response The server displays dots while performing the verify then returns to the Record Verification Menu when done amp Verify Records Without logging Results 2 Access the Record Verification Menu and specify no logging of results Select R Verify Records Prompt Log results Response N Prompt Results will NOT be logged to disk Record Verification Menu Doc Rev A CP 7001 Page 3 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step 3 Select the type s of records to verify For standard maintenance of the server use Verify All Records If there is a specific problem with the server select the appropriate record type to be verified Select A Verify All Records B Verify Sibling Lists C Verify Copy Lists D Verify Distribution Lists M Verify Mailboxes N Verify AMIS Lists I Verify Phoneline Exceptions or S Verify Statistics Data Response The server displays the test results as each test is completed then returns to the Record Verification Menu Verify Speech and log Results 2 Access the Speech Verification Menu and specify that the results are to be logged for future use Select S Verify Speech Prompt LOg results Response Y Prompt Results of previousverify will be lost Please confirm by entering Y Response Y
36. band programming so the appropriate greeting will play The 6 is converted into the calling party s extension number i e the extension number of the telephone calling the MITEL MA L system which is also the user s mailbox number The 8 is converted into the originators extension number i e the number of the extension that called the users telephone provided they are calling from another extension on the PBX NOTE If the originator is an outside caller the 8 code will not tone out any digits The characters are toned out to mark the end of each field and are interpreted by MITEL MAIL as de limiting characters FWD to 88100 to send callers to VM HG Access 2000 voice mail Retrieve Msg dial 88200 a OR Dial Call Sender of Oldest MB1805 Message feature code OR Press message key Supersets only MITEL MAIL SX 200 DIGITAL LIGHT MSG Waiting HG Abbreviated Access code 88 Voice Mail Hunt Group Access Code 2000 Call FWD Index 100 2000 4 6 8 Msg Retrieve Index 200 2000 6 Figure 2 Call Forward and Message Retrieve Process 5 9 5 8 2 Message Retrieve Abbreviated Dial Number The index number for users to retrieve messages is set up as follows Index Number Diait String XXX Voice Mail Hunt Group Access 6 Example 200 2000 6 NOTE This number is programmed as the index number for COS option 265 in the message waiting ports COS refer to Section 5 3 2 Message Waitin
37. documentation conventions for xii worksheets 5 4 Index 5 issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 MITEL MAIL Voice Processing Solutions Prompt Installation Instructions TM Trademark of M itel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mitel Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada a 1996 Centigram Communications Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Centigram Communications Corporation 91 East Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 REPRODUCTION Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may capy this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright notice above is included in all reproductions PROPRIETARY TERMS The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Centigram Communications Corporation AIP CallAgent CallText Centigram PROSE Speaklt SpeechPlus SPEECH TruVoice VGS VoiceMemo FaxMemo OneView PROSE 2000 Version 1 01992 Centigram Communications Corporation All other brand and product names are claimed or registered marks of their respective companies NOTICE The information contain
38. evee SR Menu voicememo Configuration Online Menu Other DID Features Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Digit Manipulation 4 D Online Menu i Menu VoiceMemo Modify lt Hee N Annlication MH gt data entry parameters Day Night Menu 0 Dialing Plan Menu fa and Star Prefix Dplan eae at PAN gt Dial by Name Menu Passcode Menu ar FPSA Menu Speech Quality Menu Receptionist Menu nn l l Analog Networking Configuration L Menu i Mailbox on Demand 1 l Menu l data entry parameters Pager Application VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Line Groups Menu Linegroup Only Applications Menu yE L o fF Only for VoiceMemo Configuration Massage Online Menu Delivery P Ly Pager systems supported G M232 Message Lights Application VoicelMemo Configuration Offline Menu RS232 Only Application Menu AC Massage Waiting Lights Menu RS232 Programmable R Menu lt data entry parameters 7 QTME to PBK Message lights Application VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Line Grows Menu DTMF Applications Menu DTMF to PBX Menu B Hard tisk Utilities System Maintenance Menu Hard Disk Utilities Menu SdY
39. number 42 Message Retrieval by Outside Caller Although this section is not relevant to the PBX setup it is included here for information purposes Outside callers refers to callers calling from outside the PBX via trunk access These callers are routed to the MITEL MA L Receptionist application where they hear the company greeting Users who want to access their mailboxes from an extension other than their own can do so by dialing the hunt group access code of the ONS voice mail ports At this point they are treated in the same way as outside callers Outside callers who want to call into the M TEL MA L system to retrieve their messages must press the key star during the M TEL MAIL company greeting This puts them into the message centre application where they are prompted for mailbox numbers After entering mailbox numbers they again press the key star and are prompted for their passcodes Once users successfully enter passcodes they can retrieve their messages MITEL MAIL PROGRAMMING The MITEL MA L system must be programmed to integrate to the X 200 for proper call handling The following programming details assist you to set up Enhanced In band Other basic programming such as Message Waiting is discussed in MITEL MAIL Volume 2 Reference and Configuration 6 1 Step 1 Define Line Group in Offline Menu 1 Log into the M TEL MA L system to access the OFFLINE Menu The system displays the Ma
40. save 2 1 1 DP 7501 show 2 1 1 AT amp T System 25 Enhanced In band integration C I integration requirements C 3 template specifications C 3 with Receptionist II C 3 B backup application 2 3 Cc call forwarding 1 2 caller recognition 1 2 canceling a phoneline exception DP 7022 chassis ground connecting DP 3021 comment field description 1 6 2 6 conditional greetings 1 2 1 11 enabling DP 7023 current template field description 2 6 D data field description 1 4 2 6 use during template execution 1 7 valid entries 1 4 2 7 defining a line group DP 6028 deriving mailbox numbers 1 10 DP 7007 digit absorption 1 1 1 2 4 2 5 DP 7007 digit offset 1 1 1 2 4 2 5 DP 7007 E Enhanced In band Integration assigning to a line group DP 7006 configure from scratch GP 502 creating an application DP 7501 description 1 1 features 1 2 Fujitsu Starlog GP 505 how it works I 2 Omni GP 504 error action field description 1 5 2 7 use during template execution 1 8 valid entries 2 8 extension numbers converting to mailbox numbers l 10 DP 7007 extra cost features see optional features F figures AT amp T System 25 to VoiceMemo System integration C 2 integration communications l 1 Northern Telecom Norstar to VoiceMemo System integration D 2 Omni to VoiceMemo System integration B 2 sample call handling 1 3 Index l Index sample information packet 1 3 Starlog to V
41. scrolling To stop scrolling Press Ctrl S To restart scrolling Press Ctrl Q Update the History File 3 Enter information to the History File Select U Update file Prompt Contact person name Response Name of the person who made changes to the server up to 15 characters Prompt Reported problem Response Description of the problem you encountered up to 79 characters Prompt Fixed problem Response Description of changes you made to the server to correct the reported problem up to 159 characters Prompt Other comments Response Any other necessary information up to 79 characters press Enter to leave blank Doc Rev A ce 5313 Page 1 of 2 View Hard Disk Operational Parameters ea ier Re OR ae This procedure describes how to determine the hard disk size and manufacturer Step Reference l Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the Hard Disk Utilities Menu vlenu Map 8 2 Review the hard disk information Select 0 Display the Operation Parameters for a disk Prompt Enter the hard disk as bus id pair Response The bus and SCSI ID numbers separated by a colon of the disk to be reviewed The following is a sample Operational Parameters Report Operational Parameters for Hard Disk 0 0 Vendor FUJITSU Model M2684S 512 Rev 2026 Page Error Recovery Parameters AWRE TRUE ARRE TRUE TB FALSE RC FALSE EER FALSE PER TRUE DTE FALSE DCR FALSE Read r
42. 0 3 1 Fax Conn lt none gt GROUP G N S T U A D F C X gt Enter X to exit the Line Groups menu and return to the Offline Menu 4 Enter A to select the Linegroup Only Applications menu Group 3 lines VOICEMEMO Linegroup Only Applications G Group selected w 3 U User Interface D DID VoiceMemo E Enhanced Jnband P Pager R Receptionist V VoiceMemo S Special VMVG Application W Disable X Exit 5 Enter E to select the Enhanced In band application for this line group Group 3 lines ENHANCED IN BAND INBAND Integration A Calling Extension Absorbed Digits O 12 m B Calling Extension Signed Offset N C Called Extension Absorbed Digits O 12 D Called Extension Signed Offset N E MF Enable Y N N X Exit No changes are required to this application Enter X to return to the Linegroup Only Applications menu Group 3 lines ENHANCED IN BAND APPL G U D E P R V S W X Enter X to return to the Offline Menu 6 Enter X to Exit and Save Changes The system writes the changes to the offline configuration and returns to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Writing new configuration report to usr vm config vm report 0 Writing new configuration commands to usr vm config vm cmd 0 TCPIP writing ust vm config tcp init 0 TCPIP writing usr vm config tcp host 0 WARNING ACTIVATE CONFIGURATION to enable cha
43. 10 to 12 above Otherwise press Enter 14 The server has an option for adding and RSD or patch Prompt Do you want to install an RSD or Patch Response Enter Y to add an RSD or patch Otherwise press Enter 15 To complete the update process you must load the Module Enable diskette and all the optional features Prompt Does the system have Optional Features Response Y 16 Load the Module Enable diskette or the optional feature Prompt Insert Optional Feature Setup diskette in the floppy drive Enter lt carriage_return gt when ready Response Insert the diskette then press Enter a Doc Rev A CP 6263 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference The server loads the feature and asks if there are more Prompt XXX Optional Feature is now installed Is there another Optional Feature in the system Response XXX represents the name of the optional feature Enter Y if there are more Repeat steps 16 and 17 until the Module Enable diskette and all optional features have been loaded Enter N to end adding optional features and continue with the process 18 If the server is a multi module server or contains a QNET card in Module I the following message is displayed If the server is a single module go to step 19 Prompt WARNING Do NOT reset this module Press the reset button on all other modules then carriage return Response Reset the specified modules and press En
44. 32 20 Received DTMF Debounce 35 0 Sleep After Hangup seconds Note If messages are clipped at the beginning increase the value of line exception 142 to 75 Inhibit Play Time defaults to 0 01 seconds 11 If desired add feature bits 161 and 162 to users FCOSs and have users activate DP 7023 their conditional greetings 12 Configure either the DTMF to PBX or RS 232 message waiting application See the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details 13 If your VoiceMemo VoiceMemo system has the Receptionist II application installed configure it for supervised transfer to allow callers to return to the VoiceMemo system after reaching a busy extension See the Receptionist II Manual for details Configure Omni Hardware 1 Strap the two wire E amp M cards for type 1 E amp M signaling 2 Cross connect the E amp M lines from the Omni PBX to the VoiceMemo system as follows E E M M T T R R 3 Connect the Omni and VoiceMemo systems to same ground point DP 3021 4 Configure the E amp M trunks on the Omni PBX to be type 1 E amp M Doc RN A GJ 504 Page 3 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 5 Use the following RC transactions to add the hardware to the system data base Select double height slots to accommodate the EMT cards RC 221 Add a Card CARD CARD TYPE FB NUMBER EMT FB 17201 RC 153 Add a Trunk VoiceMemo Message Wait Trunks Trunk Physical Tr
45. 6267 report System Information CP 1340 restore classes of service CP 5413 Restriction Class of Service RCOS 1 17 Rotational mailboxes 1 19 running online verify CP 7001 Index 3 system increasing hours CP 7021 naming configuration CP 7004 reloading CP 6267 setting time and date Cl 5414 shutdown CP 6268 verify online Cl 7001 viewing configuration CP 7005 system administration hardware 5 4 phone 5 3 system administrator 5 2 system components See hardware overview system features distribution lists 15 integrations 5 optional 1 15 System Information Report CP 1340 system reload program CP 6267 system restore program CP 5704 T telephone connecting lines CP 626 1 testing basic functions CP 620 1 Tenant Class of Service TCOS 1 17 time and date setting CP 5414 timeouts avoiding xiv tools required 2 4 Tree mailboxes 1 19 troubleshooting application software problems 4 7 comunications failure 4 7 console terminal problems 4 8 floppy disk drive problems 4 9 hard disk problems 4 10 integration problems 4 10 line card problems 4 1 1 overview 4 5 power supply problems 4 7 system and miscellaneoud problems 4 12 U updating hard disk redundancy CP 70 15 prompts CP 6262 software CP 6263 user distribution lists 1 13 1 15 V Video Dispatch I 16 viewing history file CP 5304 system configuration CP 7005 voice mail 1 12 W Index warnings
46. 7031 CP 7030 CP 7029 shutting down CP 7017 viewing operational parameters CP 53 13 distribution lists 1 13 1 15 distributors 4 3 E editing history file CP 5304 Electronic Set Emulation 1 16 enabling hard disks CP 7019 equipment log 2 3 equipment protecting xvi Ethernet cards 1 1 F Fax cards 1 fax publishing mailboxes l 19 Index l Index Fax Store and Forward I 19 FaxMemo 1 14 FCC regulatory compliance 1 4 Feature Class of Service FCOS 1 17 field repairs 4 2 floppy disk drive backing up CP 5703 description 1 9 installing CP 6222 removing CP 6222 running diagnose from CP 703 1 Foreign Language Prompts 1 1 6 Functional System Partition Administration FPSA 1 1 5 G Greeting Only mailboxe 1 18 Group Class of Service GCOS 1 17 Guaranteed Fax mailboxes l l 9 Guest mailboxes 1 1 8 H hard disk adding CP 6282 adding redundant CP 628 1 changing module status CP 53 14 description 1 9 enabling CP 70 19 installing CP 6221 offline replacement CP 6592 removing CP 6221 replacing redundant CP 6283 updating redundancy CP 70 15 hardware cabinet 1 5 floppy disk drive 1 9 hard disk 1 9 line cards 1 10 overview 1 5 specialty cards 1 10 history file viewing and editing CP 5304 I increase system hours CP 7021 installation cabinet CP 6224 console CP 6216 floppy disk drive CP 6222 Index 2 hard disk CP 6221 line card CP 6
47. Band Application ssssssssssiiisessssssesesrrirsrsrssssrsrsrrrrnrsrsssnsrsrrnrrrnrsnssnsnsrrerrrrnnss 12 Install the Enhanced In Band Application ssssssessssisisisessssesesrrirsrsrsssnsesrrernrnrunsnnsnstierrinrannnnnnsnrerininrnnanns 14 MESSAGE WAITING CONSIDERATIONS cccccscscsscssssssessssscssssssssesseseecsssssssseecesssssesseeseesesessseess 18 OVERVIEW This document is intended to show the necessary hardware connectivity to the MITEL SX 2000 PABX as well as to define the Customer Data Entry CDE requirements to integrate the MITEL MAIL system with the PBX GENERAL Full integration between the MITEL MA L system and the SX 2000 is achieved through the use of the Enhanced In band signaling application on MITEL MAIL and Advanced Analog Networking AAN on the SX 2000 system Enhancements are as follows Conditional Greetings can be enabled to provide Busy No Answer and Not Available responses to callers forwarded to subscribers mailboxes During message playback subscribers can answer messages left by other internal users This only applies to internally forwarded calls A single ARS access code can be used for direct subscriber login call forwarding and call rerouting MITEL MAIL can be interfaced to the SX 2000 without using the Enhanced In band signaling application but is not discussed in this document Mitel recommends the integration discussed in this document for ease in implementati
48. Configuration INTRODUCTION TNPP is a standard data communications protocol that is used for communications between paging terminals or other types of equipment required to implement a paging system network The implementation of support for this protocol on VoiceMemo allows message waiting notification for mailboxes to be done by sending a TNPP page packet over a serial link to a Paging Terminal The Paging Terminal delivers the page via the TNPP network Mailboxes contain information about the individual pagers which is used in making the TNPP packet REQUIREMENTS Software _ Reauirements To support the TNPP Paging feature the following software must be installed VoiceMemo Release 5 03 or later Extra cost Feature diskette Telocator Network Paging Protocol Release 5 03 Hardware Requirements At least one serial port on WoiceMemo per TNPP link Smartcard ports are optional An RS232 Cable connecting each link between VoiceMemo and a Paging Terminal LIMITATIONS If built in serial ports are used S terml term2 the application must be configured on host 1 A maximum of ten TNPP links may be configured SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION There are two areas of VoiceMemo that need configuration information for TNPP to operate These areas are the Offline menu and Mailbox configuration The Offline Menu To configure the Offline portion of TNPP choose the RS232 or Smartcard Integrations selection from the Offline Menu From the
49. Each Model 70 is shipped preconfigured per specific customer order all hardware and software loaded Regardless of configuration the base server is shipped with the components listed below Additional components might be needed depending on specific country requirements Model 70 l Modem Modem Cable Power Cable Figure 2 2 illustrates the server components and basic installation procedure TO install the Model 70 follow the steps shown in the Centigram Procedures Cl s listed in the Task List at the end of this section Ethernet or ArcNet Additional Terminals and Modems oo Printer Console Console Telephone i Network interface I Mee a 5613arch Figure 2 2 Model 70 Components Installing New Systems Customer Turnover After you have completed the post installation audit checklist as described in the System Implementation Guide turn the account over to the group responsible for ongoing maintenance and support Provide the customer with appropriate telephone numbers and escalation procedures Discuss outstanding items to be completed review special applications and communicate areas of concern 2 6 Task Installation Task list Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Installing New Systems Procedure Model 70 Installation i scsiashaal weed howd etne reenen nnee CP 6590 Check Installation Quality oo e ii Cl 6258 Connect the Telephone Lines cc
50. Enable diskette FaxMemo diskette CP 6263 Receptionist II diskette and currently installed optional features If any new optional features are to be added to the server they are loaded in step 11 of this process Allow the system to reboot at the end of the software update 11 Load any new optional features Features previously loaded on the system were CP 5402 updated in step 10 this step is to load only new optional features If the server did not ask for the Module Enable diskette install it now If there are no new optional features to be added go to step 12 12 Perform a second floppy backup using a new set of diskettes CP 5703 Ch 5 Doc Rev A Perform an Online Increase System Hours ce 021 This procedure describes the online process of increasing the system hours on an Page 1 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Centigram Series 6 server The service diskette with the hard disk s serial number s is required to complete this process FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or Se a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE h
51. Follow the instructions given in the CP A reference column in each CP contains pointers when necessary to supplemental information such as another procedure a technical reference in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual another manual or menu maps Use the tabs included with this binder to find referenced supplemental information that is located within this manual If you need to interrupt a CP and seek reference information first mark the CP with your bookmark or otherwise note down where you are in the CP After you are finished with the reference information return to the CP and continue to execute the steps where you left off 4 1 Replacing FRUs Service Strategy 4 2 The Model 70 is designed to make installation system expansions and service and repair an easy process Maintenance and administration either on site or remote should be performed on a regular basis Field repairs are simplified by replacing components within the Model 70 The eight major components cabinet hard disk s floppy disk drive and line cards are all field replaceable units FRUs A typical service call to repair a failed Model 70 consists of the following steps 1 If possible run the Logfile and usage reports to isolate the fault 2 Check all major cable and component connections 3 Refer to the troubleshooting section of this chapter and follow the recommended procedures 4 Remove and replace each major FRU an
52. For software release 6 0 online prompts installation is no longer an option In previous releases prompts could be installed while the server was processing calls Installing New Prompts This section covers installing new prompts on a Series 6 server Refer to Section 4 for updating prompts Page 4 3 1 Summary of Installation To install language prompts you must do two things load the prompts onto the server and enable the prompts Loading the prompts is the process of copying the prompts data to a prompts drive The user does not have to specify which drive to load the data as the server handles this automatically Enabling the prompts is the process of verifying the serialized diskette prompts setup diskette that permits the new prompts to run on the server This is done by running the add extracost program 3 2 Installation Instructions FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some server prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products The Model 120 and Model 70 are one module servers When asked for the number of the module always enter or a all WARNING eS This procedure requires that you shut down the system resulting in an interruption to call processing Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Step 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu and execute a system shutdown menu choice S Sy
53. From Hard Disk VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to change the status of a module using the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu When changing the status of multiple modules always change the one the console is attached to last FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or 669 a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only d step Reference Boot the system to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu If the module is currently disabled it will boot to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu by default Prompt Run MAINTENANCE from Hard Drive Response y 2 Specify the program you want to execute Prompt Enter one of the names Response host status 3 Go to the task you want to perform Enable The Module 4 Enable the module Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Unput a host id in the following range no n n an Which module Response Enter the number of the module you want to enable Enter 10r a for AIP120 70 Note When cha
54. HDB3 CCS CLK REF TRUNKO Error Counters Error Sec 0000 OOF 0004 Slip 0000 ATS 0000 11 10 23 08 01 95 Fail Sec 0000 Bit Err 0000 Lcl Alm 0000 Rem Alm 0000 4 Check the CLK REF to ensure that it is the clock reference you chose If it is not repeat Step 2 to reselect the clock reference If the trunk reference does not change refer to the Centigram Series 6 Diagnostics Manual for troubleshooting information 5 After you have selected the system clock reference you want exit to the Main Menu Doc Rev A ce 3153 ae a Page 1 of 2 Monitor Digital Trunk Statistics VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later The ability to monitor digital trunks gives statistical data on trunk operation as it affects voice messaging This data is valuable for network management and for Series 6 server maintenance The trunk monitor display gives performance statistics totals for the period current the most recent second as indicated by the time and date stamp on the display The display is dynamic updated every second by the server As required for your data collection task you can reset the counters before you begin monitoring trunk statistics This feature can be useful for verifying trunk operation after reconfiguring a trunk or replacing a digital trunk interface card The trunk information presented and the statistics collected include Current state of the trunk in sync out of sync and so forth Trunk configuration framing line code
55. Instructions To update prompts follow steps 1 through 10 in section 3 2 Installation Instructions Then skip to step 13 and follow the rest of the procedure from that point Related Issues This section covers related issues with prompts installation and update 5 1 Numeric Prompts Sets There are two kinds of numeric prompts sets for American English full set and overlay The numeric full set when installed does not replace an existing full mnemonic set The numeric overlay set does replace the mnemonic full set and cannot be used unless the mnemonic full set was already installed Numeric overlay sets consist of two diskettes instead of six 5 1 1 Overlay Set Overlay sets do not need to be enabled It is a known problem that if the overlay set is installed the configuration report shows Numeric prompts enabled prompts not loaded 5 2 Online Enable The enabling portion of prompts Steps 11 and 12 can be performed with the server online The procedure is identical to loading an optional feature From the System Maintenance Menu choose the Additional Options Menu and then select A Add Optional Feature s When prompted Enter to add an Optional Feature N to stop respond with Y When prompted insert the Prompts Setup diskette and press Enter When asked whether to install another Optional Feature enter N If you enable the prompt set online you must duplicate the active configuration and then
56. L List Applications S Save Application X Exit Enter N to select Application Name This name will be used to install the application later in this procedure refer to page 23 Application Name EIB 200D Enter an Application Name EIB 200D in this example Enter D to select Application Description Application Description MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION Enter an application description MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION in this example 3 Enter T to select the Edit Template Menu IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 1 D Data A Action T Timeout E Error Action N Next Templates C Comment X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU Current Template 1 Template 1 Is selected by default Templates are used to match codes sent by the PBX Seven templates are required for this application Enter the following information for Template 1 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X D Data R EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action T EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X N Next Templates 2 3 4567 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X C Comment Answer call and run templates 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 1 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 1 D Data R A Action T T Timeout m 0 E Er
57. Legend PBX After completing the steps below you will need to program your switch to pass in band call information to the AIP VoiceMemo system Refer to your PBX manual for additional information Step Reference 1 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette DP 5402 2 Define a line group for the integration DP 6028 3 Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group DP 7006 4 Select the AT amp T Legend application for the line group P 7010 5 If your VoiceMemoa system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band JP 7016 tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks 6 Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to Venu Map 13 find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu Schedule Company Greetings l Enable Call Placement Message Delivery l Configure for Transfer to System Attendant l Define an Administrator s Mailbox i Define an Attendant s Mailbox l Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers 7 Exit and save your changes 8 Configure either RS 232 Message Waiti
58. Model 70 is housed in a standard PC cabinet The housing and its major parts listed below are considered one component An ISA compatible motherboard with a passive backplane which supports up to seven 16 bit ISA AT compatible cards line cards fax cards Smartcard Serial 16 32 card or an Ethernet card A 200 watt switchable power supply which provides power for outboard resources add in boards hard disk and floppy disk drive The power supply can operate at 120 volts AC or 240 volts AC Figure l 2 shows the details of the rear panel The rear panel includes the following connectors Console Port Serial Port 1 provides connection to console Product Description Serial Port 2 RS 232C connector provides connection to the remote administration maintenance modem and optional printer Parallel Port not supported AC Output Power Connector provides connection to a peripheral Adapter Card Expansion Slots 7 provide external connection to seven adapter cards Although there are eight slot openings at the rear panel the slop opening closest to the power supply has no corresponding connector to the motherboard Keyboard Connector not supported Voltage Switch selects operating voltage 120 volt default or 240 volt AC Input Power Connector provides connection to a 5V 12V power supply provided by user Power Supply Fan provides cooling for the cabinet Product Description Console Connector Seri
59. Name Set a default language for the line group e Enable multiple messages for outside callers 7 Exit and save your changes 8 Configure either RS 232 Message Waiting or DTMF to PBX Message Waiting See your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details 9 Cross connect phone lines from the System 25 to the VoiceMemo phone ports 10 Connect the System 25 and VoiceMemo system to same ground point DP 3021 Doc Rev A Configure Northern Telecom Norstar GP 5 07 Page 1 of4 Integration VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure summarizes the steps required to install and configure the Enhanced In band Integration feature to work with the Northern Telecom Norstar KSU Refer to the appendixes for reference information about this integration There are two sections to installing this integration installing and configuring the VoiceMemo software and configuring the Norstar Refer to your Norstar documentation for help when configuring the switch if necessary Step Reference Configure the VoiceMemo System 1 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature DP 5402 2 Define a line group for the integration DP 6028 3 Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group DP 7006 4 If your VoiceMemo system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band DP 7016 tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 soft
60. Page of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and hter Procedure Principal Task Message Delivery Specific Tasks Message Delivery Configuration on CP 3337 Allow Mailbox Owners to Control Message Delivery _ wr CP 33319 Allow Receipt of Urgent Pages or Urgent Message Delivery QOnily Procedures follow the task list in the Configuration section Follow the steps in Centigram Procedures CPs to accomplish the desired tasks Readers familiar with a Centigram Series 6 server can use the CPs as a checklist if desired while readers new to a Centigram Series 6 server can use Ps for step by step instructions A reference column in each CP contains pointers when necessary to supplemental information such as another procedure another manual a technical reference or a menu map Each Cl is numbered for document identification and referencing numbering does not indicate a sequence of performance A numerical list of all CPs in this manual is also provided It gives each CP s title Chapter number and which other procedures either call it or are called by it Most of the documents in the new Centigram Series 6 document library have menu maps You can refer to these document navigation aids at any point to help you reach a menu And don t overlook the index it is the fastest way to find all references to a specific topic About This Manual Worksheets You will find blank worksheets in the back o
61. Response OO sx 16 Enter the action to perform when the data is received The response for this call type is the login prompt or V1 greeting Select C Action Prompt Action Response V1 17 Enter the time out value For this template the time out is one second Select D Timeout Prompt Timeout Response 10 tenths of a second 18 Enter the error action This template hangs up if there are any errors Select E Error Action Prompt Error Action Response H Define the Direct Trunk Call Template 19 Enter the next template to match data against Select A Current Template Prompt Current template Response 3 20 Enter the data to match This template handles the direct trunk call The call type identifier is 0 1 Select B Data Prompt Data Response Q Doe Rev A DP 7501 Page 4 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 2 1 Enter the action to be performed when the data is received The general greeting or V5 greeting is appropriate Select C Action Prompt Action Response V5 22 Enter the time out value The time out value for this template is 1 second Select D Timeout Prompt Timeout Response 10 tenths of a second 23 Enter the error action to perform The error action for this template is to hang up Select E Error Action Prompt Error Action Response H Define the Internal Forwar
62. See the appropriate following chapters for the type of integration to be used Page 1 Installation All Integrations Chapter 2 The PMS Intearation installation INSTRUCTIONS For all three Integrations EECO HIS Encore 1 2 Insert the VoiceMemo serialized PMS Integration diskette in the floppy drive Execute a S ystem Shutdown under the System Maintenance console program to insure no calls in progress are cut off Push the reset button located on the back of the VoiceMemo unit After console has displayed BOOT FROM FLOPPY DO NOT INPUT ANY RESPONSE The next command will read Run commands from floppy disk Y N N Input Y followed by a carriage return to proceed with the installation Please note if users do not input Y within 6 seconds the system will proceed with its normal operation The floppy drive light and hard drive light will go on and off for a few minutes Users will see a list of VoiceMemo s Revision files Then the message Enabling extra cost feature reconfigure system if needed The reconfiguration program is automatically invoked The user will read VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU N Online Menu F Offline Menu X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND N F X Input an F to enter the Offline Menu Users will view the following Page 2 VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION Offline Menu WwW a L M T D G N S Y w
63. Station Service Assignment Apply the proper Class of service COS number to the ONS voice mail ports Toll fraud should be a consideration when assigning a COR to the voice mail ports External dialing may be required for Pager Notification or Message Forwarding Hunt Group Assignment MS2007 Only Assign the ONS Messaging port s to a voice mail hunt group type with a Pilot Number that does not conflict with any other dial string in the PBX Make the Hunt Mode Circular or Terminal NOTE Do NOT use single digit hunt group access codes Telephone Directory Assign a name to the voice mail hunt group number so users can easily identify a callback message from MTEL MAL E amp M Trunk Circuit Descriptor Assignment Address Signaling DTMF Incoming Start Type IMM Disconnect Timer 300 must be greater than the Maximum Flash Timer Minimum Flash Timer 100 250 ms 100 Maximum Flash Timer 200 250 ms 250 Outgoing Start Type IMM Fake Answer Supervision After Outpulsing Yes Ignore Answer Supervision Yes Release Supervision Expected Yes Audio Inhibit Until Answer Supervision No Transmission Facility 2 Wire 4 Wire 2 Wire NOTE The E amp M trunks on the PBX must be strapped for Type l Trunk Service Assignment Assign the E amp M trunks the proper COS COR and simply Absorb O as shown A Trunk Label such as VoiceMai may be entered Non Dial In Trunks Dial In Trunks Answer Points Incoming Digit
64. The connector must be crimped not soldered See figure 1 for details 3 For Central Office applications connect a single strand of 14 gauge wire from the XQ ground point to the cooling assembly grounding screw Note The connector must be crimped not soldered Note Impedance betweenn the AJP VoiceMemo system and the attached equipment or master ground bar should be less than 1 ohm at zero volts The maximum acceptable current is 0 1 amps RMS when all telephone lines are idle JRP CPU Assembly Grounding Screw CooingAssenbly Grounding Screw J21 P21 Figure 1 VoiceMemo System Ground location Doe Rev A DP 5402 Page 1 of 2 Install Optional Feature With System Online VoiceMemo Release 5 04A and later The procedure describes how to install an optional feature with the system online Be sure the Optional Feature Diskette s and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial number s for all disk s in the system CAUTION If you are loading a revision support disk RSD do it after completion of this procedure Loading the RSD first could create an incorrect configuration WARNING in This process causes the system to automatically reboot Pee an interruption to call processing Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the System Maintenance v enu Map 12 Additional Options
65. Trouble Shooting Guide ec eee 11 KO rodu chon ca oe eeue raner euer ae bon ee Wnt aod ue mas 11 20 SER ICA AOE eo euere teua ab ein caches gc Geen NGE 11 307 INGE AVGis fas ede Coa oe ga ea otha ava ear 6 E Na eats 11 4 0 Message Layer eee eee 11 5 0 Mailbox Re synchronization 17 12 6 0 Message Waiting 0c cece eee 12 7 0 Diagnostic Information oo eee eee 12 Hyatt Encore Configuration and Trouble Shooting 13 TED UMEOGUGUON so paaau san anena aie mara E rene hee 13 20r COMMGUATIOM So eaen As nein Soa tie cue has BE eo yet ee ta es ds 14 3 0 Mailbox Setup ang oyun Laaa 15 ALO STOR bt he Sak E ee E E E E an ce Se 16 T a E EEE twas onic Sparria sents ap iea aceon amine li ca 16 6 0 Console Administration i oo eon paaa 17 7 0 Batch Mode A A E E E ee 18 8 0 Communication Description oo 19 9 0 Message Formats aaau eee 19 10 0 Diagnostic Information ee 20 VoiceMemo Encore PMS Message Format 0000 eee eee eee 21 HIS and Encore Diagnostic Specification a aaan aaaeeeaa Appendix A Page 22 through 36 Overview Chapter 1 Overview of PMS Intearations This document describes how to install configure and trouble shoot three of Centigram s PMS integrations This information is an expanded version of the Appendix G of the Installation and Maintenance manual There are three PMS Integrations discussed in this document 1 The EECO PMS Integration 2 The HIS PMS Integr
66. Trunk Out of Service VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Digital trunks can be placed into and out of service OOS for maintenance purposes When a trunk is placed OOS the digital trunk interface card automatically sends an AIS to the far end to indicate the OOS state of the trunk Step Reference 1 Reach the Digital Connectivity Status Maintenance Menu vienu Map 13 2 Place a trunk out of service Select D Place trunk out of service Prompt Module holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Trunk number Response The number of the trunk of interest 3 Monitor a selected digital trunk to verify that the trunk is OOS Select B Monitor a single trunk Prompt Module holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Reset counters Y N Response type N Prompt Trunk number Response The number of the trunk selected in step 2 The system presents the following statistics display DIGITAL CARRIER STATUS DISPLAY Tue Aug 1 12 28 03 1995 TRUNK NO 0 CUR STATE 00S CONFIG CEPT HDB3 CCS CLK REP TRUNKO Error Counters Error Sec 0000 OOF 0004 Slip 0000 AIS 0000 11 10 23 08 01 95 Fail Sec 0000 Bit Err 0000 Yel Alm 0000 Rem Alm 0000 4 Check the CUR STATE of the trunk to ensure that it is out of service If it is not repeat Step 2 to set it out of service If the trunk status does not change refer to the Centigram Series 6 Server Diagnostics Manual for troubleshoot
67. VoiceMemo system is running cdrmenu provides an interface to cause selected information to be written to a CDR log file For the HIS Encore PMS system interface one new CDR level has been added to allow diagnostic monitoring The additional level is 22 HIS EECO Encore PMS It is useful to have this level active for short periods of time for full diagnostic monitoring of the integration Disk space on drive 4 is required to allow logging into the CDR file If drive 4 becomes 100 full the CDR log file and the log file will loose additional information king written to these files Listed below are methods to operate CDR and monitor drive 4 dish space The data logged is from one of three active tasks and two short lived spanned tasks that make up the running programs of the HIS Encore PMS system interface The names of the tasks are hissnd hisrev hismwi hisinit and hisresyne where hisinit and hisresync are the short lived spanned tasks Each of these tasks when enabled with CDR level 22 logs data to the CDR file for specific events Data logged by hissnd starts with hissnd in the CDR file Data logged by hisrev starts with HISRCV in the GDR file Data logged by hismwi starts with HISMWI in the CDR file Data logged by hisinit starts with hisinit in the CDR file Data logged by hisresyne starts with HISRESYNC in the CDR file To log diagnostics for HIS Encore PMS integration with the Call Detail Recorder complete the foll
68. a passcode if FCOS bit 18is enabled Tips amp Techniques The Error Action Field entries are case sensitive w is different from W Interactions and Limitations If several templates experience a time out or receive unexpected data the template that is the last to match performs its error action Line cards wink automatically when line exception 24 is enabled Turn it off to control winks from the in band templates Note that you can control the time before a wink wn the duration of a wink W n and the wait after a wink wn Host Number 2 8 Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter Module number 1 4 Default How It Works This parameter works with the Number of Inband Tasks on This Host parameter to set the amount of system CPU resources assigned to an Enhanced In band Integration Use this parameter to select a module Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters host and then use the Number parameter to set the number of tasks for the module Repeat the procedure for each module that has phone ports assigned to an Enhanced In band line group Interactions amp Limitations This parameter is only required for VoiceMemo Releases 5 02 and 5 03 software Release 5 04 configures the number of tasks per module automatically See Also Number of Inband Tasks on This Host Install Application Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu La What to Enter The name of the appl
69. a tnri timeout will be generated This timer is set after a packet is sent Timeout on response with busy receiver tnrb This parameter represents the amount of time that VoiceMemo will wait for a response from the Paging Terminal when the VoiceMemo side of the link is busy If the time expires a tnrb timeout will be generated This timer is set after a packet is sent Timeout on response to ENQ tnre This parameter represents the amount of time that VoiceMemo will wait for a response from the Paging Terminal after VoiceMemo has sent an ENQ to the Paging Terminal If the time expires a tnre timeout will be generated RS flag hold off time thold This parameter represents the amount of time that VoiceMemo will wait before re sending a packet if an RS was received from the Paging Terminal after the packet was sent When the timer expires the packet will be sent again Timeout on idle link for keep alive ENQ tidle This parameter represents the amount of time that a TNPP link can be idle before VoiceMemo will send an ENQ Number of retries by sending station per packet Cretry This parameter represents how many times VoiceMemo will make on a packet that has been NAK d Re transmits in response to RS holdbacks Chold This parameter represents the number of times that WoiceMemo will re send a packet that an RS has been received on Number of ENQ retries before error logging Cenq This parameter represents the number ENQ retries that V
70. activate the inactive configuration Both these actions are available under the Offline Menu under System maintenance Reconfiguration Reconfigure System Page 8 5 3 Languages per Server The maximum number of languages available on each type of Series 6 server is listed below Server Type I Max Number of Languages Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions Enhanced In band Integration Manual w Trademark of M itel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mite Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada 1996 Centigram Communications Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Centigram Communications Corporation 91 East Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 REPRODUCTION Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may copy this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright notice above is included in all reproductions PROPRIETARY TERMS The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Centigram Communications Corporation AIP CallAgent CallText Centigram PROSE Speaklit SpeechPlus SPEECH TruVoi
71. again made available The system maintains for these carrier events for each trunk e gt gt D DD oo O rae Loss of frame LOS Frame slips Bit errors Remote Alarms s All one s signal AIS Local carrier alarm Remote carrier alarm Errored seconds Failed seconds When the server is online service personnel can monitor several digital trunk conditions and control several functions These include 1 6 Displaying event counters current trunk state current clock source and trunk configuration for a single trunk or all trunks in a module Setting the module clock reference Connecting or disconnect a digital loopback toward the facility Placing a digital trunk out of service This action returns an AIS to the switch Restoring a digital trunk to service El Digital Trunk Connectivity Configuration Digital trunk connectivity configuration is done offline through the Physical Resource Configuration Manager Configuration for a Dual El card and for a digital trunk connection consists of the following Selecting the physical slot assignment for the card Setting the module number in which the card is installed Configuring the I O port address of the card Setting the signaling in use by the trunk l Setting the sequence number of the trunk Configuring the framing format Configuring the coding format for the PCM bit stream Procedure CP 3 15 1 lists the steps for configuring a Dual El
72. and configure the Enhanced n band Integration optional feature to work with the AT amp T System 25 PBX Refer to the appendixes for reference information about this integration After completing the steps below you will need to program your switch to pass in band call information to the AIP VoiceMemo system Refer to your PBX manual for additional information Step Reference 1 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette DP 5402 2 Define a line group for the integration f DP 6028 3 Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group gt P 7006 4 Select the AT amp T System 25 application for the line group IP 7010 5 If your VoiceMemo system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band P 7016 tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks 6 Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to Venu Map 13 find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu Schedule Company Greetings Enable Call Placement Message Delivery Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by
73. and signaling Source of the system clock reference Errored seconds ES Out of frame conditions OOF Frame slips 1 AIS Failed seconds FS Bit errors Local alarm totals Remote alarm totals Step Reference 1 Reach the Digital Connectivity Status Maintenance Menu Menu Map 13 2 Monitor a selected digital trunk Select B Monitor a single trunk Prompt Host holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Reset counters Y N Response As required Y Prompt Trunk number Response The number of the trunk of interest The system presents the following statistics display DIGITAL CARRIER STATUS DISPLAY Tue Aug 1 12 28 03 1995 TRUNK NO 0 CUR STATE IN SYNC CONFIG CEPT HDB3 CCS CLK REF TRUNKO Error Counters mm Error Sec 0000 OOF 0004 Slip 0000 AIS 0000 11 10 23 08 01 95 Fail Sec 0000 Bit Err 0000 Lcl Alm 0000 Rem Alm 0000 Doc Rev A CP 3153 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 3 Press Q to return to the Digital Connectivity Status Maintenance Menu 4 Monitor all digital trunks Select A Monitor all trunks Prompt Host holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Reset counters Y N Response As required Y The system presents the information shown in Step 2 5 When done monitoring the trunks exit to the Main Menu Doc Rev A ce 3154 ae Page 1 of 1 Put Digital
74. attaches it s name hisrcv and hismwi can locate it and link communication will proceed as expected s HISMWI Unable to send to hissnd data lost at level x HISMWI Unable to turn MWI ON off for mailbox x Internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hismwi needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name The data is lost and hismwi continues to run looking for further link data The PMS system is probably not getting any data from hissnd and so it will consider the link down When hissnd successfully restarts and attaches it s name hisrcv and hismwi can locate it and link communication will proceed as expected The level number is for engineering use to determine which one of three levels of sending the failure occurred The second half of the message informs what mailbox was involved and if message waiting failed for an on or off attempt HISMWI Unable to locate mwla internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hismwi starts and it tries to locate the mwla task and fails HISMWYI Unable to locate mwla in loop Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hismwi tries to send a response to the mwla at any time and fails hisresync HISRESYNC Resync mes
75. band Integration usually consists of several templates Each template consists of six fields Data Action Error Action Time out Next Templates and Comment All of the fields are explained below followed by a sample template set This field specifies the data expected from the switch Table 1 1 lists the valid data items Action Enhanced In band Integration Table 1 1 Valid Data Field Entries DTMF MF digits DTMF A through D column four digits MF digits KP and ST respectively Ring or seizure Dial Tone Hang up Fixed length source extension containing n digits 11 max Fixed length destination extension containing n digits 11 max Variable length source extension 11 max terminated by DTMEF MEF character n Variable length destination extension 11 max terminated by DTMEF ME character n Ignore n digits Ignore all digits until the DTMF MF digit n This field tells the VoiceMemo system what action s to take if the data received completely matches the template specification You can specify more than one action Table 1 2 lists the valid actions 1 5 Enhanced In band Integration Error Action Time out Table 1 2 Valid Action Field Entries Dial DTMF digits nn O V A D Hang up Go off hook Wink n 10s of a second Wait n 1 Os of a second Play login prompt with passcode required Play login prompt passcode optional Play Forward All greeting f Play Ring No Answer greeting P
76. card separates the ISUP information from PCM channel 16 and hands it off to the application running in the CPU On the transmit side of the trunk for outgoing calls for example to a help line the SS7 card assembles the SUP data from the CPU for the Dual El Trunk Interface card Similarly the DSP 30 line card formats the outgoing voice data For FaxMemo applications the fax card fulfills the role of the DSP 30 line card but for facsimiles Dual El Trunk Interface Card The Series 6 Server Dual Fl trunk interface card is the interface for up to two El 2 048 Mbps CEPT digital trunks The card conforms to CCITT Recommendation G 704 for PCM 30 and to 1 431 CCITT Recommendation for ISDN The interface card an AT bus compatible adapter card plugs into the Series 6 server backplane in Model 70 Model 120 and Model 640 servers The Dual El interface card can be ordered to support either balanced 1 00Q standard 8 pin RJ 48C or unbalanced 759 trunk connections El Digital Trunk Connectivity Integration With Analog Trunk Interfaces The El Digital Trunk Connectivity feature may coexist with analog trunks in the same Series 6 server module In such configurations the voice channel cards are mix of DSP30 line cards used in conjunction with the El trunks and LC8 line cards used in conjunction with the analog trunks The Dual El digital trunk interface and the DSP30 line cards interconnect through the MVIP bus Configuration and l
77. carrier as previously described 7 Orient to the front of the cabinet and slide the floppy disk drive into the drive carrier beside the hard disk 8 Align the mounting holes with the carrier holes 9 Install three screws M3 6 hex head Phillips screws two at the top of the carrier and one at the bottom 10 Make sure the drives are securely fastened in the carrier 11 Position the carrier above the cabinet The front of the floppy disk drive faces the front of the cabinet and should line up with the opening in the front panel 12 Lower the carrier into the cabinet lining up the front tab on the carrier with the slot that projects from the side of the 5 25 inch bay 13 Slide the carrier toward the front until the left front tab and the screw holes line up Dac Rev A CP 6222 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 14 Secure the carrier into the cabinet using four mounting screws 6 32 hex head Phillips screws If the floppy disk drive needs to be properly aligned with the front bezel loosen the mounting screws holding it to the carrier by at most one quarter turn Adjust the position as needed Once the floppy disk drive is aligned tighten the two screws again 15 Connect the data cables to the drives Connect floppy disk drive to J 13 Connect hard disk to J14 16 Connect power cables to the drives 17 Check the quality of your work and to see that no tools or loose parts a
78. cccccccccsscsssssssssseessssesesseessesescseesseseenees Special Application Mailboxes Administrator Attendant Broadcasts 24 528 AS Aa AE E Optional Special Application Mailboxes occ eseseseeeeeeneeeseeees Guaranteed Fakon E OA AN sede A Aa teas Fax Publishing A AT E ROA Fax Store and Forward eesessesseeseseseserseseeesseresesesrereesesresesesenessese MESA pO S e r a E E a RA 2 Installing New Systems 3 Upgrading How To Use This Chapter Using the Task List Site Selection and Preparation Before YOu Start 2 4 ssscctesdeceseestidekesdeavtsedenvauieseamhanaadestanetdemnness Installing the Model 70 sesessscseseeeeseseseeseseassesneseeceensseeeeneaeaea Customer Turnover Task List and Procedures and Updating Systems How Pose This Chapter reae E Wesinig the Task last sisi cach ach E as eit ea has a US BS ae Task List and Procedures 4 Replacing FRUs How To Use This Chapter oo ceecescsesseseseeceseseseesesssesnsnesseeeneseseeseaes Using the Task List Service SAEN Peine R EEA OR AAEE 1 17 l 17 1 17 1 17 1 17 l 18 1 18 1 1 8 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 3 1 4 4 1 4 2 Table of Contents Support Plans 0 esis eee ia sake cet tea E idan x oe ea ee ee MS eae 4 3 Self Sufficient soc eshte tal aoa eee ade 4 3 Centigram Service Partner eee esses eseeseseseeseseseseeseecess
79. configuration files then returns to the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu 5 Make the necessary system configuration changes if necessary per the instructions provided with the optional feature documentation Doc Rev A DP 5402 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 5 04A and later Reference Step 6 Exit the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu The system will perform a system shutdown Prompt W ait for message waiting queues to be empty Response Y to wait for the queue to clear N to continue immediately with the shutdown The system then completes the shutdown and activates the software returning to the System Maintenance Additional Options Menu Doc Rev A pp 6028 Page of 2 Define a Line Group for Applications VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure describes how to define a line group for an application Step Reference Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Menu Map 2 CAUTION ain y You may want to copy the active configuration to ensure that the A inactive configuration reflects the configuration that is currently operating 2 If desired duplicating the configuration Select B Duplicate Active Configuration Response The system copies the current active configuration When copying is completed the short form of the Offline Menu appears All subsequent steps in this procedure along with any other configuration entries affect just the copy and take effe
80. current E mail application by launching it from within OneView It also allows you to view all your voice and fax messages at a glance prioritize them and send and receive messages that combine voice mail and faxes Functional System Partition Administration FPSA This feature adds a much higher level of security to Series 6 server administration for both Customer Premise Equipment CPE customers and service providers FPSA is particularly useful to telephone companies service providers and large CPE customers who want to limit access to operations administration and maintenance OA amp M functions on a departmental or individual basis In addition FPSA offloads or resells certain administrative functions to restricted groups within your organizations or within your customer base FPSA adds security in five ways First it can be activated only by a special diskette which will be shipped upon request Second FPSA controls access to all parts of the server administration menus or QNX by passwords and user D s Third you can control who has access to batch commands Fourth superusers can force system administrators to change their 1 15 Product Description passcodes every number of days Fifth FPSA provides an audit trail if the audit trail is turned on every time an administrator enters the server Automated or Video Dispatch This feature enables you to establish mailboxes with specialized distribution lists for d
81. displayed in a prompt just press Enter To accept a default displayed in a menu no action is necessary Avoiding Automatic Exit CAUTION The Centigram Series 6 server times out after 15 minutes This means that if you do not enter anything at the console for 15 minutes the server automatically exits from the current program When this happens all work that has not been saved on the disk is lost To avoid being timed out and losing your work follow these steps 1 2 When you need time to think write down the name of the current menu Exit to the server Main Menu When you want to continue your work enter the appropriate menu options to regain your place xU About This Manual If you find that the Centigram Series 6 server has timed out follow the steps below If your screen is blank press any key to reactivate the screen and then continue with these steps 1 Press any key to start the login sequence 2 Enter your user ID and password if requested 3 Starting from the Main Menu enter menu options to proceed to the menu from which the server timed out 4 Reenter data as needed to regain lost work Quitting an Entry Session At any point during entry of offline or online parameters you can quit Quitting discards all parameter entries you have made and leaves the VoiceMemo application configuration the way it was before you starred entering parameters To quit from the VojceMemo Configuratio
82. displays the following Group 1 Lines Name Voicememo Configuration Online Menu G Group Selected 1 M Modify Application C Report Current Configuration Q Quit Forget Changes X Exit Save Changes 2 Enter G to select your group Enter the number of the Enhanced In band line group 3 Enter M to Modify Application The system displays Enhanced In Band A Configure Application B Other Features X Exit 4 Enter A to select Configure Application The system displays the Enhanced In band menu Enhanced In Band Date Installed XXXXXXXX Dated Modified XXXXXXXX N Application Name D Application Description T Edit Template Menu P Edit Parameters Menu 0 Show Applications I Install Application L List Applications S Other Features X Exit 5 Enter N to name the application The Application Name is used to install the integration it is case sensitive gt Enter Mitel 6 Enter D to select Application Description Enter Mitel Enhanced Integration Templates are used to match codes sent by the PBX 7 8 Enter T to access the Edit Template Menu The system displays the following IN BAND Edit Template Menu Timeout Error Action M Modify Template D Data A Action T E N Next Template C Comment X Exit Enter M and enter the Template Number to modify Enter the template information as show
83. dx V4 20 H A 5 Fujits Wrarlog A G Comment T20 Next Comment T21 Next Comment T22 Next Comment T23 Next Comment Busy forwarded external call No stuffed digit in destination 9 Xx 0 dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded external call Stuffed 0 in destination 9 Xx dx V3 20 H RNA forwarded external call No stuffed digit in destination 0 Xx 0 dx V2 20 H Forward ALL forwarded external call Stuffed 0 in destination b 0 Xx dx V2 20 H Forward ALL forwarded external call No stuffed digit in destination Appendix B Omni Enhanced In band Integration This appendix contains supplemental information about integrating an AIP VoiceMemo system with an Omni PBX See the Task List for procedures to configure the integration Features and Functions The Omni integration operates over standard two wire E amp M trunk circuits The switch routes direct and forwarded calls to the VojceMemo application over one group of trunks The VoiceMemo system sends message waiting requests to the switch over a separate trunk or group of trunks The Receptionist II application if installed operates on the same line group as the VoiceMemo application The PBX uses a hunt group to route station and trunk calls to the VoiceMemo system All of the trunks in the hunt group are identified as VMS Voice Mail System trunks in the switch database Because they are VMS trunks the switch sends in b
84. from one of its own ports Set line exception 9 for ringing timeout to be greater than the Norstar s Forward No Answer timer See the Receptionist IIT Manual for more information about programming for Receptionist II VoiceMemo Template Specifications The template sets for Norstar integration must be modified to have the correct forward prefix digit and hunt group pilot number The default templates for Norstar integration are NAME NORSTAR DESCRIPTION Northern Telecom NORSTAR T1 R T Next 2 3 Comment Wait for ring go off hook T2 6 239 W5 10 V5 Next Comment Direct call that forwards past first VMI port T3 6 d3 V2 10 V5 Next Comment Forwarded call from a station a e e D4 Appendix E Worksheet for Enhanced In band Integration This appendix contains the worksheet used for configuring the Enhanced In Band Integration F Enhanced In band Integration Worksheet E SS SREE SORE EI cian Enhanced I in band Menu I Applica on Application Name Application Description 10 chars max MF Enable Offline Menus in band Edit Templates Template Menu Template Valid Data Field Entries Data ____ Action Data Description f f 0 9 DTMF MF digits Timeout Error Action i I DTMF A through D column four digits i Next Templates MF digits KP and ST respectively Comment Ring or seizure Dial tone Han Template E Mp B Fix
85. in relation to one another and the server The Network Class of Service NCOS Restriction Class of Service RCOS and Tenant Class of Service TCOS are related to optional features Standard Model 70 features include voice messaging audible tone message waiting signals and notification services The user interface consists of mnemonic using letters instead of numbers for commands for example P to play a message and single digit prompts and an online user tutorial The following optional features are also available with the Model 70 FaxMemo OneView Cut Through Paging CallAgent MESA Forms Receptionist II Auto Wakeup Integrations MESA Net and AMIS Analog Additionally specialty cards can also be installed in the Model 70 such as a Fax card Smartcard Ethernet Card Serial 16 32 card and others You can perform system administration and maintenance tasks either on site or remotely via telephone A VT1 00 compatible terminal is required to perform installation and maintenance and an outboard modem with cables is required for remote administration The WJ 00 does not support full screen mode In addition to adds and changes maintenance and restore functions and system reports are available to the system administrator Centigram s VoiceMemo Release 6 0 is installed To provide features the Model 70 uses QNX a real time multi tasking operating system to control server resources The Model 70 supports the Audio
86. inversion and AMI with ZCS zero code suppression coding formats for T1 trunks You select coding for the trunk at the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk y Menu Clock Synchronization The system master clock must be synchronized to the network that is a selected T1 RxD signal The digital clock reference can be set to one of the following e Network l Default e Internal reserved for connections to channel banks The network clock referenceis the RxD signal of a selected T 1 trunk In the case of Model 70 and Model 1201 the selected trunk is trunk 0 For Model 120S selected trunk can be O or 1 For Model 640 the selected trunk can be 0 1 2 or 3 only one trunk can be selected The default reference is trunk 0 The Series 6 server features automatic switchover to a backup clock source if the primary fails However this feature functions only when both trunks of a Dual T card are used and the clock is synchronized to the RxD signal of one of them Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Then if the trunk to which the clock reference is derived the Series 6 server will automatically switch over to the second trunk on the Dual T card Note This clock source switchover feature does not work if digital trunk connectivity is split between two Dual T1 cards When configuring the system use the network clock as the system clock reference to prevent frame slips Figure 2 6 However use the internal c
87. mailbox digits zz is the VoiceMemo Enhanced In band Trunk Group number You do not need to program a hunt group for calls to reach the VoiceMemo system The number of the VoiceMemo trunk group in the IDENTIFIER associates this DN with trunks that you marked as VMS trunks in step 6 GP 504 Page 5 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 8 Use RC 113 to create a dummy extension and then forward that extension to the DN for the Enhanced In band trunk group with RC 14 This extension is the number that users must dial to retrieve their messages You should select an easy to remember number for this extension DIR C0S DIV DIV DIV NUM D N cnD DST ID XXXX YY zz DA VM Where XXX is the DN for message retrieval from step 7 YY ZZ is the Basic Class of Service Configure Message Waiting Trunk 9 Use the following RC transactions to add the message waiting trunk group The trunk group probably only contains one trunk RC 161 Add Change Trunk Group Characteristics TRUNK SIGNALLING IN OUT PAD TRK N RTN DIAL ALT CLASS GRP TRUNK DSP DSP TRK SGNL DIAL SGNL TONE TRK 2 3 AGENT NO APPL COS COS DIR TYPE TONE TYPE RTND GRP WAY WAY GROUP XXX TIE YY ZZ IN TC DT N 03 4 DO YOU WANT DTMF SIGNALS BLOCKED Y N gt N Where XXX is the trunk group number YY is the displayable COS ZZ is the non displayable COS RC 169 Add Change Trunk Group Characteristics 2 Doc Rey A GP 504
88. messages Fax Store and Forward provides an efficient way to store important faxes and relay them to other related parties MESA Forms MESA Forms is a template or voice forms application It allows callers to leave messages in a way that simulates written information on paper forms such as questionnaires requests for information or schedules 1 19 2 Installing New Systems How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides step by step procedures for installing a new Model 70 Additional information is also located in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the System Implementation Guide A task list and Centigram Procedures CPs describing new server installations are located at the end of this chapter The task list identifies two procedural levels of CPs a high level CP and a low level Cl A high level CP provides instructions on how to do overall tasks such as installing a server A low level CP provides instructions on more specific tasks such as how to install a line card Readers familiar with Centigram servers can use the CPs as a checklist if desired while readers new to Centigram servers can use CPs for step by step instructions After gaining experience with this documentation you can find your own innovative way of using the task list One possible approach on how to use the task list is provided below Using the Task list Select from the task
89. of Receptionist M esien deneiiainns nina i A 3 VoiceMemo Template Specifications cccsccscssssssssecssseessssessssssseseesseee A 4 Appendix B Omni Enhanced In band Integration Features and Functions sessami desee ea ona EEK aeien e AEn B l Hardware and Software Requirements ssseeseeesseecsteeseeseneesecenseeseenneeeasees B 2 Feature Interactions and Limitations s ss sssssesssressssssssreesssssssesseessssseeesses B 3 tse or Receptionist Menace a a E O B 3 VoiceMemo Template Specifications s ssssssnesssssssssesecsseeseeeseeses B 4 Appendix C System 25 Enhanced In band Integration Features and Functions C l iv Appendix D Hardware and Software Requirements ccceceeeceeecc eee ceeeceeeceeeeaeceuneeaes c 2 Use of Receptionist IE 2ss c c c2 secadeaaeshpenaaescd senesced A E A E A ERa A C 3 VoiceMemo Template Specifications cccecccecessteseteceeeeeseeceeeeneeseneenaes C 3 Norstar Enhanced In band Integration Features and Functions 0 ccccccccccccescccsteessseeecceeeectietesttsessrseetraaeey D 1 Hardware and Software Requirements ccccccccrccerreeeeirrniirn renren D 2 Feature Interactions and Limitations 00 0000 ccccccccccceueecceecuesceeeceueeeeeenaes D 3 Userof Receptionist oessa unene snad labels eds to hecha te teat sees sea beatabesaddenaa nese sy D 3 VoiceMemo Template Specifications 0000ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
90. offset transforms the incoming strings into a different mailbox number by adding or subtracting a given number If the switching system sends a 1234 and the Called Extension Signed Offset is 200 the VoiceMemo system changes the extension number to mailbox 1434 Conditional Greetings Mailbox owners can use conditional greetings to let callers know why they reached the VoiceMemo system no answer busy or call forward If the dialed extension was busy the caller hears the Busy greeting If the called party did not answer the caller hears the Ring No Answer greeting Mailbox owners can use the prerecorded conditional greetings or they can record their own greetings The conditional greetings are enabled in a user s FCOS however users must activate the feature from within their own mailboxes Note Not all switches can provide the call information required to support conditional greetings Administrative Interface You use both offline and online menus to configure an Enhanced In band Integration on a VoiceMemo system You use the offline menus to define a new line group assign the line group to the Enhanced In band Integration and configure application parameters You use the online menus to install the integration template set or configure an existing template set The final step required to fully configure an Enhanced In band Integration is to set the mailbox message waiting types Enhanced In band Integration The Enhance
91. optional feature manual Updates to procedures and the Model 70 are issued to the field in Centigram s Notices to Installers You should add them to this guide as appropriate cr 6220 Page 1 of 4 Remove Install a Line Card VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes first how to remove and then how to install a line card in a Centigram Series 6 Model 7 0 WARNING This procedure requires that you shut down the system which results in an interruption to call processing on the server Centigram recommends that you perform these steps during periods of low traffic DANGER Disconnect the server from its power source before connecting either cables or comnonents CAUTION Protect your server from ESD damage during handling of all comnonents Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference CJ Observe Precautions l Put on a grounded wrist strap and attach the other end to the cabinet Doing so protects the component from electrostatic discharge 2 Shut down the system and turn off the power if you have not already done so CAUTION Removing a component while the power is on can severely damage the component you are working on and other peripherals 3 Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet 4 When removing a component place i
92. procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 servers In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 70 The Model 70 is equivalent to a one module server When asked for the number of the host or module 66 always enter 1 or a All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference C Introduction The Series 6 server allows the customer to expand the number of message storage hours to meet the expanding needs of users This is done by either adding disk capacity or adding disk drives disks to the server The program to add a disk is called Add Disk There are two methods for accessing the Add Disk program 1 From the Hardware Configuration Menu 2 From the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes This procedure describes both methods Centigram recommends running the Add Disk program from the Hardware Configuration Menu Both procedures prevent the server from processing calls during the upgrade Before you implement the upgrade please follow these guidelines l Check that the serial numbers imprinted on the labels of the Service Diskette and the Optional Feature Diskette coincide with the serial numbers of the primary disk and the redundant disk that you are adding Note Centigram recommends that y
93. s pager TNPP RF Zone This prompt is displayed if CAP paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the Radio Frequency zone designator for the mailbox owner s pager TNPP Function Code Enter the function code for the mailbox owner s pager Post Pager number The number entered here will be sent to the pager display if the page is not a Cut Through page If there are no Post pager digits in the mailbox the TNPP System message will be sent to the pager 4 TESTING Testing of TNPP Paging can be done after the Offline TNPP configuration has been completed and the configuration has been activated Configure one or more test mailboxes for TNPP NOTE If a TNPP page in is queue or in process for a mailbox subsequent MWI ON requests for that mailbox will be ignored If the frequency has not been exhausted or the message in the mailbox has not been deleted the page will still be in queue An MWI OFF must be sent to terminate the page that is in progress or in the queue This can be done using the Lights Test utility or by deleting the message from the mailbox Use the lights test from the System Maintenance Menu Additional Options selection Send an On to the mailbox Result The mailbox s pager should receive a page and continue receiving pages at the configured interval until the configured page frequency has been exhausted or an Off has been sent The pager will display the Post pager digits if they wer
94. signal and the default clock reference trunk 0 24 Exit when you are done 25 If you have completed your digital trunk connectivity feature configuration activate the configuration If you have not completed configuring digital trunk connectivity go to the appropriate procedure Doc Rev A Change the Digital Trunk Connectivity Clock CP 3 1 5 Z Page 1 of 1 Reference VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later In addition to the clock reference selection in the offline digital trunk configuration the clock reference can be changed through the Digital Connectivity Maintenance Menu Step Reference Reach the Digital Connectivity Status Maintenance Menu Menu Map 13 2 Change the module clock reference Select C Change module clock reference Prompt Module Holding digital board s Response The number of the module in which the affected digital trunk interface card is installed a Prompt Module clock reference 1 0 3 Response I for internal or the number 0 1 2 or 3 which corresponds to the trunk to which you want the clock reference derived 3 Monitor all trunks to verify that the clock reference has changed to the reference you Selected in step 2 Select A Monitor all trunks Prompt Module holding digital board s Response The number of the module The system presents the following statistics display DIGITAL CARRIER STATUS DISPLAY Tue Aug 1 12 28 03 1995 TRUNK NO 0 CUR STATE IN SYNC CONFIG CEPT
95. that support computer fax and LAN services such as Fax cards Smartcards Ethernet cards and Serial 16 32 cards Product Description Fax Card Fax cards handle incoming fax messages and support other telephone interfaces When the incoming fax tone is emitted the fax card performs a handshake with the fax machine that is sending the tone and processes the incoming fax The Fax card sends the fax to the hard disk where it is stored for later retrieval or distribution by the user For detailed Fax card information see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the VoiceMemo FaxMemo Manual Smartcard Smartcards provide multiple simultaneous serial connections required for applications such as PBX integration host computer communication and MESA Net networking This card is compatible with EIA RS 232 C CCITT v 24 and V 28 asynchronous communications standards Smartcards feature two four or eight ports and are full size AT cards that plug into empty slots on the Model 70 cabinet s backplane For detailed Smartcard information see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the Smartcard Manual Serial 16 32 Card Serial 16 32 cards are replacement cards for Smartcards that provide faster throughput such as sixteen channels through an external adapter box For detailed Serial 16 32 card information see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Ethernet Cards Ethernet cards provide s
96. the console is attached to last FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or Co a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks Step Reference Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the Module Maintenance Menu Menu Map 12 2 Enable the module Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Input a module id in the following range non n n Which Module Response Enter the number of the module to be enabled Enter 1 or a for Model 120 or Model 70 The specified module automatically resets itself and returns to normal operation Doc Rev A ce7015 Page 1 of 1 Update Disk Redundancy VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to update the disk redundancy Each hard disk is partitioned into multiple logical drives To make sure all drive partitions are updated use the Update all out of synchronization hard disks option Note The server allows you to watch the number of the sector number being updated but this display slows the verification process Use the following table to determine which types of dri
97. the carrier above the cabinet The front of the floppy disk drive faces the front of the cabinet and should line up with the opening in the front panel Doc Rev A CP 6221 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 12 Lower the carrier into the cabinet lining up the front tab on the carrier with the slot that projects from the side of the 5 25 inch bay 13 Slide the carrier toward the front until the left front tab and the screw holes line up 14 Secure the carrier into the cabinet using four mounting screws 6 32 hex head Phillips screws Note Ifthe floppy disk drive needs to be properly aligned with the front bezel loosen the mounting screws holding it to the carrier by at most one quarter turn Adjust the position as needed Once the floppy disk drive is aligned tighten the two screws again 15 Connect the data cables Doc Rev A CP 6222 Page of 5 Remove Install Floppy Disk Drive VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure first describes how to remove and then how to install the floppy disk in the Centigram Series 6 Model 70 It also describes how to remove and reinstall the drive carrier The drive carrier houses both the floppy disk drive and the hard disk For detailed floppy disk drive specifcations see TR 192 1 in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual DANGER Disconnect the server from its power source before connecting cables components or both
98. the information packet and compares it to the templates and then plays the appropriate greeting to the caller For example if a caller at extension 123 calls extension 456 and the extension is not answered the PBX creates an information packet and sends it to the VoiceMemo system as shown in Figure I 2 PBX AIP System Information Packet C1 456 1 23H Extension 456 3001EIB Figure 1 2 Sample Call Handling This switch uses the DTMF tones Cl to indicate that the call was not answered The resulting information packet is shown in Figure 1 3 1 3 Enhanced In band Integration Call type identifier Calling Extension Called Extension XC1 456 123 I Separators 3002EIB Figure l 3 Sample Information Packet The EIB software compares the information packet to the expected patterns set in the templates and identifies the call type and the associated mailboxes The VoiceMemo system then plays the no answer greeting for mailbox 456 and records a message When the mailbox owner calls in the VoiceMemo system says that the message is from mailbox 123 The EIB software comes with preprogrammed template sets for many telephone systems so the installer does not need to create the templates Using the administrative interface it is easy to modify existing templates in the field or create new template sets for additional switches if necessary Template Structure Data 1 4 An Enhanced In
99. this procedure CAUTION Information that helps you prevent equipment or software damage CAUTION Information that helps you avoid electrostatic discharge ESD damage to the equipment WARNING Information that helps you prevent an interruption to telecommunications traffic WARNING A hazard that can cause you personal injury DANGER Warns of a condition that could severely injure or kill you About This Manual Before You Start This manual assumes that you are familiar with using a console and keyboard This section describes how to use the Centigram Series 6 server effectively Console Tips and Techniques The tips and techniques offered in the following paragraphs can make configuration entry sessions at the Centigram Series 6 server maintenance console more productive Viewing Menus When you finish entering a value for a parameter the server displays an abbreviated form of the current menu called the short menu To view the complete current menu when a short menu is displayed just press Enter To return to the Main Menu from any VoiceMemo application configuration menu press X Exit until the Main Menu appears Accepting Defaults To accept a default displayed in a prompt just press Enter To accept a default displayed in a menu no action is necessary Avoiding Automatic Exit CAUTION The Centigram Series 6 server times out after 15 minutes This means that if
100. vnyconfig tcp host to ust vmy config tcp host old cp Copying usr vm config tcp host 0 to usr vm config tep host Master configuration record updated restarting tasks u System restart messages not shown Wait for the system to restart and display Program Initialization Complete SOS IIR RE EE IRE k Program Initialization Complete RAO IA IO A AIO FOR KS Press Enter key here to re display VoiceMemo Active Configuration Menu VOICEMEMO ACTIVE CONFIGURATION MENU A Activate Configuration N Name Configurations Y View Configurations X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A N V X gt Enter X to return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu COMMAND A B C D E F G H X remember press Enter to expand any menu VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU A Activate Configuration B Hardware Configuration C Increase System Hours D Define Floating Modules E Modify Active Configuration F Modify Inactive Configuration G Offline Menu H Configure Unified Integration X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A B C D E F G H X 15 6 2 Step 2 Configure the Enhanced In Band Application After the line group is set to run the Enhanced in band application configuration is required for the application to work correctly The previous steps left the system at the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu prompt Enter S RR from the Main Menu VOICEME
101. x UPDATE PROGRAM kx UPDATE program ONLY updates the system software files Data such as accounts and speech will remain unchanged prompts cleared later on UPDATE program only if told so Any billing data files constructed via the G ather command may be incompatible with the new release To be sure you will not lose billing information run a billing report before doing this update gt The SYSTEM LOGFILE and CDR information will be lost To save lt gt this information obtain hard copy outputs BEFORE this update lt In order to do a complete UPDATE you must have as a minimum SOFTWARE DISKETTES PROMPTS DISKETTES Only if you clear prompts during update process ipe WARNING FOR 6 00 USERS YOU MUST DISABLE ALL THE HOSTS EXCEPT THIS ONE TO BE ABLE TO USE THIS OPTION IF YOU HAVE NOT DONE SO REBOOT THIS HOST AND DO IT NOW IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO CONTINUE THEN RE BOOT THE SYSTEM OTHERWISE ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN Response Press Enter The Warning for 6 00 users is for a server currently running Release 6 00 since most servers running Release 6 00 can run the Update program online f you do the procedure from the Floppy Boot Diskette you must disable all modules 5 If the server displays the following warning message Prompt CP 6 xxx write error or disk full Please continue with the update procedure This is not a fatal problem However notify th
102. your region If your power cord is incompatible you must obtain a suitable power cord that meets the following criteria 2 3 Installing New Systems The cord must be rated for use at the AC voltage available with a current rating that is at least 125 percent of the current product rating e The connector at the end of the cord that plugs into the AC wall outlet must be a grounding type male plug and must show certification by an agency acceptable in your region e The connector at the product end must be an IEC type CEE 22 female connector e The cord must be less than 14 8 feet 4 5 meters long WARNING Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type required WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove any components or peripherals while the Model 70 cover is removed when the server is turned on Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present in this product 4 You need a Phillips screwdriver 2 bit and a medium flat bladed screwdriver You should use an anti static wrist strap and a conductive foam pad when working on the server CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage hard disks boards and other components Wearing an anti static wrist strap attached to a metal part of the server chassis will reduce risk significantly 5 Be sure to do each procedure in the correct order Installing New Systems Installing the Model 70
103. your templates You need to know the format of the in band information packets sent by your switch After you have created all of the templates you must program the switch to pass in band information to the AIP VoiceMemo system The System 25 recognizes four call types direct direct trunk internal forwarded and external forwarded Each call type needs a template to interpret the incoming data Call type identifiers are prepended to the digit stream and sent to the Voice M mo system along with the caller and calling party identification Si tep Reference 1 Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Online Menu Vienu Map 13 2 Select the line group that you defined for your Enhanced In band application 3 Select to modify the application to reach the Enhanced In band Menu 4 Choose to configure the application to reach the second Enhanced In band Menu 5 List the available applications Select L List Applications Response The system presents a list of all Enhanced In band Integration applications that are loaded on the system 6 Choose an application to install that only has a few templates such as the Norstar integration application Select D Install Application Prompt Application name to install Response NORSTAR Define a New Application 7 Enter a name for the integration application Select A Application Name Prompt Enter application name Response AT amp T25 8 Enter a description for the applicatio
104. 0 DIGITAL and SX 200 LIGHT systems Conditional Greetings can be enabled to provide Busy and No Answer responses to callers forwarded to subscribers mailboxes MITEL MAIL can be interfaced to the SX 200 without using the Enhanced In band application but is not discussed in this document Mitel recommends the integration discussed in this document for ease of implementation usability and increased functionality REQUIREMENTS LIMITATIONS e MITEL MAIL includes Receptionist I and Enhanced In band as part of the basic package Minimum software load of F41 0 2 is required to support the Enhanced In band integration and use of SUPERSET Message key to retrieve messages illegal number is not supported Callers are routed to the administrator s mailbox greeting main greeting ONS disconnect is not supported Once the caller reaches the Receptionist II greeting the call lasts for the entire greeting time e Message Waiting light must be turned off only via M TEL MAIL not by the PABX console operator or the Cancel softkey on the telephone Callers hear ringback while the digits are pulsed to the voice mail system Audio is not cut through until after the last pause is executed 4 HARDWARE INTERFACE Refer to Figure 1 The MITEL MAIL system interfaces to the SX 200 family of PABXs via ONS lines Receptionist Il ports use shared ONS lines which are programmed in the same Hunt Group on the PA
105. 1 System Administration System Administrtition The system administrator is responsible for creating and maintaining all mailboxes and their functionality on the server The Model 70 allows the administrator to perform the following tasks Configure and customize the server Create and modify delete and or reassign mailboxes Build classes of service FCOS LCOS GCOS NCOS RCOS and TCOS Change the server time and date when required Set up system wide distribution lists and broadcast mailboxes Create the message of the day Create phoneline exceptions that is any telephony parameter for example the interface between the Model 70 and the PBX or Centrex that does not use the Model 70 default values North American Signaling Standards Add optional features and expand capacities Create system and client reports Statistics five reports covering how server resources are used for example usage of line ports speech storage trunks and messages System information ten reports which give specific information about how the server is configured and programmed see the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Billing four reports which give breakdowns of charges for individual users by statistic and which calculate the total amounts due for departmental or account billback see the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Perform maintenance backup and troubleshooting 5 2 Routine main
106. 1 Reason call is forwarded to voice mail i e Busy or No Answer 2 Called party s mailbox number 3 Calling party s mailbox number if a system user All fields are provided by the insertion of special codes in the abbreviated dial string used to access MITEL MAIL The special codes include CODE DESCRIPTION 4 5 second pause x Insert manual dialed digits XX represents digits expected 4 Send call forward condition to voice mail 6 Tone out caller extension number 8 Send digits of calling party to voice mail 9 1 second pause DTMF digit 0 9 DTMF digits 0 9 58 1 Message Forwarding Abbreviated Dial Number Refer to Figure 2 Call Forward and Message Retrieve Process Users forward their sets to the index number This must be set up as follows Index Number Diait String XXX Voice Mail Hunt Group Access 4 6 8 Example 100 2000 4 6 8 Users telephones are set up to forward calls on Busy or No Answer conditions to this abbreviated dial number If a call to a set is not answered or encounters a busy condition the PBX follows the forwarding that has been set and dials the hunt group access code 2000 in this case When the MITEL MAIL system answers the forwarded call the PBX sends the remaining digits 4 6 8 The 4 is converted into the call forward Busy or call forward No Answer access code defined in Form 4 This code is matched to a template in the Enhanced In
107. 1 to allow access to the Enhanced In band trunk group 13 Use the following RC transactions to assign Message Retrieval to FeaturePhones RC 117 Change Assign Non Displayable Class of Service Line Location RC 113 Add Change Delete Show Show Where Line Features 1 RC 211 Change Show Displayable Class of Service 1 RC 212 Change Show Non Displayable Class of Service 1 Make Miscellaneous Changes 14 Set the following values These fields are not accessible through RC transactions T6241 Digit Analysis First Digit Access Code marked as first digit of a two digit access code T6251 Digit Analysis Second Digit Access Code identifies the digit string to be dialed by the VoiceMemo system for message wait on and off requests The values can be either 84 and 85 or 4A and 4B T608M Time out Option Table 3 Index in this table to T608M byte one which sets the duration for message waiting stutter dial tone Doc Rev A GP 504 Page 8 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 15 Forward POTS telephones to the VoiceMemo directory number with RC 141 Select the condition for forwarding most likely Divert if Busy or No Answer Select VMS as the Destination Type 16 Tell users with FeaturePhones to forward their phones to the VoiceMemo DN 17 Force the E amp M trunks out of service and put them back into service using Maintenance mode 18 Instruct users to dial the dummy extension and e
108. 220 Model 70 CP 6590 modem CP 6270 optional feature CP 5402 preparing for xv printer CP 62 15 quality check CP 6258 redundant hard disk CP 6284 integrations l 15 J jack types A 2 L Limits Class of Service LCOS 1 17 line cards description 1 1 0 installing CP 6220 removing CP 6220 loads A 2 M mailbox Administrator s 18 Attendant 1 18 Broadcast 1 18 Chain 1 18 fax publishing 1 19 Greeting Only 18 Guaranteed Fax 1l 19 Guest 1 18 optional special application l 1 9 Rotational 19 special application l 18 Tree 1 19 mailbox user features Auto Wakeup 1 14 CallAgent 1 13 customization 1 12 Cut Through paging 1 14 distribution lists 1 13 FaxMemo 1 14 Message Waiting 1 1 3 Outdial Notification 1 1 3 Receptionist II 1 14 special pager terminal protocol paging 1 14 voice mail messaging l 12 make redundant program CP 628 1 maximum system capacities 1 3 menus returning to main xiii viewing complete xiii MESA Forms 1 1 9 MESA Net 1 16 Message Waiting 1 3 messaging 1l 12 Model 70 capacities 1 3 connectors A 2 expanding 4 4 field repairs 4 2 hardware overview 1 5 installing 2 5 Cl 6590 loads A 2 server specifications 1 4 service strategy 4 2 servicing 4 4 software overview l l 2 support plans 4 3 system connections A troubleshooting 4 5 modem installing Cl 6270 module changing status CP 53 14 Multi Vendor In
109. 25 pin D type male connector at one end of the console cable The other end of the RS 232 cable will vary depending on the make and manufacturer of the device you are connecting to Doc Rev A CP 6215 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Table 2 Printer Pin Assignments Model 70 Printer Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 20 Pin 2 Pin 8 Pin 3 Pin 8 Pin 6 No connection Pin 7 C Connect Printer Signal Name Carrier Detect Data Set Ready Receive Data Request to Send Transmit Data Clear to Send Data Terminal Ready Ring Indicate Signal Ground 3 Connect the 9 pin cable connector to Serial port 2 designated S2 in Model 70 software 4 Connect the 25 pin cable connector to the printer 5 Test printer as recommended by the manufacturer s documentation Doe Rev A ce 6216 Page 1 of 5 Install Console VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure tells you how to connect the console to the Model 70 It also provides switch settings for the most popular terminals that are compatible with the Model 70 For detailed console specifications refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual The Model 70 can support a console equipped with a keyboard and a CRT or printer display You need a terminal to perform administrative and service operations Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Ste
110. 34 enable it from the online menus then define the extension numbers for the Receptionist II ports Set the Receptionist Dial String to 11 Create a second line group and configure it for DTMF to PBX message waiting or configure a serial port for RS 232 message waiting See the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details Set the following line exceptions for DTMF to PBX message waiting Exception Value Description 6 Off DTMF Detect Enable 164 8 DTMF Output Duration 176 2 DTMF Output Level Configure the Fujitsu Starlog PBX 1 Cross connect phone lines from Starlog PBX 8SLC cards to the VoiceMemo system phone ports 2 Connect the Starlog and VoiceMemo systems to same ground point DP 3021 Doe Rev A GP 505 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 3 CMC 102 Set the following system parameter flags to the indicated values FLGN Value Description 2 OPS ring pattern station ringing 1s on 3s off 15 Enable message waiting for all 500 2500 sets 49 10 Send filler digit 0 to VoiceMemo when required 109 Enable called party auto disconnect on hangup 110 Enable stutter dial tone if no message waiting lamp 111 0 Set voice mail integration pattern zero 0 112 3 or4 Set to extension length on PBX if mixed length set to 4 136 Set standard busy tone a 4 CMC 104 Define a class of service for the VoiceMemo ports Allow any required trunk group access Include feature n
111. 5412 Change Module Status From Hard Disk Cr 5314 Diagnose a Disk With System Online sssssssssssssssssssssseesseesseesssessssssss CP 7029 Disk Addition add disk CP 6282 Do a Floppy Backup ou ecesscsesseceseceseeessseseeeeceeceeeceeesseesasecneeeees CP 5703 Do a System Reload system reload E E EE Seta alte tacecye CP 6267 Do a System Restore system restore CP 5704 Enable a Hartd Diskaiccnnnd ca anette tan ndinnes deinen cl 7019 Enabl a Mod le nsara viii es CP 7014 Name the Conf strat ones candace cna CP 7004 Offline Disk Replacement Non Redundant Redundant Systems C P 6592 Online Disk Replacement Redundant Systems ssesseserssss sss s20 CP 6283 Recover a Lost Console Passcode vssss ssscssssssessessssessssssessssessssssesseseee CP 5303 Redundant Disk Addition make redundant 00 0 cceeeeeeeeeees CP 628 1 Restore a Class Of Service eeeceescssssesessesessesesesseseeseseeeeseseeaeseseeseeeenees CP 5413 Run Diagnose From Diskette 0 eeesesesssceesceceseceseeeseseseeeeeeeees CP 703 1 Run Diagnose From Hard Disk 0 eececceesseseseceeeeeseeeseeeeseseeseneees CP 7030 Run Verify With System Offline CP 5701 Set the Site Name Banner and Code scssssssssssssesecesesesesseeseeseeees CP 5415 Set the System Time and Date 00 0 cccececeecseseeseenseeneesssnesseseeneenees CP 5414 Shut Down a Hard Disk CP 7017 Shut Down a Systemes ssai aeaaaioii i ae a E CP 6268 Update Disk Redundancy 0 ceececec
112. 7 Program the first VMI DN to call forward for both busy and no answer conditions to the second VMI DN Program the second VMI DN to call forward to the third VMI DN and so on Program the last VMI DN to call forward to the first VMI DN This will ensure an efficient use of ports for both systems 8 Program any DNs used for message waiting indication to call forward all calls to the first VMI DN in the Enhanced In band line group This will allow users to press the message key on their phones and be connected to the Enhanced In band line group 9 Program the following translation codes L link or flash Set message waiting L Cancel Message Waiting L l Call Transfer L 70 Forward Prefix 6 Disconnect Code clear this field Note The default Disconnect Code is a dial tone which means that the Norstar will return dial tone to the VoiceMemo port when a caller hangs up You may want to set this code to 9 for integration ports without Receptionist II software or for ports with Receptionist II Both of these codes tell the VoiceMemo system to end a call session 10 Program all user phones to call forward on both busy and no answer conditions to the first VMI DN Document Rev A ce 508 Page 1 of 1 Configure AT amp T Legend Integration VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure summarizes the steps required to install and configure the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature to work with the AT amp T
113. 8 bit data and no parity VoiceMemo is configured to be a DCE device No flow control is supported Data signals required are transmit data receive data logic ground pin 7 data terminal ready should always be high No control signals are used Diaqnostic_ information See Appendix A for detailed diagnostic information available through the error log file the CDR file and the system console Page 10 HIS Trouble Shooting Guide Chapter 5 The HIS PMS Integration Trouble Shootina Guide 1 0 Introduction In order to integrate reliably between the HIS PMS system and the Centigram VoiceMemo voice messaging system the following protocol has been developed The protocol contains three layers physical link and message This protocol conforms to the HIS Standard Communications Protocol for Full Duplex Operations fully with the following stipulations i 2 0 Physical Laver Electrical Interface EIA RS232C Type D electrical standard compatibility Connection is via a DB25 pin male connector Signal Form EIARS404 Interface Distance Maximum 50 feet Interface unit to interface Processing Unit direct connection Distances exceeding 50 feet require a line driver Operation Mode Fullduplex 3 0 Link Laver Appearance Data Rate 2400 Baud Asynchronous Byte Framing 10 bits 1 start 7 data 1 parity 1 stop even parity 4 0 Messaae Laver There are six messages defined for the protocol as follows Message
114. 995 Centigram Comm Corp All Rights Reserved lt System Status gt HOST I STATUS ENA OS VSN 422C MEMORY 04860 16000 LOG DATA Y DiskO Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 Bus0 ENA ENA MAIN MENU M Mailbox maintenance CallAgent maintenance R Report generation S System maintenance X Exit select report generation and check the setup REPORTS B Billing C Configuration D Pre extension dial strings LCOS F FCOoS G GCOS H NCOS a3 System information J Phonebook Report K Redundancy Verify Report L Log tile M Mailbox data P Phoneline exceptions R Pager access codes S Statistics T Receptionist treatments V Offline Verify X Exit Enter C to select the Configuration Report REPORT OUTPUT ROUTING C Console screen P Console with pause 1 Serial Port 1 2 Serial Port 2 F File A Append to file X Exit no report Enter C to select Console for output or 2 if a printer is attached to serial port 2 28 VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu gt Enter the number of the group to display 3 in this example Enter Group Number to Display i 24 or lt CR gt for all 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Fri Apr 26 13 46 24 1996 Group 3 Enhanced In Band Lines 3 0 3 1 Application ENHANCED IN BAND Dial plan 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Administrator mbox m 998 General Greeting mbox Attendant mbox 999 Wait Prompt Y C
115. A pp 1023 Page 1 of 1 Enable Conditional Greetings VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure details the process for enabling conditional greetings Conditional greetings are used to identify to the caller why they have reached the VoiceMemo system busy no answer etc Mailbox owners perform this procedure from their own telephone sets Users can either keep the prerecorded greetings or record custom greetings in their own voice Note FCOS bit 161 must be enabled before mailbox owners can record or use conditional greetings Step Reference 1 Call the VoiceMemo system extension 2 Enter your password to log into the system 2 3 Press U for user options 4 Press G for greeting modification 5 Press E to enable conditional greetings 6 Press C to change record conditional greetings 7 After making any desired changes to conditional greetings press X to exit the system Doe Rev A pp 901 Page 1 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Create a New Enhanced In band Integration This procedure is a short tutorial in creating your own Enhanced In band application It leads you through the steps to create all of the templates required to integrate with an AT amp T System 25 switch By following the basic steps of this procedure you can create a set of templates for integration with any switch that can pass in band signaling There is a worksheet in the back of this manual to help you plan
116. AL T1 Prompt Input your choice for help A B C D E F X Response The card number according to the Model of the Series 6 server refer to the matrix above for Series 6 for Model 640 and Model 120S For Model 1201 type 6 For Model 70 type 3 4 At the Resource Configuration Menu identify the logical number of the module For Model 640 this number can be either 1 2 3 or 4 For Model 120 and Model 70 this number is 1 Select M set Module number Prompt Input Module Response 1 2 3 or 4 5 At the Resource Configuration Menu configure the Dual T Digital Trunk Interface card Select C Configure resource card Prompt Occupied slots are Slot Card XX DUAL T1 Input your choice Response The card number according to the Model of the Series 6 server refer to the Series 6 server matrix that follows Step 2 for Model 640 and Model 120S For Model 1201 type 6 For Model 70 type 3 6 From the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x where x is the Menu Map 13 slot number entered in Step 5 reach Change IO Port Address Menu to configure the IO port address for the card 7 At the Select IO Port Address Menu select the input output address for which the TR 2005 card is physically configured The addresses are x300h the default address for card 0 and 0x2300h for card 1 Exit back to the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Menu when you are done 8 From the Configur
117. ATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter key to expand menu gt Press Enter to display Template 3 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 3 D Data J A Action T Timeout m E Eror Action m N Next Templates Comment X Exit 5 Enter the following information for Template 3 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data 622 dx Sx EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action m V4 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T EN C X T Timeout 10 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X E Error Action H EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X C Comments Call Forward Busy Internal EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 3 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 3 D Data 622 dx sx A Action V4 T Timeout 10 E Error Action H N Next Templates C Comment Call Forward Busy Internal X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Current Template 1 Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 4 to select template 4 EDITTEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter key to expand menu gt Press Enter to display Template 4 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 4 D Data A Action T Timeout E Error Action m N Next Templates m C Comment
118. BX Message Waiting port s require a dedicated ONS line that is a member of a hunt group This hunt group is NOT the same as VoiceMemo ONS lines hunt group 1 Pager Notification and FaxMemo also have separate line port s SX 200 DIGITAULIGHT ONS Voice Mail Ports ONS Voice Mail Hunt Group 4 Access Code 2000 2201 Members 2202 2201 2204 2202 2206 2204 MSG Waiting Port Note 1 2206 DTMF to PABX 2203 OR RS232 Modem 2205 MSG Waiting Port Hunt Group Access Code 2664 Straight Figure 1 SX 200 DIGITAL LIGHT Interface with MITEL MAIL MITEL MAIL Line Card slot 3 Line Card slot 4 Serial Port 2 Coma Console OOM 4 NOTE Message Waiting can be either a line card port or serial port both options are shown in Figure 1 SX 200 DIGITALLIGHT PROGRAMMING A total of eight CDE forms must be accessed in order to program MITEL MAIL access on the SX 200 1 Form 01 Form 02 Form 03 1 Form 04 Form 09 1 Form 14 Form 17 Form 31 System Configuration Feature Access Codes Class of Service System Options Station Programming Non Dial In Trunks Hunt Groups System Abbreviated Dial 5 1 5 2 5 3 System Configuration Form 1 Program the ONS line cards in this form Feature Access Codes Form 2 Program a Feature Access code for Call Forwarding Internal Only Feature 4 Program a Feature Access code for Call Forwarding External O
119. CP 6483 Connect the Telephone Lines Perform an Offline Prompts Update Perform an Offline Software Update Do a System Reload system reload Shut Down a System Install Modem Redundant Disk Addition make redundant Disk Addition add disk Online Disk Replacement Redundant Systems Install Redundant Hard Disk Offline System Software Update CPs Called CP 6221 CP 6224 CP 6268 CP 6282 CP 7015 CP 6221 CP 6224 CP 6268 CP 628 1 CP 7015 CP 702 1 CP 6221 CP 6224 CP 6268 CP 7015 CP 6224 CP 1340 CP 5304 CP 5402 CP 5701 CP 5703 CP 6263 CP 6268 CP 700 1 Called By Cl 6201 Cl 6590 CP 6201 CP 6483 CP 5303 CP 5704 CP 6263 CP 628 1 CP 6282 CP 6483 CP 6590 CP 6282 List of Centigram Procedures Page 3 of 3 Procedure Chapter Number Number Title CPs Called Called By CP 6590 Model 70 Installation CP 1340 CP 6201 CP 6215 CP 6216 CP 6261 CP 6268 CP 7001 CP 6592 Offline Disk Replacement Non CP 5703 Redundant Systems Redundant CP 6221 Systems CP 6224 CP 6298 CP 7001 CP 7001 Run Verify With System Online CP 6590 CP 6592 CP 6483 CP 7004 Name the Configurations CP 7005 View the Configuration Names CP 7014 Enable a Module CP 7015 Update Disk Redundancy CP 6281 CP 6282 CP 6283 CP 7019 cl 7017 Shut Down a Hard Disk CP 7019 Enable a Hard Disk CP 7015 CP 6281 CP 7021 Perform an Online Increase System CP 6282 Hours CP 7022 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exceptio
120. Configure Citywide SMDI Y Configure Smartcard Table X Exi Enter letter in to execute command When you need help later type COMMAND E F G L N P R V W X E Users will then view the following Answer the following questions to configure the PMS Clear passcode on Check out Y Clear messages on Check out Y Clear name on Check out N Clear greeting on Check out N On Check in set the mailbox FCOS 0 2 On Check out set the mailbox FCOS 0 64 Page 14 3 0 Mailbox Setup Once the application has been setup the user must create guest mailboxes with either the Check Out or Check In FCOS it is not critical to match the existing room status since the integration handles a re synchronization of the databases when it first starts up It is important to set the MWI type for the guest mailboxes to be type 16 Message Waiting Type 1 None Not Available AC msg lamp DTMF to PBX FixedRS232 Pager SL 1 BkGround Program RS232 T R RS232 Centrex RS232 Intecom RS232 NEC RS232 Video Dispatch T T RS232 Citywide SMDI AT amp T System 75 HIS PMS SL 1 Msg Waiting OeOonrnor WM O Aa O h et ee d Message waiting type 1 16 This is so that the guest room s MW light is controlled by the PMS system Note this integration does NOT preclude the use of another integration running on a different serial port After both the configuration and the mailboxes have been set up the
121. D D4 framing format 2 15 superframe 2 2 defaults accepting xi DID 2 15 digital multiplexing PCM 1 1 2 2 digital trunk putting into service CP 3 155 putting out of service CP 3 154 digital trunk activity monitoring utility 1 10 2 17 digital trunk support El 1 1 T1 2 1 Direct Inward Dial 2 15 DSP 30 1 4 E E amp M 2 15 errored seconds El 1 6 T1 2 10 ESF Index extended superframe 2 2 framing format 2 15 F failed seconds El 1 6 T1 2 10 frame slips 1 6 El 1 6 Ti 2 10 framing format CEPT4 CP 3151 CRC CP 3151 G Ground start 2 15 H HDB3 1 3 1 9 CP 3151 J O addresses 1 8 2 15 I O port address CP 3151 CP 3150 L line cards DSP 24 and DSP 8 2 8 line coding HDB3 1 3 line supervision and signaling 1 2 local alarms 2 13 local carrier alarm El 1 6 Ti 2 10 Loop start 2 1 5 loss of frame 1 6 2 10 loss of frame synchronization out of frame alarm 2 11 yellow alarm 2 11 M master clock 1 9 2 16 menus returning to main xi Index 2 viewing complete xi monitoring trunk conditions and events El 1 6 Tl 2 10 MVIP bus master 1 5 2 9 N network clock backup 1 5 2 9 changing CP 3 152 channel banks 2 9 El 1 5 extraction 1 3 reference 10 2 16 system reference 1 10 2 16 TI 2 9 NRZ 2 4 0 out of frame 2 1 2 P PCM extended superframe 2 2 frames l l 2 2 superframe 2 2 performance statisti
122. D 4 Appendix E Worksheet Index Menu Map 1 Enhanced In band Integration Overview The Enhanced In band Integration EIB optional feature allows an AIP VoiceMemo system to accept complex call information as DTMF or MF digits during call setup In band signaling refers to sending tones in the voice frequency baud over the same circuit on which the conversation later takes place The EIB optional feature comes ready to integrate with the following switches AT amp T System 25 AT amp T Legend Omni Fujitsu Starlog Northern Telecom Norstar Northern Telecom MTX and IUSACELL Cellular switches The installer can also program the VoiceMemo system to integrate with other switches that use in band signaling This manual describes the structure of Enhanced In band Integration and provides procedures for configuring a VoiceMemo system and several switches Information on specific switches is contained in the appendixes While standard VoiceMemo software can recognize a mailbox number dialed to it the EIB software can recognize several additional pieces of information provided by the switch By using pattern matching the EIB software can recognize the call type no answer forward busy forward direct call and the origination and destination extension numbers Based on this information the VoiceMemo system can play an appropriate mailbox greeting The VoiceMemo system can also set message waiting indicators usually a light o
123. D IN BAND Date Installed Mon Feb 5 12 36 12 1996 Date Modified Wed Apr 24 5 22 46 1996 ROPESR002 Application Name EIB 200D Application Description MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION Edit Templates Menu Edit Parameters Menu Show Application Install Application List Applications Save Application Exit 22 10 Enter 0 to Show Application Ensure that all Templates are set up correctly NAME EIB 200D DESCRIPTION MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION Installation Date Mon Feb 5 12 36 12 1996 Last Modify Date Wed Apr 24 15 22 46 1996 T R T Next 234567 Comment Answer call and run templates 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 T2 622 dx sx V4 10 H Next Comment Call Forward Busy External T3 622 dx sx V3 10 H Next Comment Call Forward Busy Internal T4 633 dx sx V3 10 H A Next Comment Call Forward No Answer External T5 623 dx sx V3 10 H Next Comment Call Forward No Answer Internal T6 tsx VI IO H Next Comment Local Login T7 HH V5 10 v5 Next Comment Auto Attendant Receptionist 11 IN BAND MENU N D TP O LL S X 6 3 Step 3 install the Enhanced In Band Application After the templates are defined and entered the application must be installed gt Press Enter to display Enhanced In band menu in its expanded form ENHANCED IN BAND Date Installed Mon Feb 5 12 36 12 1996 Date Modified Wed Apr 24 5 22 46 1996 N Application Name EIB 200D D Appl
124. DID trunks Neither facility data link sometimes used with ESF nor remote loopback requests are supported Note VoiceMemo Release 6 0A does not support common channel signaling CCS with T trunk connectivity CCS is a method where signaling for all channels is handled using a link that is common to all channels for example SS7 Signaling is channel associated CAS where the signaling is handled individually inside each channel Signaling information is carried in every sixth frame in a SF the A and B bits alternating every twelfth frame by borrowing robbing the least significant bit from each channel The A and B signaling bits each appear in alternating superframes that is every twelfth frame ESF signaling uses four signaling bits A B C and D These bits each repeat every twenty fourth frame In networks where ESF is not fully implemented the C and D bits are not used and the A and B are simply repeated Through the use of these two bits four signaling states can be transmitted loop start ground start E amp M and DID When transmitted digital signals shift between two voltages typically some negative voltage for one logic condition Vdc for 0 for example and typically some positive voltage for the other logical condition Vdc for 1 for example This shift known as a bipolar shift where the signal shift does not linger at the zero volts baseline is known as non r
125. E vii Proced tes ioi ean a S hee A one caucsatraes vii Menu Maps and Other Navigation Aid s sssessssssssssesssessseesresesseesssessssesssees vii Worksheetsy ansins decir enuiyties n aa PERANAN ix Conventions Used in This Manual sssssisisssserisissssssrisissssstsrsssrssstssesssste ix R ader Adyis ries acneei ea ee a RE Ee E ol eE ns gaa de A EE OEE x Before Yo Start os aeeti ise dere eet Traa AEE oe den cade aaa ARER A ANAR ea AEAEE xi Console Tips and Techniques xi Viewing Menus ccccscceseeees xi Accepting Defaults v 1111 1115111115151151151151111 11111010011 tt eas xi Avoiding Automatic Exit sic iscicsiseces vespiswienseacest vanisecelieccteayouneceencenss xi Quitting an Entry Session yids sts sctesiesctieaas aporcoveniensievnoeceadertes xii Shortcut Commands s sssseeeseseesseseesssesssessssesesessesssesesseseseseossseseseeeosesessse xii 1 El Digital Trunk Connectivity El PCM Trunking Overview scscccssssssssssssscssssssssssssessssssessssssescsssseecsssneesssnee 1 1 Dual E 1 Digital Trunk Multiplexing s scscsssssssssssssssuesssceseeesesseeenen 141 Common Channel Signaling CCS ss s sssssssssesseeseessseesesssnsnsnenseenmeseeees 1 2 VoiceMemo and El Applications ee cesseecsssseeesssseeeessnseeeesnneessesnneeeses 1 2 E 1 Connectivity Features cseecseecstecsessssesssseseaseseeesstesstesneessnessnnenes 1 3 El Connectivity Functional Operation ccssesesseeseesseessessecss
126. G to select the Offline Menu from the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu gt Enter B to Duplicate Active Configuration The system copies the active configuration into the inactive work area Enter G to Define Line Groups and Fax Groups Enter G to select Current Group gt Enter the number for the line group to configure Enter N to enter the Name for this group Enhanced in band Enter A to Add lines to this group gt Enter triplet identifiers Module Slot Circuit Enter T to show this group and confirm the lines you added Enter X to Exit this menu and return to the Offline Menu Enter A to select the Line Group Only Applications menu Enter E to select the Enhanced In band application for this line group The system displays the following INBAND Integration A Calling Extension Absorbed Digits 0 12 B Calling Extension Signed Offset n C Called Extension Absorbed Digits 0 12 J D Called Extension Signed Offset n E MF Enable Y N X Exit Do NOT change any of these parameters Enter X to Exit and save changes The system writes the changes to the offline configuration and returns to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Remember to Activate Configuration to enable changes 11 Configure the Enhanced In Band Application 1 Access the Online Menu enter G from the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu to modify the inactive configuration The system
127. IT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Comment Call Forward No Answer Internal EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X 20 gt Press Enter to re display Template 5 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 5 D Data 623 dx sx A Action m V3 T Timeout 10 E Error Action H N Next Templates C Comment Call Forward No Answer External X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A 7 E N C X Current Template I gt Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 6 to select template 6 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter key t expand menu Press Enter to display Template 6 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 6 D Data A Action J T Timeout Error Action N Next Templates w C Comment m X Exit 8 Enter the following information for Template 6 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data SX EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action V1 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X T Timeout 10 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X E Error Action H EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X C Comment Local Login EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 6 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 6 D Da
128. Iii to the H S Encore PMS system and it is not acknowledged within two seconds the datais resent for a maximum of four times If still no acknowledgement the WoiceMemo system considers the link down and logs it At any future time if the HIS Encore PMS system sends valid data to the VoiceMemo system it is acknowledged and the link is considered up and it is logged At any time while VoiceMemo is running if a message waiting notification sent to the HIS Encore PMS system fails due to an internal error the mailbox number and message waiting state lost is logged If the VoiceMemo system is requested to do a move message command swap and for any reason the event fails it is logged with both the source and destination mailbox numbers Itis also possible during a swap that the source mailbox is deleted and can not be recreated If this event occurs i is logged with the mailbox number that is deleted To check the log file for information including HIS Encore PMS integration complete the following From the console main menu enter R Report generation then enter L Log file then enter S Show logfile To display the contents of the log file possibly including information for the HIS Encore PMS integration Log File Entries HIS PMS Link is up HIS PMS Lii is down Unable to update MWI ON off for mailbox x Failed to swap mailbox x with y Deleted mailbox x unable to re create CDR Fife While the
129. In band Integration This appendix contains supplemental information about integrating an AIP VoiceMemo system with a Fujitsu Starlog PBX See the Task List for procedures to configure the integration Features and Functions The Starlog PBX uses a hunt group to route internal and external calls to the VoiceMemo system When the switch sets up a call to the VoiceMemo system it directs the call to the hunt group pilot The pilot is a phantom extension and is always busy This forces the call to hunt past the pilot to one of the VoiceMemo ports The VoiceMemo extension that controls message wait requests is also part of the hunt group but it is an originate only extension Because it is part of the hunt group users can place message waiting return calls which hunts past the message waiting port to the VoiceMemo ports Figure A 1 shows the strategy for Starlog to AIP VoiceMemo integration The PBX uses integration pattern 0 to convey calling party identification to the VoiceMemo system It can identify many different call types in the information packet and the Starlog Enhanced In band integration has over 20 templates to recognize all of the different call types See the template specifications later in this appendix for more details on the different call types The AN VoiceMemo system has three types of message waiting notification that you can use with the Starlog PBX e RS 232 Message Waiting Type 7 also called Modem Me
130. Insert the Floppy Boot Diskette Turn on the system power and boot from the diskette The server displays the self test results 16 The server only allows 4 seconds for the f to be entered If the server did not accept the is press the reset button on only the module you are working on and try again When the server accepts the f select the service option Prompt Enter one of the names Response service Doc Rev A CP 6282 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step 17 The server reads from the diskette then requests the service diskette Prompt Insert floppy SERVICE 6 00 and hit return Response Insert the diskette and press Enter 18 The server reads from the diskette and asks which process you want to execute Prompt Enter one of the names Response add disk 19 The server reads from the diskette and issues a warning about the pending process Prompt WARNING ADD DISK PROGRAM ADD DISK program should be run only when increasing the amount of disk storage by adding a new disk Any data on the added disk will be destroyed in the process The disk being added WILL NOT be used for speech storage until you upgrade the service hours WARNING YOU MUST DISABLE ALL THE OTHER HOSTS TO USE THIS OPTION IF YOU HAVE NOT DONE SO REBOOT THIS HOST AND DO IT NOW IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO CONTINUE THEN REBOOT THE SYSTEM OTHERWISE ENTER A CA
131. Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions Installation and Service Manual TM Trademark of Mitel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mite Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada a Table of Contents About This Manual Who Should Read This Manual cceccccececccececceeeceeceeececeseeacecesarereeaeees vii How to Use This Manual cccccccccceceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeasssssssssssssssssaes Vil PP ASK E AEE T E EETA vii JAAA LET E EEEE EEE vii Menu Maps and Other Navigation Aids ssessssssesseesessessessrssessessessessess viii Which Document Do I Use sssssccssssstssessstesseessseesessssssseessessseesseeseeesseeees ix What If Information Is Missing oe eesscecesesecceesecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees EATA xi How Do I Obtain the Documents I Need csessscssecssseeeseceseeseeeseeseeseeeees xi Reader Advisories oen or eien ENE ea rE EET eel ae xii Before You Starteri aneres nane R EEE saya ES R E EE aar E E DE ES ESSES o xiii Console Tips and Techniques s sssssssssssscsssssssnssesesccesesaessessessnssseess xiii Viewi e Menus cs senrorae area oes e eais ishia iiia xiii Accepting Defaults ccccccscsssssssessssesssssessssssssssssseesssessssecsesssesseessssessns xij Avoiding Automatic Exit c cccssssssssssssssssssssssessssessssssssssssseessseessseee xd Quitting an Entry Session a ccsssciestecscststsetssscstesieeneatetoaeawdeaneneuden XIV
132. L MODEM RS 232 cable included with the system NOTE You MUST use a NULL modem cable or a straight through cable with a NULL modem adapter for console connection see Figure 3 on page 33 1 Connect the 9 pin cable connector to COM1 designated console in MITEL MAIL system software 1 Connect the 25 pin cable connector to the terminal 1 Set console to 9600 baud rate with 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Remote Maintenance Access To connect to the system via a Modem use a straight through 9 to 25 pin RS 232 cable between the MITEL MA L COM1 port and the modem Mitel recommends using an external US Robotics Sportster 14 400 Fax Modem NOTE You MUST use a straight through cable for modem connection DO NOT use a NULL modem adapter This cable differs from the one mentioned above for the console Figure 3 1 Connect the 9 pin cable connector to COM1 designated console in MITEL MAIL system software 1 Connect the 25 pin cable connector to the modem port For console and remote maintenance A B switch box can be used e Remote terminal MUST be set to 1200 baud rate with 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity 1 Modem DIP switch setting for US Robotics Sportster 14 400 Fax Modem external is shown in Table 1 Table 1 DIP Switch Setting on US Robotics Modem 32 Phone Line Ft 9232 Straight through cable N oe See 5550 Modem ml Workstation p NULL Modem R 232 cable MITEL MAIL
133. Leading Digits 81 Second Dial Tone No COR Group Numbers Digits Dialed Digits to Follow Type Number 0 Route 01 NOTE All access to MITEL MAIL will follow this single ARS entry 13 System Speed Call Assignment Program a system speed call number which contains the ARS access to the MITEL MAIL E amp M ports 14 Call Rerouting Assign the associated speed call number for M TEL MA L access in the following forms as required Call Rerouting Always Alternative Assignment Call Rerouting First Alternative Assignment Call Rerouting Second Alternative Assignment Extensions can be rerouted to M TEL MA L in the Call Rerouting Assignment All extensions may reference a single Call Rerouting Alternative Assignment Alternatively users may program call forwarding to the ARS access to M TEL MAIL The voice mail hunt group for messaging must be Call Rerouted Always to the E amp M ports MITEL MAIL HARDWARE Strap the line card ports for E amp M and ONS as required The Smart Card may alternatively be used for Message Waiting MITEL MAIL PROGRAMMING The MITEL MAIL system must be programmed to integrate to the SX 2000 for proper call handling The following programming details are to assist you in setting up Templates for the Enhanced In band signaling application For other basic programming such as Message Waiting refer to M TEL MA L Volume 2 Reference and Configuration Define Line Group in Offline Menu 1 Enter
134. MO CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU A Activate Configuration B Hardware Configuration C Increase System Hours D Define Floating Modules E Modify Active Configuration F Modify Inactive Configuration G Offline Menu H Configure Unified Integration X Exit If you need help iater type a COMMAND A B C D E F G H X 4 Enter E to select Modify Active Configuration The system displays ONLINE MENU operating on configuration number 0 Currently active configuration number is 0 Configuration last edited by OFFLINE MENU is 0 MKCONF confignum is 0 vmreport string usr vm config vm report 0 Enter lt RETURN gt at any time for help Group lines VOICEMEMO VoiceMemo Configuration Online Menu G Group selected 1 M Modify Application C Report Current Configuration Q Quit Forget Changes X Exit Save Changes ONLINE MENU gt Enter G to select the group number to configure Enter a Group number I 3 gt Enter the number of the Enhanced In band line group 3 in this example gt Enter M to Select the Modify Group menu option ENHANCED IN BAND A Configure Application B Other Features X Exit 2 Enter A to select Configure Application The system displays the Enhanced In band menu ENHANCED IN BAND N Application Name D Application Description T Edit Templates Menu P Edit Parameters Menu O Show Application I Install Application
135. MS This is the result of a resyne command sent from the PMS system hisinit Exit mailbox resynchronize loop Normal operation This data is logged after all the mailboxes in the system have been scanned for the ones that have a message waiting type 16 HIS PMS hisinit Unable to attach to HISINIT port Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisinit is started with a port number that can not be attached by this task hisinit Unable to locate mwla Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisinit tries to send a response to tbe mwla at any time and fails hisinit Unable to locate oaa Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisimit tries to send a response to the oaa at any time and fails Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions 1 TNPPinstallation and Configuration tu Trademark of Mitel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mite Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada 1996 Centigram Communications Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed stored in a retrieval syste
136. Maintenance Menu Aenu Map I 2 Change the site name Select N System Name Code and Banner Prompt Enter Y tochange the site name N to keep the Current site name Response Y to change the name N to keep the current name i 3 If you answered yes to step 2 then enter the new site name otherwise continue at step 4 Prompt Enter new site name return for none Response Enter a descriptive name up to 60 characters 4 Change the site code Prompt Enter Y to change the site code N to keep the current site code Response Y to change the site code N to keep the current site code 5 If you answered yes to step 4 then enter the new site code otherwise continue at step 6 Prompt Enter new site code return for none Response Enter a code up to 10 characters 6 Change the site banner Prompt Enter Y to change the site banner N to keep the current site banner Response Y to change the site banner then enter the new site banner N to keep the current site banner 7 If you answered yes to step 6 then enter the new site code otherwise continue at step 8 Prompt Enter new site banner return for none Response Enter a banner up to 240 characters To acknowledge the end of the text enter a period on a new line and press Enter 8 The system returns to the System Maintenance Menu Doc Rev A ce 5 01 Page 1 of 3 Run Verify With System Offline VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and l
137. Menu 2 Select the add optional feature program Select A Add Extra Cost Feature s Prompt WARNING Adding extra cost features here will result in a complete system shutdown followed by a system restart Enter Y to add extra cost features N to stop Response Y 3 Install the optional feature Prompt Insert extra cost floppy disk in the floppy drive Enter any key when ready M Response Insert diskette press Enter 4 Following the installation the system prompts for another optional feature to be installed Prompt Do you want to install another extra cost feature Response Y to install another feature and continue from step 3 N to exit The system automatically shuts down and resets the entire system The system automatically edits and saves the configuration files then returns to the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu 5 Make the necessary system configuration changes if necessary per the instructions provided with the optional feature documentation Doc Rev A DP 5402 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 5 04A and later Reference Step 6 Exit the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu The system will perform a system shutdown Prompt Wait for message waiting queues to be empty Response Y to wait for the queue to clear N to continue immediately with the shutdown The system then completes the shutdown and activates the software returning to the System Maintenance Additional Opt
138. Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS standard and can be configured to deliver to mailboxes on other vendors systems Product Description Capacities and Expansions Model 70 Maximum configuration for the Model 70 includes 7 available line specialty card slots VoiceMemo ports 24 analog 30 digital MI55 IDE hard disk 2 730 mailboxes 55 hours of message storage 18 5Kbps or 40 hours 24 Kbps Multiple redundant hard disks 2 IDE disks maximum User system prompts in four languages Specialty cards Fax card Smartcard Serial 16 32 card and Ethernet card 1 3 Product Description Model 70 General Server Specifications Safety Compliance This equipment meets or exceeds requirements for safety in the US UL 1950 Ist Edition Canada CSA 950 and Europe TW to EN60950 IEC 950 FCC Regulatory Compliance This equipment meets or exceeds requirements for EM1 and telephone interconnectability standards in the US PhysicalSpecifications Height with feet installed 6 25 inches 15 92 cm Width 16 35 inches 41 65 cm Depth 16 50 inches 42 67 cm Weight 21 pounds 9 5 kg Server Environment Temperature Operating 50 95 F 10 35 C Nonoperating 40 158 F 8 70 C Humidity Operating 85 at 95 F 35 C Nonoperating 95 at 95 F 35 C Altitude Operating to 10 000 ft 3 000 m Nonoperating to 50 000 ft 15 240 m BTUs 1700 Noise at operator position 4 dB maximu
139. Modification Day Night 1 Night 2 Absorb Insert 0 NOTE Toll fraud must be considered when assigning a COR to the voice mail ports External dialing may be required for Pager Notification or Message Forwarding Program the E amp M trunks in the Trunk Assignment and apply the proper Trunk Service Number and Circuit Descriptor The trunks are then entered in the Trunk Group Assignment using Circular or Terminal hunting Program the following in the Automatic Route Selection Forms Digit Modification Assignment Number of Digits to Absorb Digits to be Inserted 2 lt R gt lt Fo lt E gt Require AAN MS2007 R2 N11 4 0 on the PBX and Enhanced In band signaling on MITEL MAIL NOTE amp A Tone Plan may have to be implemented at the beginning of the Digits to be Inserted field to pause before digits are outpulsed to MITEL MAIL Do NOT use a tone plan when using Enhanced In band signaling lt Rp gt is the Call Forward Reason as programmed in the FACs lt F gt is the Call Forwarding party lt E gt is the source party is simply a delimiter used in the Enhanced In band Templates The digits outpulsed to MTEL MAIL must match specific templates for Enhanced In band Signaling to work 9 Program the Route Assignment referencing the proper Trunk Group and Digit Modification Number Digits Before Outpulsing can be set to eliminate overlap outpulsing but should not be required Automatic Route Selection Assignment
140. N ANIN SCSI StatusM e n u I Enable Menu 8 SCSI Shutdown Menu ad Redundancy Verification Menu K l Redundancy Update EE Menu aA Biling amp Reports Main Menu Sul Reports Menu B Biling Menu si Billing Rates Menu Of Lp Configuration Report T Ei System Information Report H gt Phonebook Report Logfile Menu S Statistics Menu L M N meng Offine System Verify Logfile other reports 10 Phoneline Exceptions Main Menu System Maintenance Menu System Configuration Menu Phoneline Exceptions Menu SdYN NNiW FOS GEOS LCOS R605 NGOS and TCOS Main Menu System Maintenance R Menu System Configuration Menu Feature Class of Service Menu Group Class of Service Menu L Limits Class of gt Service Menu zal Limits Parameters Menu o More Limits Parameters enu E Even More Limits Parameters Menu 0 L Call Placement gt enu P y FaxMemo Limi axMemo Limits enu 0 Message Relension i gt Limit Menu Restriction Class of Service Menu Sh Show RCOS Menu RCOS System Wide Parameters Menu Network Class of Service Menu Tenant Class of Service Menu 12 System Maintenance Main Menu a System Maintenancs Menu aa Automatic Wakeup Menu Auto Receptionist 1 B Extensions Menu Ff Floppy Backup Ly a System Shutdown ty Module Maint
141. No change to the mailbox database is made The VoiceMemo system responds by sending a bad mailbox packet to the PMS system HISRCV Received a BAD NEW MAILBOX x Mailbox undefined in database This data is logged if the PMS system sends a move mailbox message packet that includes an undefined destination mailbox number It is invalid because the mailbox passed could not be found in the VoiceMemo database This message is discarded No change to the mailbox database is made The VoiceMemo system responds by sending a bad mailbox packet to the PMS system HISRCV Received a BAD NEW MAILBOX same number Error in PMS system This data is logged if the PMS system sends a move mailbox message packet that includes the same source and destination mailbox number This message is discarded No change to the mailbox database is made The VoiceMemo system responds by sending a bad mailbox packet to the PMS system HISRCV No check in FCOS configured Check WoiceMemo system configuration Configure PMS integration This data is logged if VoiceMemo reads nonconfigured or invalid data configured for the PMS integration in the EECO OAA record HISRCV No check out or bad configuration Check WoiceMemoa system configuration Configure PMS integration This data is logged if VoiceMemo reads nonconfigured or invalid data configured for the PMS integration in the EECO OAA record HISRCV Unable to lock source mailbox x Inte
142. Numbers s s is05tcssssisiv cise asvtsnds dapstesesloslorincstsayguiscoseasvoeveae 1 10 Digit AbSOrption o ceccscsessssssssssssecsssssssccssecssssssssessecssscssssessecesecsssecsssesses 1 11 Digit Offset sse esecseccseeessseeeseesssseesnsessneessnneersnesssnessuesennesssnneseneeteny 1 11 Conditional Greetings ccccceece E e eeceecae esse R ERa EEEa 111 Administrative Interface cccccceccecccceseeeeeeeeeeceececeeeeceeaeaaaeasneeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaaeaae 1 11 Loading a Template Set cisien nsise ideien 1 12 Modifying a Template seusia inin a E EAN 1 12 Creating a Template ereere ne ERR EER eaS 1 12 Feature Interactions and Limitations cccccccscccescesseceeeeeecceueceeeeseueessesees 1 12 2 Menu Parameters How to Use This Chapter ccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeesenennnnnnaeaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenenenenenenees 2 1 Peta Sess ees Senses hee ea Ses aie ee Matern EAS 2 2 Application Description Sacccaidoeecccaiiccepedaindeacetlectatuasdancated adeatendengeleind teaceeet 2 3 Application Name nirs t eaa E ES E E adds vee eed EEE 2 3 Backup Application ssssssssssssssssssteterssrrrsrsrsssssssstseteeirenirrrnrnrrnrssseserererrereenenen 2 3 Called Extension Absorbed Digits s ssisniiyeii bs irer inie eieaa a 2 4 Called Extension Signed Offset ccccccccsscssssssesscsecesseseseeseseeseseseeneesseeseens 2 4 Calling Extension Absorbed Digits ccccecceeeceeeece eee ececeeceeeeceeeeeeeneeeaees 2 5 Calling Extension Signed Off
143. Page 6 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference RC 212 H OF OL KA Ss WH RC 211 TA AC TC IE OS N S E CD EI ID A TC OC LE LS S Change Show Non Displayable Class of Service 1 AP DH MO IN NE 00 RN IL GY Change Show Displayable Class of Service 1 M E R S EN RE 10 Set the following values for the E amp M trunk groups These fields are not accessible through RC transactions T5841 T5751 T5831 T5661 T5641 T6341 Doc RN A Trunk Group outpulsing delay value 0 Trunk Group AIOD Channel Rev BAT Check bit for trunk call queuing allowed Yes Trunk Group momentary open OUTGOING field 300 ms gt greater than VoiceMemo hook flash time Trunk Group Restriction Table Trunk Transfer Allow Trunk group direction disconnect 2 way both for VoiceMemo trunks IN for Message Wait ports trunk Trunk Group miscellaneous flags bit for Attendant recall on No Answer GP 504 Page 7 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference Configure User Stations 11 Allow user stations to forward to the VoiceMemo system and receive message waiting indication with the following RC transactions RC 212 Change Show Non Displayable Class of Service 1 wrriw gt r lt z lt SMoOowr Pe ous Tr rea L S RC 214 Change Show Non Displayable Class of Service 2 MESSAGE WAITING LAMP 12 Change all user COSs with RC 21
144. Prompt Insert the Ist diskette containing the prompts and press return Response Insert Prompts Disk then press Enter to continue Prompt Wait until drive light is out insert language disc 1 hit CR when ready Response Press Enter again to continue 11 The prompts are copied to multiple hard disks as applicable The process can take many minutes depending on the number of hard disks The server then requests the remaining diskettes Prompt Working Wait until drive light goes out insert language disc 2 hit CR when ready Response Insert the specified diskette then press Enter to continue 12 The server reads from the floppy disk drive and prompts for each of the remaining diskettes Insert the remaining diskettes and press Enter when prompted 13 When the prompts diskettes are complete the server displays the number of speech blocks that have been used for the system prompts Prompt For this prompt partition vid 1 woo directory entries allocated out of xxxxavailable xXxxx pointer sectors allocated out of xxxxavailable xxxx speech blocks allocated out of xxxxx available Starting up processes please wait 14 Enable all modules Prompt Enter one of the names Response host status Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Which Module Response a The server automatically resets and returns to normal operation Doc Rev A ce 6263 i Page 1 of 5 Perform an Offline Software Update Voi
145. Prompt Log ging results to disk Speech Verification Menu Doc Rev A CP 7001 Page 4 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 3 Select the type s of speech to verify For standard maintenance of the server use Verify All Speech and Prompts If there is a specific problem with the server select either speech or prompts to be verified Select A Verify All Speech and Prompts P Verify Prompts or S Verify Speech Response The server displays dots while performing the verify then returns to the Speech Verification Menu when done D Verify Speech Without logging Results 2 Access the Speech Verification Menu and specify no logging of results Select S Verify Speech Prompt Log results Response N Prompt Results will NOT be logged to disk Speech Verification Menu 3 Select the type s of speech to verify For standard maintenance of the server use Verify All Speech and Prompts If there is a specific problem with the server select either speech or prompts to be verified Select A Verify All Speech and Prompts P Verify Prompts or S Verify Speech Response The server displays the test results as each test is completed then returns to the Speech Verification Menu Doe Rev A 3 Upgrading and Updating Systems How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides step by step procedures for upgrading and updating a Series 6 Model 70 Additional informa
146. RRIAGE RETURN Response Press Enter The Warning is for a server currently running Release 6 00 since most servers running these versions can run the add disk program online If you perform the procedure from the Floppy Boot Diskette you must disable all modules Doc Rev A CP 6282 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Steb Reference 20 Add the active or primary disk Prompt Which disk do you want to add Enter the disk id path target lt cr gt to stop or for help Speech Accounts Software Prompts Messages Mailboxes etc Configuration 1 Yes Yes XX Hours XXXX Account Records Configuration 2 No NO XX Hours XXXX Account Records ee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee OPO Please select the desired CONFIGURATION TYPE for disk n n 1 or 2 Response Enter the desired configuration type 21 Add the redundant disks if any Prompt Do you want this disk to have a redundant disk Y N Response Y if the disk is to have a redundant disk N to skip the redundant disk process and continue at step 24 22 If adding redundant disk s identify the redundant disk ID Prompt Now specify the REDUNDANT disk Enter the disk id path target cr gt to stop or for help Response The two digit disk ID of redundant disk to added 23 The server configures the disk and repeats the prompt asking for another disk ID Continue entering the disk ID numbers until all the redundant disks have
147. RS232 or Smartcard menu choose the TNPP Paging option This is the main configuration menu for TNPP The first selection that must be made is to choose the host that the TNPP application will run on If built in serial ports are used the TNPP application must run on Host 1 Offline Configuration Steps 1 Choose the VoiceMemo host that the TNPP application will run on Access the Pager Systems Menu and configure one or more pager systems for TNPP Access the RS232 Link Menu and configure the serial link attributes Access the TNPP System Information Menu and configure the TNPP Network Information OPTIONAL Access the TNPP Timing Parameters Menu to change any of the default timing parameters used by the TNPP protocol Select the Verify TNPP Pager System Config option to check for any missing configuration information 1 Select the Display TNPP Pager System Config option to show the completed configuration information for active links Exit the TNPP configuration RS232 and Smartcard Integrations and Offline menus The data will not be save d until the Offline Menu has been exited Offline Configuration Menu Parameters Host for TNPP Enter the number of the host that the TNPP application will run on Pager Systems Menu Current Pager System Select the number of the pager system to be configured or modified for TNPP Pager Name Enter a name that will identify this pager system This field is optional Show Pagers This option wi
148. Receipt of First Digit 1 seconds 0 Y PBX Console Attendant Day Access Code OH Z PBX Console Attendant Night Access Code OH X Exit Make any required changes from the default settings Enter X to Exit back to the Receptionist menu 11 Enter P to select the PBX Dial String Definitions menu PBX Dial String Definitions Z Default Options Menu A Rolm CBX B Northern Telecom SL I C AT amp T Dimension D Mitel SX AT amp T System 75 85 F NEC 2400 G Centrex H Fujitsu Focus 1 Hitachi DX ep Telexicom 1001 K Siemens Saturn X Exit 26 12 Enter Z to select the Default Options Menu Default PBX Options Menu Sena n ae eeeeee eee eee ee A Post Directory number dial string B Pre Directory number dial string Attendant xfer string S C Connect Dial string on Called Party Accept E Dial string for Return on Called Party Refused F Dial string for Return on Called Party Busy G Special actions on Reorder Tone Encountered OH H Dial string for Return on Called Party RNA S X Exit 13 Enter A to select the Post Directory number dial string option Set to H Post Directory number dial string H NOTE The Post DN must be set to H or left blank If it is set to H the Mitel preferred setting M TEL MA L performs a blind transfer and options C E F G H are ignored If this setting is left blank M TEL MA L performs a screened transfe
149. Reference and Configuration Manual Dac Rev A Step Use Correct Jacks l c 6201 Page 1 of 2 Connect the Telephone Lines VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure provides guidelines on how to connect Model 120 or Model 70 ports to the buildings main distribution frame MDF Consult Appendix A of your System Implementation Guide before using this procedure WARNING Work closely with your project manager to prevent accidental interruption to your telephone services Reference The ports on the Model 120 or Model 70 line cards have RJ 45 modular jacks for telephone line connections Install the telephone lines that go to the Model 120 or Model 70 ports in the RJ 45 jacks To connect the telephone lines to the corresponding Model 120 or Model 70 ports use non inverting four wire telephone cables with RJ 45 modular connectors on each end Observe Installation Restrictions The jacks should be within ten feet of the Model 120 or Model 70 D Protect Your Equipment 4 Protect the ports of the Model 120 or Model 70 line cards from power surges for example those caused by lightning or power lines falling on aerial cables Install carbon type or gas type protectors on unprotected lines coming in from the central office or an unprotected PBX Install protectors as close as possible to where the phone lines enter the building Doc Rev A CP 6261 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and lat
150. S NUMERIC PROMPTS SETS o min ain EADE E E AOA 7 sA Overlay SEE E A E E ina cea A 7 5 Dix CONTINE LE NABUB caina a oases a a MPR ask SA RE AnA 7 5 3 LANGUAGES PER SERVER 8 Page 3 Introduction This document describes how to install and update prompts diskettes on a Centigram Series 6 server This information is currently not available in Series 6 documentation 1 1 Scope This document covers installation and updating instructions only It is for use with all prompt sets for software release 6 0 except hotel for all languages 1 2 Intended Audience This document is intended for anyone who needs to install or update prompts on a Series 6 server This includes customers field engineers customer support engineers and customer education personnel 1 3 Related Documents For reference information on how prompts work with VoiceMemo software refer to the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual For information about specifying drive types such as prompts drives refer to the appropriate Series 6 Installation and Service Manual for your server For information on ordering prompts see Product Note 48A Series 6 System Prompts 1 3 1 Obsolete Documents Procedures CP 6262 CP 7008 and CP 7009 which were included in 5 0x manuals and in drafts of 6 0 manuals are superseded by this document New functionality There are changes in prompt installation between 5 0x software and 6 0 software 2 1 No Online Installation
151. S and Model 640 Series 6 servers can support a total capacity of 60 PCM voice application channels per module Model 70 and Model 1201 Series 6 servers can support a total capacity of 30 PCM voice application channels per module Note Port as used elsewhere in Series 6 Communications Server documentation when used in the context of digital trunk connectivity equates directly to PCM channel channel and circuit Model 120S and Model 640 Series 6 server modules can support up to two Dual El Digital Trunk Interface cards with two trunks per card for Series 6 server to network connections for example for incoming to help line connections Some of the PCM circuits can be allocated for network to network connections for example for incoming to help line connections The user can enable or disable CRC error checking on the trunks and set line coding for the CCITT standard HDB3 high density bipolar 3 The system clock can be slaved to the incoming PCM signal or can be set to synchronize with an internal free running reference Tip To optimize fault tolerance on your system configure your trunks with the voice application circuits evenly divided between each trunk Then for example in a host with four trunks a single trunk going out of service results in the loss of only one fourth of your total available circuits E 1 Connectivity Functional Operation From the standpoint of implementation the El trunk is ex
152. S integration F Feature COS G Group COS L Limits COS N Network COS P Phoneline exceptions R Reconfigure system V Configure Video Dispatch W Configure Citywide SMDI Y Configure Smartcard Table X Exit Enter letter in to execute command When you need help later type COMMAND E F G L N P R V W X E Users will then view the following Answer the following questions to configure the PMS Clear passcode on Check out Y Clear messages on Check out fY Clear name on Check out Y Clear greeting on Check out Y On Check in set the mailbox FCOS 0 On Check out set the mailbox FCOS 0 COMMAND E F G L P R V W X E Here is a list of the PMS configuration questions and some help text on them Clear passcode on Check out Y To have the mailbox passcode cleared on Check out enter Y otherwise enter N Page 6 Clear messages on Check out To have the mailbox messages cleared on Check out enter Y otherwise enter N Clear name on Check out Y To have the name messages cleared on Check out enter Y otherwise enter N Clear greeting on Check out To have the mailbox greeting cleared on Check out enter Y otherwise enter N On Check in set the mailbox FCOS 0 Enter the Feature Class of Service number between 1 and 64 or enter 0 to prevent the number from being changed On Check out set the mailbox FCOS 0 Enter the feature Class of
153. Service GCOS 27 Create several mailboxes with different GCOS 28 Make messages among mailboxes 29 Verify that you can deliver only messages allowed by each mailbox GCOS VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual VotceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Doc RN A c 6215 Page 1 of 2 Install Printer VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later The Model 70 supports one DCE serial printer using X On X Off data transmission protocols This procedure explains how to attach this printer to the Model 70 and provides configuration guidelines For detailed printer specifcations refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference Verify Electronic Specifications 1 Verify that the customer s printer meets the specifications given in Table 1 below Table 1 Printer Specifications Baud Rate 9600 baud Auto Line Feed Disabled Line Mode Full Duplex Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits l Data Protocol X On X Off Verify Cabling Specifications 2 Obtain the correct RS 232 cable for your printer Table 2 lists all signals present at the serial port connectors Note The Model 70 is shipped with a 9 pin D type female console cable which connects to the serial port The other end of this console cable is a 25 pin D type female connector To connect to a terminal personal computer modem or printer you need an RS 232 cable with a
154. Service number between 1 and 64 or enter 0 to prevent the number from being changed Mailbox Set Up EECO Only Once the application has been set up the user must create guest mailboxes with either the Check out or the Check in FCOS it is important to match the existing room status since the integration does not handle a re synchronization of the databases in VoiceMemo and the Property Management System when it first starts up Mailbox Set Up HIS Only Once the application has been set up the user must create guest mailboxes with either the Check out or the Check in FCOS It is not critical to match the existing room status since the integration offers a System Maintenance menu choice to provide a re synchronization of the databases when PMS first starts up It is important to set the MWI type for the guest mailboxes to be type 16 Message Waiting Type 1 None Not Available 0 1 2 AC msg lamp 3 DTMF to PBX Page 7 Fixed RS232 4 5 Pager 6 SL 1 BkGround 7 Program RS232 8 T R RS232 9 Centrex RS232 10 Intecom RS232 11 NEC RS232 12 Video Dispatch 13 ITT RS232 14 Citywide SMDI 15 AT amp T System 75 16 HIS PMS 17 SL 1 Msg Waiting Message waiting type 1 16 This is so that the guest room s MW light is controlled by the PMS system Note this integration does NOT preclude the use of another integration running on a different serial port After both the configuration and the mai
155. Shortcut Commands ikdtse tena ya tient teas xiv Preparing for Hardware Installation esssssessssssseresessessesseseessesreseeseseereessent XV Protecting Your Equipment From Damage cccceeeeececeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees xvi 1 Product Description Introduction sresisir ns o onen tieni NSPE OESP ESER EESE R ESES ENEE EE EO PEENE 1 1 Model 70 Overview csierncnnernesssi SECES PTEN kp R Ones oR CESES RE aie nar roei 1 1 Capacities and Expansions sssccccsssiav ove eeaes cress vaecesvavveasaevaus EREKE SEEE EE EEES 1 3 Model O e sad vce aoc as ached dad aah Ea a eS I 3 Model 70 General Server Specifications ssessssseserssrrstssrsetsrrerrrrrssreersse l 4 Safety Compliance rnas niii e EE E ES 1 4 FCC Regulatory Compliance 1 4 Physical Specifications senssrseniaereniaine ane I 4 Server Environmentt sccssssssssssesssesssssssesssssssecssscsseessscssseeseessssessecsneesseess 1 4 Major Hardware Components cc cece cceeccnec cree ce eeceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeaesaaeeaaes 1 5 Cabinet scucccis cia ad ec ee eee 1 5 Hard Disk cegiccec cose atesescce ee decevsns eesnclg i evcenicdiende ea E ARAARA 1 9 il Table of Contents Limits Class of Service LCOS o ceccecccecssesssessesssesesesesseseseseesseescssseseeeees Group Class of Service GCOS Jeeson AAAA A Network Class of Service NCOS woiiiiccccscsssceecscsessssescsessseeeees Restriction Class of Service RCOS Tenant Class of Service TCOS w
156. Test the RS232 link without one and if the data packets are not received correctly install a Null Modem Adapter Messaae Formats Each fixed length record will contain S Message E L T Text T R X x Cc All messages start with an STX followed by the message text All message text must be followed by ETX and the last byte LRC to guarantee integrity ACK and NAK are sent by the receiver to the sender to indicate positive or negative acknowledgement to the transmitted message A NAK should be used by the message sender as a request to retransmit the last message sent ENQ is a sender request for a repeat of the acknowledgement ACK or NAK as a reply to the last transmitted message a Page 19 The following is a summary table of the valid data transferred between the PMS and the VMS STX El x ENQ ACK NAK SP LRC MBOX MSG FCOS UNP URG UNR 02H Start of data text 03H End of data text 05H Request for retransmission of acknowledgement 06H Positive acknowledgement 15H Negative acknowledgement 20H ASCII space character to padd fields Longitudinal redundancy check XOR of all bytes after STX including the ETX character with a OOH Null seed A 6 digit left justified and space filled mailbox ASCII number 1 RESYNCHRONIZE 2 CHECK IN i 3 CHECK OUT 4 MESSAGE WAITING STATUS 5 BAD MAILBOX ADDRESS 6 QUERY MESSAGE WAITING STATUS 7 MOVE MAILBOX 8 MODIFY FCOS 9
157. To Disable a module Select D DISABLE a module Prompt W hich Module Response The number of the module Enter 1 or a for Model 20 0r Model 70 Prompt type disable to confirm your request Response disable If you disable this module you will not see the balance of this procedure because the module will reset The console then resets to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu 10 When you finish configuring the modules exit the menu 11 The server completes the shutdown Prompt SHUTDOWN COMPLETES The System Maintenance Menu is displayed You can now either reboot the module or remove power to the module Doc Rev A ce628 Page 1 of 5 Redundant Disk Addition make redundant VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to add storage redundancy by adding another disk to a non redundant Centigram Series 6 server The new disk is called the redundant disk and stores a mirror image of all data on the primary original disk This procedure can be performed while the server is online For instructions describing how to increase the storage capacity to a server by adding another primary disk see CP 6282 Disk Addition add disk FOR THE MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 servers In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 70 The Model 70 is equivalent to a one m
158. VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Table 7 LSI ADM 3A Parameter Parameter Bit 8 0 Keyboard Lower Parity Off Linewrap On Stop Bits 1 Interface RS 232C Data Bits 8 Echo FDX Parity Odd or Even Speed 300 baud Note Switches are located inside the unit SP ADV ADV Case Upper or Lower Power 60 Hz Lines Screen 24 Keyboard Lock Disable Cursor Control Enable Clear Screen Enable Local On Protocols 103 202 Off Code Off Ext Off EOT Off Connect the Console 4 Connect the 9 pin cable connector to Serial port 1 designated S 1 in the VoiceMemo software 5 Connect the 25 pin cable connector to the terminal 6 Connect keyboard according to manufacturer s documentation 7 Test printer as recommended by the manufacturer s documentation Doc Rev A ce 6258 Page 1 of 1 Check Installation Quality VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later By following the steps below you will be able to catch and correct all mistakes made during the installation of the hardware Most checks are visual and require only a few minutes to complete Reference Step Inspect Installation Quality 1 Check all internal cables and connectors to make sure that they are tight 2 Check all peripheral cable connections to make sure they are properly labeled and easily identifiable LA 3 Check grounding 4 Begin building customer data base VoiceMemo
159. a Phoneline Exception 1 Reach the Phoneline Exceptions Menu venu Map 0 2 Select line to change Select A Add exception Prompt line to change Response The line number to change The valid entries are 112 3 Select the exception number to set Prompt command Response The exception number 4 Enter the new value for the exception Prompt value Response The desired new value 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the phoneline exceptions for the selected line are set When you are finished press Enter 6 Select a new line to change or press Enter to finish D Cancel a Phoneline Exception l To return a phoneline exception to the default value reach the Phoneline Vienu Map 0 Exceptions Menu 2 Select a line to change Select C Cancel exception Prompt line to change Response The line number to change 3 Select the phoneline exception to reset Prompt Command to cancel Response The number of the phoneline exception to reset 4 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each phoneline exception you want to change When you are finished press Enter 5 Enter the next line to be changed or press Enter to exit a Doc Rev A DP 7022 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference Port Number to Line Number Conversion Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Port Line Line Line Line Number Number Number Number Number 0 l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Doe Rev
160. a bipolar signal It also inverts the second and the fourth sixth and so forth of a long string of 1 s Figure 2 3 a Bit Stream Code OV Logic 0 Ar j b Binary Signal Unipolar 3V Logic 1 e e 3V Logic 0 c Polar NRZ 3V Logic 1 OV Logic 0 3V Logic 1 d Bipolar AMI Alternate Mark Inversion x1884vm6 Figure 2 3 AMI Line Coding Dual Ti Digital Trunk Connectivity AMI with ZCS AMI with zero code suppression is coding technique is similar to basic AMI except that the eighth O bit in a string of O s is converted to a bit This technique interferes with the data when all zeros are transmitted However this is not a significant problem when the data represents a voice signal and an occasional reversal of a bit is not apparent in the overall voice signal quality Of course AM1 with ZCS is a problem when transmitting data that requires a high degree of fidelity for example video but which is not a concern with voice messaging equipment B8ZS B8ZS bipolar with 8 zeros suppression introduces a code recognizable to a data receiver that a bit has been changed from a 0 to a 1 This technique deliberately introduces a known bipolar violation BPV into a data stream A bipolar violation occurs where a pulse is of the same polarity as the previous pulse B8ZS deliberately reverses the fifth and the seventh 0 in a series of eight 0 bits The receiver recognizes this known bipolar violation and substi
161. a module running Release 6 0 You should use this procedure before turning off the power to a Series 6 server module as the shutdown command halts call processing in a clean and orderly fashion FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or CPE a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only i WARNING You should follow the policies of the site to warn users prior to the system shutdown This process removes the server from call processing Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure only during periods of low call traffic Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu venu Map 1 2 Execute a shutdown command Select S System Shutdown The server displays the status of each line and the lengths of the message indicator request queues Prompt WARNING This will terminate call processing Type shutdown if you really want to do this Response shutdown 3 Specify which modules to shut down Prompt modules to shutdown Response a The server displ
162. ailure contact the Technical Assistance Center for instructions on how to set up the hardware WARNING During this procedure the server cannot process calls Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference Prepare the New Disk 1 Jumper the new disk to match the master or slave disk to be replaced TR 1923 2 Call the Technical Assistance Center to add the serial number of the new disk to the Service Diskette the Module Enable Diskette and all Optional Feature Diskette s if the server contains any This can be done while the server is processing calls Prepare the System 3 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Menu Map 8 Doc Rev A CP 6283 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 4 Verify that all disks are in sync Select D Display Status of all SCSI buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing the status of all disks Verify that all disks show the status as ENA Press Enter to exit 5 Ifanydisk other than the disk to be replaced is out of sync with its redundant CP7015 mate update the redundancy Do not update the redundancy of the disk to be replaced 6 Shut down the system Leave the status of all modules enabled i Cl 6268 7 Turn off the system power
163. al Port 2 Serial Port 1 AC Outpt Power Adapter Card Connector Parallel Port Connector Expansion Slots a5 Power Supply Yoltage Fan Switch AC Input Power Keyboard Connector Connector Not Supported Figure l 2 Model 70 Rear Panel Connectors The front panel shown in Figure 1 3 includes the following controls and indicators HDD LED Red indicates the state of the hard disk and lights when the hard disk is accessed Power LED Green indicates the power status and lights when the server power is on Bay for 3 5 inch Hard Disk covered with filter panel and EM1 shield 3 5 inch Floppy Disk Drive used an interface to install reconfigure backup and update the server software 3 5 inch Floppy Disk Drive Eject Button ejects 3 5 inch diskettes 3 5 inch Floppy Disk Drive LED Green indicates the state of the floppy disk drive and lights when the floppy drive is accessed Power Button turns the server on and off Reset Button initiates a warm boot which resets the server without turning off the power supply Keyboard Lock not supported 1 7 Product Description 3 5inch Floppy Disk Drive Bay for 3 5 inch Floppy disk Drive HDD LED Power LED Hard Disk Eject Button Keyboard Lock Reset Power Floppy Disk 4 Not Supported Button Button Drive LED 5103a70t Figure 1 3 Model 7O Front Panel Controls and Indicators The internal layout of the cabinet is shown in Figure 1 4 It include
164. aller multiple messages enabled m Y KEY O for attendant transfer during greeting N Disconnect string Pre company name string Pre mailbox greeting string Passcode Length Min m 4 Max 10 Language English y Start of day 08 00 AM End of day 05 00 PM Days of Week DDDDDNN Passcode trip count 5 Passcode trip period 24 Dial by name Last First Y Match Threshold 3 Exact Y Suppress Number N Single Digit Access N Delay Before Answer a 50 E mail Transfer String m Allow Dial an Extension for callers N users m N Analog Networking Call Setup timeout 6 International Access Code Country code Area City code Iplus dialing Area City code is dialed with Local Telephone Number N Telephone number Loop back Test Mailbox Name Greet Quality Message Quality Receptionist Enabled N Pre DN or attendant xfer string S Attendant s extension 0 NAME EIB 2COD DESCRIPTION MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION Installation Date Fri Apr 26 I 1 49 58 1996 Last Modify Date Fri Apr 26 13 35 53 1996 Calling Extension Absorbed Digits Calling Extension Signed Offset Called Extension Absorbed Digits Called Extension Signed Offset MF Detection Enabled N Pager Systems Pager System 0 Pager Name w internal Access code t Hold time 20 Pager System 1 Pager Name w billed Access code T9TO Hold time
165. an analog voice signal is digitally encoded it is periodically sampled to produce an 8 bit representation a byte or octect of the sampled moment This sampling occurs at an 8 kHz rate which equals 64 kb s After digital encoding each byte is added into a string of bytes encoded from other voice signals for transmission over a common path This byte stringing is done in an orderly manner which repeats the insertion of a series of digitally encoded voice signals each assigned to its own time slot channel to produce frames This voice data framing is done in stages to assemble ever larger frames beginning with a DS frame A DS 2 1 Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity 2 2 frame has 24 PCM channels with 8 data bits in each time slot channel and including an extra bit as a start of frame marker 193 bits makes up a complete frame Various framing formats have been developed for channel banks All formats have a framing bit in every 193rd bit position A unique bit pattern in the frame bit position repeats every 12 frames to define a complete superframe Figure 2 1 The composite data rate of a frame is 1 536 Mbps A framing bit precedes each frame at the same 8 kb s rate as the voice channels increasing the frame rate to 1 544 Mbps A D4 superframe has a frame interval of 1 5 milliseconds VoiceMemo Release 6 0A also supports the extended superframe ESF format of 24 frames each ESF differs from SF by t
166. ance then enter L Lights test Enter the mailbox number and message waiting setting to be sent out This testing tool causes the message waiting notification to be sent across the Tink to the PMS system without the need to send messages too or delete messages from a mailbox Level 22 HIS EECO Encore PMS Messages logged at this level are logged for link and program level diagnostics This level of diagnostics should not run om an unmonitored system The CDR data logged is of a large quantity and may cause problems with disk utilization Some of the error messages logged are followed by task aborts These messages are identified below by an additional comment line bracketed with asterisks Any of the tasks below may abort either during a system boot or while the system is in full operation Only the tasks hissnd hisrcv and hismwi wij be restarted It may he that the task immediately aborts again for the same or another error condition After five aborts of a task the system will auto reboot to try and solve the problem by reinitjalization The reason for the task abort is reported to the console and if CDR logging is enabled also to the CDR log file hissnd hissnd Lii is up Link failure recovery hissnd Link is down Link failure This data is logged at the same time and for the same reason as it is defined in the log file section above hissnd Lii down condition timeout Link failure This data is logged if a
167. and call information when it routes a call over these trunks Direct message retrieval calls go through a POTS DN that is permanently forwarded to the VoiceMemo system The VoiceMemo system recognizes the DN of this dummy extension and treats the call as a direct call from the originating DN Figure B l shows the strategy for Omni to AIP VoiceMemo integration The Omni integration does allow call transfers from the VoiceMemo system such as return to operator or to another extension The switch s ability to recognize a switch hook flash on tie trunks makes this possible The EIB integration software includes two Omni template sets one for three digit dialing plans and one for four digit dialing plans The Omni integration does not support mixed dialing plans The PBX sends different call information messages to the VoiceMemo system for the different types of call forwarding This allows mailbox owners to use conditional greetings The forwarded call types are forward busy forward no answer and forward all BA Omni OMNI SI Sill PBX AIP VoiceMemo System Incoming Integration Ports Trunks gt TOCO O O Enhanced In band y Queue and Receptionist Il gt seas _y3 7 4 Applications Boas Fa 2 Wire E amp M Tie Trunks Message Dummy Retrieval Extension Hunt Group Message Waiting i i Outdials Outgoing Outdial Ports Trunks Paging Fax Call Placement 3006EIB Figure B Omni to VeiceMemo Syst
168. and the response to any additional digits is determined by standard VoiceMemo software The following rules apply when creating or modifying a template 1 1 10 a Both Data and Action fields must not be blank Only one of the two fields can be blank Templates always have comma separators even if fields are blank 10 11 12 13 Enhanced In band Integration If more than one template in a group of Next Templates matches the received data the system carries out the action of the first matching template in order of template number Therefore you should specify templates in the order of priority for their actions If all the templates in a group of next templates fail the system performs the error action of the last surviving template If a time out occurs while receiving digits the system performs the error action for the template with the longest time out value If all the templates in the group have the same value the system performs the first template s error action If the system recognizes invalid entries in the Data field at any time during template execution it drops the template and writes arf entry in the error log It does not perform an action or error action for that template If the Time out field is left blank the system uses a value of O for the inter digit time out The time out value does not apply while waiting for a ringing event in template 1 The maximum length for the Time out field
169. apply to Callback Messages activated by the ONS voice mail port s NOTE This applies to MS2004 1 K04 7 and above only Attendant consoles are unable to receive a Message Waiting indication This includes the SUPERSET 7 SUPERSET 7DN SUPERSET 700 SUPERCONSOLE 1000 and SUPERSET 7000 Analog SUPERSET 3 Telephones and Single Line Telephones without Message Waiting lamps require Message Waiting Audible Tone Notification Class of service option enabled Subscribers with several voice messages in their mailboxes will have only one call me back or Dialed Message Waiting applied to their sets Advisory messages displayed on Analog SUPERSET 4 telephones take priority over the Message Waiting count displayed on the sets Messages can be activated from E amp M analog or digital ports However these will only be Dialed Message Waiting indications lamp only Mitel recommends the use of ONS ports for call me back functionality 1 VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu 3 Mailboxes f Main Menu Main Menu Mailbox Maintenance Menu Qs ere List Maintenance Reports Menu Menu S Soarch Pattern Merit AT Ry Create New Mailboxes Modify Mailboxes other data entry parameters ean ystem Maintenance L Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu A pin VoiceMemo Application 2 VoiceMemo Application VoiceMemo Configuration HG Setar ve TO
170. ard disks Reach the System Configuration Menu then to go the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Increase the system hours Select C Increase System Hours Prompt Please insert the service diskette in floppy drive and enter any key when ready Response Insert the service diskette and press Enter The system reads from the floppy disk and returns to the command line when done Reach the Reports Menu Verify that the hours have been changed by running a System Information Report Reference Menu Map 1 Menu Map 9 Doe Rev A Cl 7021 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Select M System Information Prompt Response REPORT OUTPUT ROUTING C Console screen P Console with pause 1 Printer A F File A Append to file X Exit no report If you need help later type COMMAND C P I F A X C to send the report to the console without pausing P to send the report to the console pausing as the screen fills 1 to send the report to printer A F to send the report to a file on the Series 6 server A to append the report to an existing file on the Series 6 server or X to exit report output options no report You can have one or more serial ports on your server with different devices depending on the configuration of your server The system displays the report to the output device you select If you are sending it to the console use the fo
171. arm functionality informs the signaling function that ports on a failed digital trunk are unavailable and terminates in process calls Only after a trunk is restored for 10 seconds are the trunk ports again made available to the VoiceMemo application The server maintains these carrier events for each trunk Loss of frame LOS J Frame slips Bit errors Remote Alarms All one s signal AIS Local carrier alarm e Remote carrier alarm Errored seconds Failed seconds When the equipment is online service personnel can monitor several digital trunk conditions and control several functions These include Displaying event counters current trunk state current clock source and trunk configuration for a single trunk or all trunks in a module e Setting the module clock reference Connecting or disconnect a digital loopback toward the facility Placing a digital trunk out of service This action returns an AJS to the switch Restoring a digital trunk to service Alarm Handling and Reporting 2 10 The T digital trunk function in the Series 6 server recognizes and responds to out of frame OOF d arms yellow alarms D4 and ESF red alarms and blue alarms These alarm conditions are all recorded in the system event log A VoiceMemo maintenance utility presents a Digital Carrier Status screen that shows event counters where trunk error activity can be reviewed Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Out Of Frame OOF Alar
172. at secure the carrier to the cabinet 6 32 hex head Phillips screws 9 Slide the carrier toward the back of the server freeing the left front tab from the slot on the side of the adjacent drive bay Make sure all the cabling is clear and lift the carrier up and out of the server See Figure 1 for details CAUTION Support the carrier as you remove it from the cabinet Be careful not to damage components on the motherboard Doc Rey A CP 6222 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 3 1 2 Drive Carrier Figure 1 Remove the Drive Carrier CD Remove the Floppy Disk Drive 10 Remove the three screws that secure the floppy disk drive to the carrier M3 6 hex head Phillips screws these screws differ from the ones that secure the drive carrier to the cabinet 1 I Remove the floppy disk drive from the carrier See Figure for details 12 Place the floppy disk drive on an anti static wrapper Note if you are performing fault isolation install the floppy disk drive into the spare cabinet for testing If you are replacing the floppy disk drive prepare it for return and repair Doc RN A CP 6222 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Figure2 Remove the Floppy Disk Drive Install the Floppy Disk Drive and Drive Carrier Note If you are performing fault isolation and installing the floppy disk drive into a spare cabinet remove the drive
173. at the hard disk faceplate is flush with the front of the Model 70 cover 14 Connect the spare data and power cables to the redundant hard disk Install the Disk Carrier 15 Position the carrier above the cabinet The front of the floppy disk drive faces the front of the cabinet and should line up with the opening in the front panel 16 Lower the carrier into the cabinet lining up the front tab on the carrier with the slot that projects from the side of the 5 25inch bay 17 Slide the carrier toward the front until the left front tab and the screw holes line up 18 Secure the carrier into the cabinet using four mounting screws 6 32 hex head Phillips screws Note If the floppy disk drive needs to be properly aligned with the front bezel loosen the mounting screws holding it to the carrier by at most one quarter turn Adjust the position as needed Once the floppy disk drive is aligned tighten the two screws again 19 Reconnect the data and power cables to the hard disk and floppy disk drive 20 Reinstall the cabinet cover TR 1923 Cl 6224 Doe Rev A l ce 6590 Page 1 of 2 Model 70 Installation VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later The Model 70 is preconfigured from the factory and ready to use This procedure provides guidelines on how to install the server When using Centigram Procedures CPs referenced in this or any other procedures disregard all instructions that apply to other Series 6 server models
174. ata and requests hissnd to transmit the message across the serial link to the PMS system Upon completion it reports the status back to the tywla A VoiceMeimo routine that receives the serial link data from the PMS system A VoiceMemo routine that is started by hisrcv if it receives a fesync message from the PMS system It sends a message to hissnd to start hisinit and then dies A VoiceMemo routine that sends data across the serial link to the PMS system A VoiceMemo routine that oversees message waiting updates for all the message waiting integrations An ascii control character used in the RS232C serial protocol for negative acknowledgement of a single character or full message packet Open Account Administrator The method to store VoiceMemo mailbox and configuration data in 4K records Property Management System Tela typewriter The purpose of this document is to explain the available diagnostic information for the HIS Encore PMS Integration The information is located in three areas the log tile the CDR file and the system console Any messages that are displayed on the system console are from the running tasks hissnd hisrev hismwi or hisimit showing that they aborted and why Log File When VoiceMemo is running there are two possibilities the link is up or the link is down When VoaiceMemo is booted the PMS system integration software starts with the assumption the link is up If the VoiceMemo system sends any data over the
175. ater This procedure describes how to execute an offline system verify The verify can be run only if all modules are shut down For information regarding online system verification see CP 700 1 FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 1 20 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or 66 a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only i WARNING This procedure requires that you shut down the server resulting in an interruption to call processing Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Step Reference Reach the System Maintenance Menu Venu Map 1 2 Execute a system shutdown Select S System Shutdown Prompt WARNING This will terminate call processing Type shutdown if you really want to do this Response shutdown 3 The server asks which modules are to be shut down Prompt hosts to shutdown Response a for all Prompt Wait for Message Waiting Response Y to wait for message waiting queue to clear 4 When the Series 6 server has taken all lines of t
176. ation 3 The Encore PMS Integration All the integrations provide the same basic features on room check in and check out The EECO and HIS integrations use the same configuration menus to set up these options the Encore Integration uses additional menus All the integrations communicate with the PMS over an RS232 link to determine which rooms have been checked in or checked out The integrations then change the mailboxes of these rooms according to a user defined configuration There are three basic steps to the installation 1 Install the PMS Integration extra cost feature on the VoiceMemo system This is discussed in the next chapter Note that the VoiceMemo will then have to be rebooted 2 Hook up an RS232 link between the VoiceMemo and the PMS The RS232 connection should be a 9 pin to 25 pin cable with the following straight thru pin outs 2 to 2 3 to 3 and 7 to 7 If the distance from the VoiceMemo to the PMS is over 50 feet and the data packets discussed in the following chapters have parity or bit errors install limited distance line drivers If a modem is needed to reach a PMS system at another location a pair of 202 Modems may be appropriate Contact Centigram s Technical Assistance Center at 408 428 3558 for further guidance 3 Configure the integration to meet the needs of the specific site The configuration changes are done on line and the changes take effect within one minute This makes the integrations very flexible
177. ation Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x where x is the Menu Map 13 slot number entered in Step 4 reach the Configuration Menu for T1 E Carrier at trunk O to configure the digital trunk Doe Rev A CP 3150 Page 4 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 10 11 12 13 14 15 At the Configuration Menu for T1 El Carrier at trunk 0 set the logical number of the trunk Trunk configuration consists of setting the trunk number framing and coding Select T set Trunk number Prompt Input your choice for help T F C D Response O or 1 From the Configuration Menu for T E Carrier at trunk 0 reach the Configure vlenu Map 13 Frame Format for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk 0 Menu y At the Configure Frame Format for DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk y where y is the trunk number you entered in Step 9 select the framing format you want for the trunk You can frame the trunk as either a D3 D4 trunk with PCM 12 channels or as an ESF trunk 24 PCM channels The CEPT and CRC framing options are not available for T trunks Because you have not yet set the trunk coding format the default AM1 alternate mark inversion coding appears in the confirmation Also because CAS is the only signaling type available for Series 6 T 1 trunk connectivity CAS appears in the confirmation message as the selected signaling type Exit to the Configuration Menu for TI E Carrier at tru
178. ature Class of oiceMemo Service and the default Limits Class of Service Reference and Configuration Manual 7 Disable the tutorial on the second mailbox 8 Call the first mailbox from the test telephone and go through the tutorial Then b TW a Press LE or User Options and listen for the User Options Menu b Make a message for the second mailbox c Press P wice in quick succession to exit the mailbox and return to the Company greeting 9 Enter the number of the second mailbox Then a Listen for You have an unplayed message Do not respond After time out the Model 70 should play the entire menu Press P to Play the current message b Play the message Listen for the prompts to keep discard answer etc 2 nS c Press 2 answer the message Listen for the prompt to record additional comments WY s d Press 9 to exit the mailbox 10 If while doing the above steps a prompt is missing do a Prompts Update using the ZP 6262 Ch 5 Service Diskette When asked if you want to clear the prompts do so by typing Clear Then insert the prompts diskette and reload the prompts Verify Mailbox Dialing Plan 11 Set up a dialing plan for the server VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual 12 Set up one test mailbox for each leading digit of the dialing plan that you are using 13 Call the server and enter the number of the first mailbox Repeat for additional mail
179. ays the status of each line of the specified modules as idle active or stopped and updates the status every minute until all lines are stopped The server stops any calls still in progress after five minutes 4 If you are executing a system shutdown wait for the message waiting queue to clear If you are executing a module shutdown on a multi module system do not wait for the message waiting queue to clear Prompt Wait for message waiting queues to be empty a Doc Rev A CP 6268 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Response Y to wait for the queue to clear N to continue immediately with the shutdown 5 When the Series 6 server has taken all lines of the specified modules off hook it continues by asking if a verify is to be executed Prompt Perform Offline System Verification Y N Response Y to execute the verify N to skip verify and continue with the shut down 6 Specify if changes to the status of each module are to be made Prompt Enable or Disable Modules Response Y to change rhe status of modules N to keep the module status the same and continue at step 11 7 If you answered yes in step 6 a chart with the status of each module is displayed and then the Module Maintenance Menu is displayed 8 To Enable a module Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Which Module Response The number of the module Enter 1 or a for Model 1 20 0r Model 70 9
180. been added then press Enter to exit 24 Acknowledge the end of the process Prompt ADD DISK DONE ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN TO REBOOT THE SYSTEM Response Press Enter The server resets all modules to the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu 25 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the Module Maintenance Menu Menu Map 2 26 Update the redundancy of all disks that were affected by the shutdown CP 7015 Doc Rev A Online Disk Replacement Redundant CP 6283 Page 1 of 2 Systems VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to replace a hard disk for a single or multi module server with full disk redundancy This procedure can be performed while the server is online FOR THE MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 70 The Model 70 is equivalent to a one module server When asked for the number of the host or module always enter I or a All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only Note Be sure that the Service Diskette all Optional Feature Diskette s and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial numbers for all disk s in the server and the disk s to be added CAUTION If your server is a multi module server without redundant disks that has experienced a total hard disk f
181. billing fields Sent_urg_ msgs 0 Tas_msgs 0 Pages 0 Receipt 0 Sent to node 0 Urg to_node 0 Net_urg mien 0 Net_msgs_ rcv 0 Net_urg rcv 0 Net sent_ node 0 Net send _nurg 0 Net send rep 0 Greet_count 0 Successlogins 0 Recpt_calls 0 Recpt_complt 0 Recpt_busy 0 Recpt_rna 0 Recpt_msgs 0 Recpt_attend 0 User_connect 0 Clr_connect 0 Callp_ connect 0 Disk_use 0 Net_sent_mlen 0 Net_rcvd_mlen 0 Net rcvd _urg 0 Net_node_mien 0 Net_recip_mlen 0 Net node urg 0 Text_msg cnt 3 Message Queues Type Count Total Head Tail Type Count Total Head Tail Free 73 0 72 Unplayed 0 1 Played 0 a i 1 Urgent 0 oe 1 Receipts 0 1 1 Undelivered 0 aie 1 1 Future delivery 0 Call placmt 0 e 1 1 If this field is other than 0 it will be displayed every time a full mailbox report is run either when deleting modifying searching etc under a new field called TEXT MW text messages waiting MAILBOX 100 MSGS 0 UNPLAYED 0 URGENT 0 RECEIPT 0 LCOS Default al FCOS Unlimited ae GCOS DefauttGCOS 1 1 NCOS Default oe BADLOGS 0 LASTLOG 05 04 80 1 26 pm MINS 0 0 PASSWD N TUTOR N DAY M NIGHT M NAME CODE EXTEN 100 INDEX 0 TEXTMW 2 ATTEN DN INDEX 0 ACCESS None Page 17 7 0 Batch Mode A new batch mode program cmds atext now exists in order to change query this new field via the console The following is a set of examples that demonstrate its usage atext
182. boxes If the server refuses to accept a valid number check your mailbox dialing plan programming for the port group Doe RN A CP 6201 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 14 Attempt to enter an invalid mailbox number for each dialing plan position The server should respond That is not a valid mailbox number Please enter another mailbox number If a prompt is missing do an Update using the Service diskette When asked if you want to clear the prompts do so by typing Clear Then insert the prompts diskette and reload the prompts Test Call Attendant Operation 15 Attach a telephone test set to Line B Figure 1 16 Call Line B from Test Station A You should hear ringing on the test set 17 Test each of the four attendant access routes that apply to your server When the dial string to reach the attendant is invoked listen to the call progress on the test set Stay on the line at Station A until you are transferred to the attendant 18 If while doing the above steps the call fails do the following a Check the programming of the Call Attendant string take two 2500 sets and transfer one to the operator The programming sequence should be identical to the manual transfer operation b Check the switch hook flash timing of your server s phoneline exceptions long times cause an immediate disconnect when the server issues a switch hook flash too short the caller is not p
183. card Slot Assignment The Dual El Digital Trunk Interface card s are assigned and factory installed in specific physical slots in the Series 6 server backplane The system software requires these slot assignments to identify the hardware resources present in the backplane The configuration process for installing the digital trunk interface cards includes the following Is Configure the cards refer to TR 1906 in this volume 2 In the Physical Configuration Menu configure the slots assigned to the cards 33 In the Offline Menus continue the configuration needed by the applications The factory installs the digital trunk interface card in these slots in the Series 6 Model 70 Model 120 and Model 640 servers Model 70 Model 1201 Model 120 Model 630 Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number 1 7 El Digital Trunk Connectivity The Model 70 and Model 120 servers each support only one digital trunk for a maximum system capacity of 30 PCM voice channels The Model 120S server and Model 640 server each supports up to 120 PCM voice channels ports between two digital trunk interface cards You assign the slot at the Physical Resource Configuration Menu for the card you are configuring Module Number The module number is the Series 6 server module in which the digital trunk interface card is installed A four module Series 6 Model 640 server can support a total capacity of 240 PCM voice channels over 16 t
184. cards will be a mix of DSP24 or DSP8 line cards used in conjunction with a Dual JT Trunk Interface card and LC8 line cards used in conjunction with the analog trunks Clock Synchronization The T clock can be synchronized either to a clock recovered from the network RxD signal of one of the incoming trunks or to an internal clock reference free running master clock source on the Dual T1 card Both T1 carrier interfaces on the Dual T1 card recover a 1 544 Mb sec clock and 8 kHz frame clock from the network T1 received signal Rx These recovered frame signals go to the on card clock source for use to synchronize the MYIP clock and frame clock to the T RxD from the network An MVIP master clock is the actual source of the clock signals used by all cards common to the MVIP bus Only one master for each MVIP bus and only one active 8 kHz frame reference are allowed The T1 clock default source is the MVIP master on digital trunk interface card number 0 derived from the trunk 0 T1 Rx signal that is the only digital trunk interface card present in the Model 70 and Model 1201 Trunk numbering is O through 3 starting with 0 on the first trunk card Through the configuration manager the reference source to the master clock is selected offline Sources include a free running oscillator on the digital trunk interface card and the network Rx signals that is from trunk O and trunk 1 When connected either to a PBX or to a CO the netw
185. cator To extinguish the Message Leave button the user must push the button until ITIVMS shows in the display then hold the pound key until the phone beeps Standard POTS phones receive a stuttered dial tone and ora light as a message waiting indicator The VoiceMemo system can turn these indicators on and off through the switch It is possible to connect two Omni switches to a single VoiceMemo system Call and Centigram for assistance use of Receptionist Il The Omni PBX allows the optional Receptionist II application to perform supervised transfers The switch can recognize a switch hook flash on the tie trunks and return dial tone The AIP VoiceMemo system then dials the desired DN and monitors the call The Receptionist II application can also perform blind unsupervised transfers If the Receptionist II application is operating in supervised mode and extends a call that is forwarded back to the VoiceMemo system the switch prevents the forwarding and will return busy to the Receptionist II port Omni See the Receptionist 7 manual for more information about programming for Receptionist II VoiceMemo Template Specifications The Omni templates have a default inter digit timeout of four seconds and are set to hangup on an error condition Without actually editing the templates you can change the inter digit timeout and the error action by using the Omni Edit Parameters Menu The Enhanced In band Integration o
186. cccssssssssssssssssssesssssseecsssseessssseesssssseesssseses CP 626 1 Install Consoley a a aea a A an aaa CP 62 16 Tasta Moden 3 4 sveceet evsstesecienlevcibesce teenscusenscnseenaudistnaneeteanteteseniectbaetetiees CP 6270 Install Printer sasani n iia ai ee en iene DN eel bt s CP 6215 Install Redundant Hard Disk oe eeesessseeseescseecceseeeceeaceeseseseeeeeeeeees CP 6284 Run a System Information Report cceessessesseesecseseeceeeecenecneeneeneeatensees CP 1340 Run Verify With System Online o ccc ccscessssssessssssessssssessesssessssssessesseeeee CP 7001 Test Basic Telephony Functions vssssssssssessssssssssssssssnsssasesesse CP 6201 Note Procedures for building the customer database are in the VoiceMema Reference and Configuration Manual For additional information refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the System Implementation Guide For detailed information about optional features refer to the respective optional feature manual Updates to procedures and the Model 70 are issued to the field in Centigram s Notices to Installers You should add them to this guide as appropriate Step ce 1340 Page 1 of 2 Run a System Information Report VoiceMemo Release 6 04 and later This procedure describes how to run a System Information Report The System Information report shows all the levels of software previously loaded in the server the type of floppy disk drive installed the hard disk seria
187. ce 1 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Venu Map 8 2 Shut down the disk Select S Shutdown SCSI BUS or disk Prompt SCSI Shutdown Menu Select D Shutdown a SCSI disk Prompt Input a disk in the following range nn na on Which Disk Response Enter the two digit SCSI ID of the disk to be shut down Prompt type disable to confirm your request Response disable 3 Verify the desired disk has been shut down Prompt SCSI Shutdown Menu Response X Select D Display Status of all SCSI Buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing status of all disks Verify the disk is listed as DIS disabled Press Enter to exit the report and X to exit the menu Doc Rev A ce 019 Page 1 of 1 Enable a Hard Disk VoiceMemo Release 6 04 and later The procedure describes how to enable a disk This process requires the server to contain redundant disks The Update Redundancy procedure described in CP 70 15 must be run before the disk is available for the server to use FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to or one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter
188. ce VGS VoiceMemo FaxMemo OneView PROSE 2000 Version 1 01992 Centigram Communications Corporation All other brand and product names are claimed or registered marks of their respective companies NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Corporation MITEL The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes Table of Contents 1 Enhanced In band Integration OVEIVIEW arise ope ker ia KETEKAN eA EEE A R E 1 1 How the Integration Works cccccccccccececee ences eeeee ee eaeaeaeeaeeeeseseeseseeeeennens 1 2 Template SUCUT i 0 ester e esse uaddac tees ota ah Aa aa ides wage EAA EEG tz earned 14 DD ata isd ssideenatd baad nists nde Nites EEE EREE 1 4 ACHIOM ate eea ara a cA deh eaneae 1 5 Error Action 1 5 Time out 1 5 Next Templates i men t ne oak eee eee EE A ET EENE DE ee sae EEE EEE ES 1 5 100111123 1 AOON EA ENAT AEREA 1 6 Example Templates 1 6 Template Execution seesseessreesseeesseresrererresseessserssreessreesrreereesseeesseresseresseenn l 7 Template R les adocicado edsesnguane near oromons 1 9 Deriving Mailbox
189. ce Manual lI Hold the card by the top edge or upper corners and firmly press into the connector on the motherboard Line cards can be installed in slots O 5 The server can only support a maximum of 6 line cards 12 Align the rounded notch in the retaining bracket with the hole in the slot frame 13 Insert a 6 32 hex head Phillips screw but push the notch against the screw before tightening Otherwise the bracket might interfere with the bracket of an adjacent slot or with another line card 14 Connect cables to the installed line card 15 Check the quality of your work and to see that no tools or loose parts are inside the server 16 Install the server cabinet CP 6224 17 Reconnect all cables to the server Remove the identification tags from the cables Doc Rev A ce 6221 i Page 1 of 5 Remove Install Hard Disk VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure first describes how to remove and then how to install the hard disk in the Centigram Series 6 Model 70 It also describes how to remove and reinstall the disk carrier The drive carrier houses both the hard disk and the floppy disk drive DANGER Disconnect the system from its power source before connecting cables components or both CAUTION Protect your system from ESD damage during handling of all components Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference C Obs
190. ceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to update the software on a Model 120 or Model 70 It applies only to Release 6 0 and above To update software the server must be shut down and disabled using the procedure described in C1 6268 FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter J or a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks Step Reference Insert the Floppy Boot Diskette Press the Reset button or turn on the power to the system The system boots from the floppy drive The server displays the self test results 2 The server reads from the floppy disk then requests the service diskette Prompt Insert floppy SERVICE 6 00 and hit return Response n ert the diskette then press Enter 3 The server reads from the floppy disk and asks which process you want to execute Prompt Enter one of the names Response update Doc Rev A CP 6263 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later step 4 The server reads from the floppy disk and issues a warning about the pending process Prompt WARNING x
191. ceMemo application About This Manual What If Information Is Missing If the information you need is not yet available in the documents listed above go to these documents Release Notes for VoiceMemo Software Release 6 OA e Other existing documents as applicable How Do I Obtain the Documents Need To obtain other Centigram documents contact your local Centigram distributor Conventions Used in This Manual The procedures in this manual use the following conventions to describe how you enter configuration information and how information is displayed on the Series 6 server console Press Enter Press the Enter key For example Press Enter if the current number is correct On some keyboards this key is labeled Return or has a return arrow J on it Enter Type the text shown then press the Enter key For example Enter the line number 1 24 means type a number from 1 through 24 and then press the Enter key bold Words or characters in bold type indicate either a value to be entered by you exactly as shown or when used to indicate a variable entry describe the type of value to be supplied by you See example above What you select from a displayed menu e for information Select G Current Group Prompt Enter a group number A displayed prompt Response Number of the line group l 24 to be used for the application What you enter in response to the prompt Note Unless othe
192. chover is hitless that is the clock reference can be manually or automatically switched over to a second source without affecting traffic For digital trunk connectivity implementations where both trunks terminate in a single Dual El Trunk Interface card the Series 6 server provides automatic clock source switchover in the event of trunk failure On detecting a failure of the trunk from which the clock source is derived the Dual Trunk Interface card automatically switches over to the second digital trunk if the trunk in operation on the card Because clock references are independent for each Series 6 server module the Series 6 server can connect to different COs a CO PBX combination or different PBXs These different connections however must go to different Series 6 server modules and must be the primary clock reference within their respective modules 1 5 El Digital Trunk Connectivity El Digital Carrier Events The Dual El digital trunk interface card detects failures on the trunk receive data RxD When failures persists for more than 200 milliseconds the carrier alarm function automatically generates a remote alarm to the far end in accordance with CCITT Recommendations G 732 and G 733 For such failures the carrier alarm function informs the signaling function that circuits on a failed digital trunk are unavailable and in process calls are terminated Only after a trunk is restored for 400 milliseconds are the circuits
193. cs CP 3 153 port capacity 1 8 2 14 ports maximum El channels 1 3 procedures documentation conventions for ix R remote alarms El 1 6 T1 2 10 remote carrier alarm El 1 6 T1 2 10 S shortcut commands xii signaling CAS 2 4 El and SS7 1 9 on trunk channels CP 3 150 robbed bit 2 4 slot assignments Model 120 1 8 2 14 Model 640 1 8 2 14 Model 70 1 8 2 14 ss7 connection 1 3 ISUP 1 4 statistics digital trunk statistics CP 3 153 system clock El 1 3 network clock reference 1 10 2 16 reference 10 2 16 Index T timeouts avoiding xii trunk configuration El 1 7 T1 2 13 trunk failures alarms 1 6 2 10 trunk monitor display CP 3 153 trunk number CP 3 150 W warnings documentation conventions for x Z ZCS 2 6 zero code suppression 2 6 Index 3 Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions PMS Integration Manual TM Trademark of Mitel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mitel Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada Table of Contents OVE RVIOW 2 ts ct A E ee eran a Mgt eee Uda OE eta intern Installation All Integrations ccc ccc ce ecu ee 9 Configuration of EECO and HIS Integrations eee 5 EECO Trouble Shooting Guide cee eee 9 1 0 Implementation 0 auaa anaana aranana naaa 9 2 S e Ee E E E N A E 9 3 0 Physical Characteristics unuau aaea eeann 10 4 0 Diagnostic Information eee eee eee 10 HIS
194. ct A Maximum wait for a digit 1 10 seconds Prompt Timeout Response The number 10ths of a second that the system should wait between incoming digits before determining that an error has Doc Rev A DP 7011 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 8 Change the default error action Select B Error Action if digits missing Prompt Error Action Response 1 to cause the system to hang up 2 to play a general greeting 9 Exit to the Enhanced In band Menu Select X Exit D Modify Templates 10 Reach the In band Edit Template Menu Menu Map 12 11 Select a template to edit Select A Current Template Prompt Current Template Response The number of the template to edit 12 Enter the switch data to match Select B Data Prompt Data Response Characters that describe the in band signaling that this template is to match Table 1 at the end of this procedure lists all valid characters 13 Enter the action to perform when the data is received Select C Action Prompt Action Response Characters that describe the action to perform when this template matches the data entirely Table 2 at the end of this procedure lists all valid action characters 14 Enter the next templates if any to compare against incoming data Select F Next Templates Prompt Next Templates Response The numbers of the template to match against further incoming data 15 Ente
195. ct B Data Prompt Data Response Q3 dx 3 1 Enter the action to perform when the data is matched The V2 prompt is appropriate in this situation Select C Action Prompt Action Response V2 32 Enter the time out value For this template the time out value is 1 second Select D Timeout Prompt Timeout Response 10 tenths of a second 33 Enter the error action to perform if the template fails As in the templates above the only error action is to hang up Sekct E Error Action Prompt Error Action Response H Check Your Work and Save the Application 34 Exit the Edit Template Menu Select X Exit a Doc Rev A DP 7501 Page 6 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 andl ater Reference Step Bo oo o oo 35 Compare your templates with your worksheet to verify your work Select 0 Show Application Response The system scrolls all of the templates in the application onto the console screen If any of the information does not match your worksheet select the template and make the necessary changes 36 Backup save the application Select H Backup Application Release 5 03 systems or S Save Application Release 5 04 systems Prompt Do you want to overwrite existing copy Response Y Prompt Application backed up 37 Press X to return to the Online configuration menu 38 Press X again to save your changes and exit Doc Rev A Appendix A Fujitsu Starlog Enhanced
196. ct only after you activate the configuration 3 Go to the Line Groups Menu Enter the requested information as described in the Menu Map 2 following steps from your completed worksheet 4 Specify the line group number Select G Current Group Prompt Enter a group number Response Number of the line group l 24 to be used for the application 5 Name the line group Select N Name of current group Prompt Enter group name Response Descriptive name of the application line group Doc Rev A DP 6028 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 6 Add the desired lines Select A Add Lines to Current Group Prompt Enter lines to add Response In a single module system the line card number O 1 5 and port designator A or B to add to the line group Any of the formats shown in the following examples are valid Example Specifies All lines 0 15 All lines f o2 Lines OA OB 1A 1B 2A and 2B l 1B 4 Lines 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A and 4B 1A 2A 4A Lines 1A 2A and 4A 2 Lines 2A and 2B In a multi module system the module number 1 4 line card number O 1 5 and port designator A or B to add to the line group Any of the formats shown in the following examples are valid Example Specifies 2 All lines in module 2 2 0 2 Lines OA OB 1A 1B 2A and 2B in module 2 2 1B 4 Lines 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A and 4B in module 2 1 2 All lines in modules and 2 7 Drop any lin
197. cted to a single VoiceMemo system For example an Omni switch with two tenant groups where one has a three digit dial plan and the other has a four digit dial plan A single switch with only one protocol but different VoiceMemo applications For example calls to different 800 numbers could reach different line groups and hear different greetings How the Integration Works 1 2 The Enhanced In band Integration software uses pattern matching to recognize the call information sent from the switch It compares the DTMF or MF tones with templates of patterns that define the various call types Each template defines the following The data expected from the switch The action to be performed after receiving the data The maximum time between digits The action to be performed if an error is encountered Enhanced In band Integration The templates provide the flexibility needed to integrate with different kinds of PBX and CO switches Generally each switch integration contains one template for each call type and one to answer the incoming call If a specific switch has three call types Ring No Answer Busy Direct Call the integration has a total of four templates When the switch routes a call to the VoiceMemo system it constructs an information packet made of DTMF or MF tones to describe the call The switch makes a telephone connection to the VoiceMemo system and plays the tones into the VoiceMemo line card The EIB software decodes
198. ctive but the task hissnd can not be found by name Each time data is received over the data link from the PMS system hisrcv retries to locate hissnd If it is again unsuccessful this message is again logged At this point the PMS system sees the link as down When hissnd successfully restarts and attaches it s name hisrcv and hisrnwi can locate it and link communication will proceed as expected HISRCV Unable to locate hissnd data lost Internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hisrcv needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name The data is lost and hisrev continues to run looking for further link data The PMS system is probably not getting any data from hissnd and so it will consider the link down When hissnd successfully restarts and attaches it s name hisrcv and hismwi can locate it and link communication will proceed as expected HISRCV Unable to send to hissnd data lost internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hisrcv needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name The data is lost and hjsrey continues to run looking for further link data The PMS system is probably not getting any data from hissnd and so it will consider the link down When hissnd successfully restarts and attaches it s name hisrcv and hismwi can locate it and link communica
199. ctively receiving a message from the PMS system when a got send MWI command is delivered The message can not be directly sent out over the link and is saved until the link becomes idle Once idle the MW status command is sent out and the entry is removed from the saved message state At most one MW update cay be held at any one time This is because the mwla is not replied to until the MW status message is sent out weather it was temporarily held on an active ink state or not hissnd Add to bad mailbox queue Normal operation This data is logged when hissnd is actively sending or hisrcv is actively receiving a message from the PMS system when a got send bad tpailbox is delivered The message can not be directly sent out over the link and is saved until the link becomes idle Once idle the MW status command is sent out and the entry is removed from the saved message state The entries are queued up and sent out in order as the link idle state permits if the queue is full any new bad mailbox messages are lost hissnd Send ACK Normal operation This data is logged immediately after one character is transmitted over the R 232C serial link The character sent is an lt ACK gt hex 06 hissnd Send NAK Normal operation This data is logged immediately after one character is transmitted over the RS232C serial link The character sent is a lt NAK gt hex 15 hissnd Send ENQ Normal operation This data is logged immed
200. d Call Template 24 Enter the next template to edit Select A Current Template Prompt Current Template Response 4 25 Enter the data field to match This template handles internal forwarded calls The call type identifier is 02 followed by the variable length calling extension sx and the variable length called extension dx each terminated with a Ka symbol Select B Data Prompt Data Response 02 sx dx 26 Enter the action to be performed when the data is matched The Forward All greeting is appropriate for forwarded calls in which the reason busy no answer is not identified Select C Action Prompt Action Response V2 27 Enter the time out value for the template The value for this template is 1 second Select D Timeout Prompt Timeout Response 10 tenths of a second Doc Rev A DP 7501 Page 5 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 28 Enter the error action to perform The error action for this template is to hang up Select E Error Action Prompt Error Action Response H CD Define the External Forward Call Template 29 Select the next template to edit Select A Current Template s Prompt Current template Response 5 30 Enter the data to match This template handles external forwarded calls The call type identifier is 03 followed by the variable length destination extension dx and a symbol Sele
201. d Disk program from the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes go to step 15 Doc Rev A Cl 6282 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference D Run the Add Disk Program From the Hardware Configuration Menu 10 Turn on the power to the system and boot from the hard disk 1 1 Reach the VoiceMemo Hardware Configuration Menu then to go the Disk Aenu Map 12 Configuration Menu 12 Add the disk Select A Add a single disk Prompt Please insert service diskette into floppy drive hit lt RETURN gt when ready Response Insert the Service Diskette and press Enter Prompt Specify one of the following bus diskId pairs nen n n Which disk Response Where n represents the valid disk IDs Enter the two digit disk ID ee we a a a a i a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ee erence Prompt Speech Accounts Software Prompts Messages Mailboxes etc Configuration 1 Yes Yes XX Hours XXXX Account Records Configuration 2 No No XX Hours XXXX Account Records eee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee Re ee Ee eee eee Please select the desired CONFIGURATION TYPE for disk n n 1 or 2 Response Enter the desired configuration type 13 Add the redundant disks if the server is to contain any Z P 8281 14 Increase the system hours ZP 7021 Ch 3 This completes the Add Disk program from the Hardware Configuration Menu CP Run the Add Disk Program From the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes 15
202. d In band Integration option works with incoming calls it does not provide a means to activate message waiting indicators Either the DTMF to PBX or the RS 232 Message Waiting application can perform this function Both message waiting methods are included with the base software see the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details Loading a Template Set All application template sets are copied onto the hard disk when you load the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette You then must select and install a specific application template set to activate the integration Modifying a Template You can modify an existing EIB integration application by editing the templates You can save a modified application with its original name or a new name Using the original name to save the file overwrites the original template You cannot overwrite applications that are provided by Centigram you must save any changes under a different application name If you do not save your changes and then later make additional changes or install a different template set you cannot go back to the unsaved version Creating a Template If there is no template set for your switch you can create a set using the administrative menus You create an integration template or set of templates by editing templates in the online menu the same procedure as modifying a template There is a worksheet at the end of this manual to help you design
203. d to config 0 OFFLINEMENU A L M E 1 T D P F G N 0 S U Y C B Q X NOTE To re display any menu in its expanded form press Enter key carriage return at the abbreviated menu prompt 3 Enter G to select Define Line Groups and Fax Groups The system displays the Line Groups menu Line Groups G Current Group 1 N Name of current group w S Show ALL groups T Show THIS group U Show Unassigned lines A Add lines to current group D Drop lines from current group F Define Fax groups C Fax group connections for current line group X Exit Enter G to select Current Group The system prompts for a line group number The 1 indicates group 1 is selected by default Enter the number for the line group you want to configure This example uses 3 Enter a Group number 1 3 The system responds as follows Group 3 has no lines assigned GROUP G N S T U A D F C X Enter N to select Enter group name Enter the name you choose for this group This example uses Enhanced in band Enter group name w Enhanced n band GROUP G N S T U A D F C X Enter A to add lines to this group Lines are added by entering their triplet identifiers Module Slot Circuit Enter a at the prompt for detailed command help Enterlinestoadd 1 3 0 1 3 1 GROUP G N S T U A D F C X Enter T to Show This group Confirm the lines you added appear Group 3 Enhanced In band Module 1 Lines 3
204. d try to turn on power to the server 5 If the server boots after a specific FRU has been replaced return the defective FRU for repair Replacing FRUs Support Plans The distributor must choose one of two support options Self sufficient 1 Centigram Service Partner Self Sufficient Distributors who elect the self sufficient option will handle installation and service issues with their own Centigram Certified Technician CCT These distributors must have a technical support group to field questions from their technicians b Centigram Service Partner Distributors who elect the Centigram Service Partner option will choose a third party that has CCTs who have completed the Model 70 installation and service training to handle all of their installation and service activities The Centigram Service Partner should have a technical support group for its technicians If the distributor selects this option distributor technicians should not work with the Model 70 Please check with your regional office to determine which plan has been selected and your individual responsibilities for installation and service Replacing FRUs Before You Start 4 4 Note WARNING When the server is turned on or while the Model 70 cover is removed do not attempt to remove or replace any components or peripherals Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present in this product CAUTION ry Electrostatic di
205. dable Only numeric room numbers are supported at this time Note at this time the Room number is assumed to be the mailbox number and as such needs to conform to the dial plan Eventually the ability to translate alphanumeric room numbers to mailbox numbers will be added End of record character 25 Page 9 3 0 40 6 These packets can be no longer than 80 characters including the start and end of record characters When there is no more data to send to VoiceMemo the interface sends the single ASCII character 40 Upon receiving the packet from the PMS VoiceMemo will then process the information If the packet is good all check in check out procedures are carried out and VoiceMemo requests the next packet ii any by sending an M followed by an ETN 03 If the packet is bad VoiceMemo re requests it by sending an L followed by an ETX 03 If the PMS sent the empty reply VoiceMemo will go back to sleep for sixty seconds without responding to the PMS Note The PMS must first echo the L or M before sending any other information to VoiceMemo f When the PMS receives either the L ETX or M ETN requests from VoiceMemo it has six seconds to respond VoiceMemo will try either of these requests up to three times before giving up and sleeping for sixty seconds before starting at 1 again Physical Characteristics RS 232 compatible signal 1200 baud 1 start bit 1 stop bit
206. dant Disk program from the Hardware Configuration Menu go to step 10 If you are running the Add A Redundant Disk program from the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes go to step 14 Doc Rev A Cl 6281 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step Run the Make Redundant Program From the Hardware Configuration Menu 10 Turn on the power to the system and boot from the hard disk 11 Reach the VoiceMemo Hardware Configuration Menu then to go the Disk Venu Map 12 Configuration Menu 12 Add the redundant disk 3 Select M Make a Disk Redundant Prompt Please insert service diskette3 into floppy drive hit lt RETURN gt when ready Response Insert the Service Diskette and press Enter Prompt Active Disk Specify one of the following bus disk d pairs nin nin Which disk Response Where n represents the valid disk IDs Enter the disk ID of the primary disk that the new redundant disk is attached to Prompt Redundant Disk Specify one of the following bus diskId_ pairs nin nin Which disk Response Where n represents the valid disk JDs Enter the disk ID of the redundant mirror image disk 13 Update redundancy of all out of sync disks P 7015 This completes the Add A Redundant Disk program from the Hardware Configuration Menu CD Run the Make Redundant Program From the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes 14 Insert the Floppy Boot Diskette Turn on the system p
207. dant mbox 6669 Wait Prompt Y Caller multiple messages enabled Y KEY O for attendant transfer during greeting y Disconnect string Pre company name string J Pre mailbox greeting string J Passcode Length Min 4 Max 10 Language E Start of day 08 00 AM End of day 05 00 PM Days of Week DDDDDNN Passcode trip count 5 Passcode trip period 24 Dial by name Last First Y Match Threshold 3 Exact Y Suppress Number N Single Digit Access y Delay Before Answer 80 For Screened calls only E mail Transfer String Allow Dial an Extension for callers y users y Analog Networking Call Setup timeout 6 International Access Code Country code J Area City code j 1 plus dialing Area City code is dialed with Local Telephone Number N Telephone number f Loop back Test Mailbox J Receptionist Enabled Y Pre DN S Post DN H Connect Serial S lind Transfer Return S ll Return call reject S 11 Reorder Action Se PBX dial plan 4444444 a Call Hold Offsets 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Retrieve Deleted digits 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Time out for receipt of first DTMF digit 1 seconds 0 Greet Name G PBX console operation N Day operator OH Night operator 2215H Attendant extension 2202H Attendant s extension 2202H NAME Mitel X 2000 DESCRIPTION Mitel Enhanced In
208. dependent Protocol MVIP 1 10 N naming configuration CP 7004 Network Class of Service NCOS 17 0 offline running diagnose CP 7030 updating software CP 6263 offline replace disk CP 6592 offline software update Cl 6483 OneView 15 online running diagnose CP 7029 optional special application mailboxes Fax Publishing 1 1 9 Fax Store and Forward 1 19 Guaranteed Fax J 19 MESA Forms 1 19 optional system features See also mailbox user features AMIS Analog 1 15 Index Automated Dispatch l 16 Call Detail Recorder CDR 1 1 6 Direct Data Link 1 16 Electronic Set Emulation 1 16 Foreign Language Prompts 1 1 6 Functional System Partition Administration FSPA 1 15 installing CP 5402 MESA Net 1 16 OneView 1 15 Video Dispatch 1 16 Outdial Notification 1 13 outside caller features 1 14 P parameters disk CP 53 13 passcode console CP 5303 phoneline exceptions setting CP 7022 a physical specifications 1 4 power cord 2 3 power supply setting 2 3 printer installing CP 6215 procedures documentation conventions for xi programs add disk Cl 6282 diagnose CP 7031 CP 7030 CP 7029 make redundant CP 628 1 system reload CP 6267 system restore CP 5704 prompts updating CP 6262 Public Telecommunications Network Connection A l Q quality check CP 6258 R Receptionist II 1 14 redundant hard disk installing CP 6284 replacing CP 6283 reloading system CP
209. dition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started and it is not able to set the desired TTY options of the serial port This includes baud rate parity data and stop bit settings hissnd Unable to SET device attributes for RS232 port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started and it is not able to set the desired device attributes for the serial port This includes disabling break X on X off escape and other features hisrcv HISRCV Checked in mailbox x Normal operation This data is logged when the PMS system sends valid data to change the configuration of mailbox x The changes to the mailbox are configured for FCOS The changes to the mailbox are complete HISRCV Checked out mailbox x Normaloperation This data is logged when the PMS system sends valid data to change the configuration of mailbox x The changes to the mailbox are FCOS password name recording greeting 1 and messages The changes to the mailbox are complete HISRCV Swapped mailbox x with y Normal operation This data is logged when the PMS system sends valid move mailbox data to move source mailbox x to destination mailbox y Destination mailbox y is also swapped to source mailbox x The fiel
210. ds changes and deletes by telephone create master or system distribution lists and record the company or system greeting a The Attendant mailbox is also included in the preconfigured software installation This mailbox contains the message of the day greeting and a customized user tutorial It is also the mailbox that receives all unaddressed messages where neither an extension number nor a user name is entered by the caller Broadcast mailboxes allow both users and outside callers to record and send a single message to multiple mailboxes Voice and fax messages can be sent via the Broadcast mailbox Distribution lists are configured by either the system administrator or the user Each broadcast mailbox can send messages to up to 65 535 members Chain mailboxes allow callers to enter either the desired extension number or the name of the mailbox owner or mailbox number Once the information has been entered callers are transferred to the appropriate mailbox or extension Greeting Only mailboxes are used to provide information to callers but do not allow callers to leave a message There are three types of greeting only mailboxes voice greeting fax greeting or voice and fax greeting A Guest mailbox is assigned on a temporary basis It does not require an owner name or passcode for access This mailbox cannot save messages Rotational Tree Product Description Rotational mailboxes allow constantly changing greeting
211. ds that are swapped are FCOS password text message count all four mailbox greetings name recording and all messages and message data NOTE because all message data is swapped if messages in the mailbox are from other mailbox users as apposed to outside callers the source of the message may play as the wrong user name This will happen if mailbox 100 sends a user message to mailbox 200 and then swaps to 101 At this time the name recording for room 101 is now in 100 and so if user 200 listens to the source of the message it will say the name now associated with 100 the old 101 the wrong name recording This is not a problem when a message is left by an outside caller or with integrations that do not supply the calling number HISRCV Modified FCOS f MBOX x Normal operation This data is logged when the PMS system sends valid modify FCOS data packet The FCOS number of the mailbox is updated to the requested value HISRCV Text update COUNT c MBOX x Normal operation This data is logged when the PMS system sends valid text message data packet The text message count of the mailbox is updated to the requested value HISRCV Received a BAD MAILBOX x Mailbox undefined in database This data is logged if the PMS system sends any message packet that includes an undefined source mailbox number It is invalid because the mailbox passed could not be found in the VoiceMemo database This message is discarded
212. dule always enter 1 or a This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks WARNING This procedure requires that you shut down the server resulting in an interruption to call processing Centigram recommends that you nerform this procedure durine periods of low call traffic Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu Venu Map 2 Execute a system shutdown Select S System Shutdown Prompt WARNING This will terminate call processing Type shutdown if you really want to do this Response shutdown 3 Specify all modules are to be shut down Prompt modules to shutdown Response Enter the a for all modules The server displays the status of each line of the specified modules as idle active or stopped and updates the status every minute until all lines are stopped The server stops any calls still in progress after five minutes 4 If you are executing a system shutdown wait for the message waiting queue to clear If you are executing a module shutdown on a multi module system do not wait for the message waiting queue to clear Prompt Wait for message waiting queues to be empty Response Y to wait for the queue to clear N to continue immediately with the shutdown Dac WA CP 6262 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step 5 Decide if you want to wait for paging queues to clear Prompt Wait for paging qu
213. e The VoiceMemo system waits to receive data from the switch and then compares that data with the first template s Data field to determine if a match exists Ifa match exists it compares the next data item to the next entry in the field This process continues until the VoiceMemo system receives either all the data required by the template unexpected data or a lapse in data a time out When the data completely matches the Data field of a template the system carries out the action defined in the Action field If the template does not play a prompt as its action the VoiceMemo system compares the remaining incoming data with the template s listed in the Next Templates field The system compares all templates listed in the Next Templates field in parallel It drops templates from the matching process as it receives non matching data and it performs the action in the first completely matching template Enhanced In band Integration If none of the templates match the VoiceMemo system performs the error action of the last surviving template If the VoiceMemo system receives unexpected data or a lapse in data time out it carries out the action specified in the Error Action field Template execution is complete when the system performs an error action or plays a prompt or all templates have been executed Figure 1 5 uses the AT amp T System 25 integration to show how the EIB software matches the incoming data with the template
214. e Prompt Insert the SERVICE diskette then press lt Enter gt to continue Response Insert the Service diskette and press Enter 3 Enter the new password Prompt Enter new password Response The new Root or Superuser password up to 253 alphanumeric characters Prompt Re enter new password Response Repeat the new root or Superuser password The following message appears Password changed 4 The server then automatically starts the console Doc Rev A ce 5304 Page 1 of View or Edit History File VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later The History File is a record of modifications made to the server Entries are made to the record by the system administrator your distributor or Centigram technical personnel You must review this record prior to updating software on the server to verify that no custom changes have been made to the server that are over written with the new software This procedure describes how to view or edit the History File Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then from the Additional Options Menu go Menu Map 12 to the Utility Menu then to the History Menu Show the History File 2 Review the History File Select _ S Show file Prompt Enter record number or a for all non empty records Response Number of a specific record to review or A for all non empty records The server displays the file to the console Use the following commands to control
215. e This server can accommodate up to seven analog or digital adapter cards with a maximum of 30 ports 24 ports analog 30 ports digital and up to two 500 MB IDE drives for a maximum redundant speech storage capacity of 55 hours Figure 1 1 shows the Model 70 block diagram Telephony Computing Network MVIP Bus ISA Bus pesi Network interfaces Interfaces DSP Service Circuits Figure l 1 Model 70 Block Diagram l 1 Product Description 1 2 As the block diagram shows the Model 70 is a PC like server containing a CPU serial port floppy disk mass storage and ISA expansion slots Three types of ISA adapter cards can be inserted into the expansion slots telephony interface cards analog and digital interface cards telephony service cards Fax and computer interface cards Serial Ethernet The telephony interface cards and the telephony service cards can also be linked to the MVIP bus which is a special ribbon cable linking the adapter cards together and allowing them to share resources There are two general categories of mailboxes that are available in the servers at installation standard user owner mailboxes and special applications mailboxes All mailboxes can be passcode protected Classes of service are assigned to each mailbox The Features Class of Service FCOS Limits Class of Service LCOS and Group Class of Service GCOS determine what a mailbox owner s options are and how the mailboxes function
216. e Technical Assistance Center at 408 428 3558 of the situation Dog Rev A CP 6263 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 6 If an old format of billing data is found on the server the following message is displayed Prompt Old format of billing report data found This data must be deleted before proceeding with the software update To run any billing reports from the last gather reboot the system now Proceeding from here will NOT result in any lost billing data provided you have already run all needed reports from the last gather Note Future updates will not require report files to be deleted To proceed with the update enter y to delete report data To proceed please enter a Y OR TO ABORT REBOOT THE SYSTEM Response Y 7 The server continues then requests the first software diskette The first two lines of the following prompt are seen only if the server located billing information Prompt Deleting 4 bill_data Deleting 4 prev_data When drive light goes out insert disk 1 and press return Response Insert the specified diskette then press Enter 8 The server requests the remaining diskettes Each diskette takes approximately 5 minutes Prompt When drive light goes out insert disk 2 and press return Response Insert the specified diskette then press Enter 9 After all software disks have been loaded load the prompts Prompt WARNING ALL prompts will b
217. e cleared from aplicable partition s If you want to clear the prompts type clear If you want to do nothing and continue hit lt CR gt Response clear if new prompts are to be loaded Press Enter to skip this process and continue at step 2 10 The server clears all prompts on the server then requests the first diskette Prompt Clearing all prompts A31 prompt speech cleared Insert Prompt Diskette in the floppy drive Enter Y when ready or N to quit Response Insert Prompts Diskette Number 1 then Y to continue Doc Rev A CP 6263 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 11 The prompts are copied to multiple hard disks as applicable The process can take many minutes depending on the number of disks The server then requests the remaining diskettes Prompt Verifying diskette Insert Prompt Diskette 2 in floppy drive Enter Y when ready or N to quit Response Insert the specified diskette and Y to continue 12 When the prompts are complete the server displays the number of speech blocks that have been used for the server prompts a Prompt XXXX speech blocks allocated out of 4000 available Press lt CR gt to continue Response Press Enter 13 The server has an option for additional prompts to be loaded Prompt Do you want to add prompts to the system Response Y to add additional prompts to the existing set follow the instructions supplied similar to Steps
218. e configured or the System Message if it was configured Leave messages for the mailbox Result The mailbox s pager should receive a page and continue receiving pages at the configured interval until the cgnfigured page frequency has been exhausted or the message has been played or deleted The pager should display the Post pager digits if they were configured or the System Message if it was configured Leave a Cut through page If this Extra cost feature is installed on the system Result The mailbox s pager should receive a page and continue receiving pages at the configured interval until the configured page frequency has been exhausted or page notification has been played or deleted The pager should display the Cut Through page digits Leave a message in a mailbox with post pager digits configured Result The mailbox s pager should receive a page and continue receiving pages at the configured interval until the configured page frequency has been exhausted or the message has been played or deleted The pager should display the Post pager digits that were configured in the mailbox Leave a message in a mailbox with no post pager digits Result The mailbox s pager should receive a page and continue receiving pages at the configured interval until the configured page frequency has been exhausted or the message has been played or deleted The pager should display the System Message that was configured in the TNPP System Infor
219. e for each module that has phone ports assigned to an Enhanced In band line group Tips amp Techniques A good rule of thumb for determining the correct number of in band tasks for each module is to begin with a value of 20 of the number of ports assigned to the Enhanced In band line group If more than two rings occur before a greeting is played increase the number of tasks An exception is for integrations that use line exception 24 to provide immediate wink on E amp M trunks in these cases the number of tasks should equal the number of in band ports Interactions amp Limitations Each task uses more system memory to preserve system performance do not configure more tasks than necessary This parameter is only required for VoiceMemo Release 5 02 and 5 03 software Release 5 04 configures the number of tasks per module automatically See Also Host Number Save Application Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu Release 5 04 only What to Enter No entry required How It Works When you select to save an application the system will save a copy of the current template set on the hard disk You can later reload this application to put it into service or make more changes Tips amp Techniques Use an application name that is easy to remember Interactions amp Limitations If there is already an application with the same name on the hard disk the system will ask you if you want to overwrite the existing application You cannot ove
220. e mark inversion for El trunks AMI though available as an option is a less robust line coding technique than HDB3 and is not recommended Clock Synchronization The system master clock can be synchronized either to the network that is a selected El RxD signal or to a free running oscillator on the Dual El card The digital clock reference can be set to one of the following Internal reference e Network reference e Default reference 1 9 El Digital Trunk Connectivity The network reference is a selected El trunk In the case of a Series 6 Model 70 or Model 1201 the selected trunk will be trunk 0 In the case of Model 120S or Model 640 the selected trunk can be either 0 1 2 or 3 only one trunk can be selected The default reference is trunk 0 The Series 6 server features automatic switchover to a backup clock source if the primary fails However this feature functions only when both trunks of a Dual El card are used and the clock is synchronized to the RxD signal of one of them Then if the trunk to which the clock reference is derived the Series 6 server will automatically switch over to the second trunk on the Dual El card Note This clock source switchover feature does not work if digital trunk connectivity is split between two Dual T cards When configuring the system use the network clock as the system clock reference to prevent frame slips Figure 1 3 clock as the system clock reference E1 D
221. e menu driven pushbutton commands Auto Wakeup The server allows the mailbox user to schedule wakeup or reminder calls These calls can be scheduled for and made from the server any time any day and anywhere Each call can be directed to a specific telephone number and can occur multiple times at specified intervals Cut Through Paging Cut Through paging sends the actual call back number rather than the mailbox number to the mailbox user s pager FaxMemo The FaxMemo application includes Fax Mail Fax Broadcast Guaranteed Fax Fax Publishing and Walkaway Fax These applications allow users to send receive answer voice annotate and distribute fax messages It also provides automatic and or scheduled delivery via facsimile download to any fax machine The FaxMemo software is supplied with the Model 70 The FaxMemo card must be purchased separately for the feature to work Special Pager Terminal Protocol Paging Special pager terminal protocol paging customizes outdial notification to interact with pager systems TNPP protocol used by hospitals and other organizations with private or highly specialized pager networks Receptionist Il With this feature the server answers incoming phone calls and asks callers to enter the extension number or name of the party they wish to call Once the information has been entered the server transfers callers to the desired extension Outside Caller Features All outside caller fea
222. e on an Model 120 or Model 70 using the System Reload program This program should be used only on a non redundant server that has experienced a disk failure and only when you are instructed to use it Performing this procedure deletes the existing database of all speech accounts and configuration To update the server software and preserve the existing database of all speech accounts and configuration use the Perform an Offline Software Update procedure CP 6263 Note Make sure the Service Diskette all Optional Feature Diskettes and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial numbers for the disk in the server and the disk to be added The Model 1201 and Model 70 contain an IDE hard disk while the Model 120S contaians a SCSI hard disk SCSI disk references have been replaced in the software where feasible WARNING The System Reload program erases all information currently on the hard disk Run this program only if your technical support group instructs you to do so WARNING Be sure to shut down and disable the server using the process described in CP 6268 Step Reference 1 Insert the Floppy Boot Diskette Press the reset button or turn on the system power The system boots off the floppy drive The server displays the self test results 2 The server reads from the floppy disk then requests the service diskette Prompt Insert floppy SERVICE 6 00 and hit return Response Insert the diskette then press Ente
223. e options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu 1 Schedule Company Greetings 1 Enable Call Placement Message Delivery Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers 7 Exit and save your changes 8 Configure either RS 232 Message Waiting or DIMF to PBX Message Waiting See your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details 9 Cross connect phone lines from the MTX to the VoiceMemo phone ports 10 Connect the MTX and VoiceMemo system to same ground point DP 5402 DP 6028 IP 7006 DP 7010 DP 7016 Venu Map 13 DP 3021 Doc Rev A pp 3021 y ceM Page of 1 Mount VoiceMemo System VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Connect the Chassis Ground to the Rack This procedure describes how to connect the chassis ground of a telephone switch to the rack mount AIP VoiceMemo system DANGER g Make sure that all power to the system has been disconnected A prior to performing this procedure Failure to do so can cause injury Step Reference 1 Locate the grounding stud on the VoiceMemo cooling assembly a 2 For non central office applications connect a single strand of 12 gauge wire from the XQ ground point to the cooling assembly grounding screw Note
224. ed Offset 2 5 Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Comment Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter Comments to help the user s understanding of the application template Comments can be a maximum of 128 characters long Default Blank Current Template Data 2 6 Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter The number of the template that you wish to modify or create Default Template 1 How It Works This selects the template to edit in the integration application for example template 3 of 21 Each integration application can contain multiple templates Other Requirements The template format and definitions for actions and data must be known before this menu is used Interactions amp Limitations The VoiceMemo system only checks the syntax of the integration template for example the existence of comma separators not the content It is the user s responsibility to ensure the template integrity The Enhanced In band Integration application functions according to the template if the template is incorrect the template language has no way to detect that a problem exists Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter Valid in band events These are the DTMF ME and other events expected from the switch for example ring dial tone etc Table 2 2 contains a list of all valid entries for the Data field Error Action Enhanced In band Integ
225. ed in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Corporation MITEL The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes Page 2 Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION oeccssssscsssccsssessssescsssesssseccssucssvecessuscessscsssuccsssssssvecsssuccssuesssneccssucsssuecssuecessucsssucssssssssseeessuecsssecssseesene 3 1 2 2 INTENDED ZA UDIENCE 4 ioe eat tet eth ethan Diode AN Ad ste ce O Sica of Sad Seeiever sb yA 3 1 3 RELATED DOCUMENTS viaiia nisennaah a a aT hA ana aa a adaa 3 13 1 ObsOlete DoC E E R 3 2 NEW FUNCTIONALITY A 3 2 1 NO ONLINE INSTALLATION eec 3 3 INSTALLING NEW PROMPTS ovecssssssssssssssesssseccssscssssccsssscsssecssssecsssscssssecssucesssecssssccsssesssucsessucsssuesssiesessucssseeessseess 3 3 1 SUMMARY OF INSTALLATION woisssscscccsssssssssssecsssssessensnissssssersecsssssevsvssuisssssevvissssvviasany 0000 Mannie 3 9 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Sirain nana aa aaa a a a 4 UPDATING PROMPTS a n aA a aaa aS 6 4 1 SUMMARY OF UPDATE 01sec esii i iiio n ia ioiei 7 4 2 UPDATE NSTRUCTION S EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE 7 SURELATED ISS UES E E E EEE tah EE AEE EAE hvid 7 So
226. ed length source extension containing Data __ Action n digits 11 max Ps Fixed length destination extension Timeout _________ Error Action containing digits 11 max Next Templates Variable length source extension 11 max terminated by DTMF MF character z Comment Variable length destination extension 11 max terminated by DTMF MF character 7 Template _ Ignore digits Ignore all digits until the DTME MF digit n Data Action Timeout Error Action Valid Action and Error Action Field Entries Next Templates bouts Action Description Comment Dial DTMF digits 7 O 9 A D max 23 Hang up Template Go off hook Data Action Wink n 1 Os of a second l Wait n 1 0s of d Timeout Error Action a eit Play Login prompt passcode required Next Templates Play Login prompt passcode optional Comment Play Forward All greeting Play Ring No Answer greeting Template Play Busy Forward greeting i Play General greeting Receptionist II Data ____ Action or Message Center greeting Timeout Error Action Next Templates Comment ElBwksh 5 04 Index A action field description 1 5 2 2 use during template execution 1 7 valid entries 1 5 2 2 adding a phoneline exception DP 7022 administrative interface l 1 1 application backup 2 3 DP 7501 creating DP 7501 description 2 3 DP 750 1 install 2 9 list 2 9 name 2 3 DP 7501
227. el 70 Prompt type disable to confirm your request Response disable If enabling or disabling multiple modules repeat step 9 or step 10 as appropriate If the status of the module attached to the console was changed the balance of this procedure is not be seen due to the module resetting When done configuring the module exit the menu The system completes the shutdown Prompt SHUTDOWN COMPLETE The System Maintenance Menu is displayed even though the server is not operational 12 Reach the Reports Menu Menu Map 9 Doc Rev A CP 5701 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 13 Review the Verify Report Select V Verify Prompt Report destination Response c If any errors were recorded in the report contact the Technical Assistance Center 14 Exit to the Main Menu 15 Turn off the system power or press the reset button s to reboot Dog Rev A Do a Floppy Backup CP 5703 This procedure describes how to perform a floppy backup of the Series 6 server Page of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Reach the System Maintenance Menu Initiate the floppy backup Select F Floppy Backup Prompt Insert Backup Diskette 1 in floppy drive Enter Y when ready or N to quit Response Insert the diskette and enter Y to continue N to abort the backup process If the diskette has not been formatted in QNX format the diskette
228. em Integration Structure The AIP VoiceMemo system has two types of message waiting notification that you can use with the Omni PBX l DTMF to PBX Message Waiting Type 3 uses VoiceMemo line ports to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the PBX l Pager and Message Delivery Message Waiting Type 5 uses one or more VoiceMemo line ports to outdial to external paging systems or telephone numbers Hardware and Software Requirements The AIP VoiceMemo system software requirements are l Release 5 02 or later l Enhanced In band Integration optional feature The AIP system hardware requirements are One line card port for every incoming phone line B 2 Omni e One line card port for DTMF to PBX message wait control e Additional line card ports to place any outgoing calls paging fax etc The Omni software requirements are l Release 52 40 or later SI Release 82 40 or 85 10 or later SIM The Omni hardware requirements are One 1 2 wire E amp M trunk per VoiceMemo Receptionist port e One 1 2 wire E amp M trunk for message wait control Feature Interactions and limitations Omni FeaturePhones use the Message Leave feature for message waiting indication If the Message Leave feature is not programmed the Omni PBX provides stuttered dial tone The VoiceMemo system cannot extinguish the message waiting indicator automatically for FeaturePhones because the switch ignores requests to turn off the indi
229. em level option b d Call Forward No Answer means that the ICM rings several times and then the call goes to a VMI e A Norstar can support up to ten VMIs The Compact and Modular DR2 only allows blind call transfers from the VoiceMemo sysrem such as return to operator or to another extension The DR3 and DR4 both allow supervised transfers through the VMI modules Each VMI connects up to two ports and emulates to ATAs The emulation behaves like a 7100 phone one button with flash conference and transfer User telephones do not generate DTMF tones during a conference call Use of Receptionist Il Only the DR3 and DR4 allow supervised transfers through the VMIs For a Compact or Modular DR2 the switch recognizes a switch hook flash on the VMI line and the Receptionist II port dials the desired DN and goes on hook With supervised transfer on a DR3 or DR4 KSU a Receptionist II port can extend a call to an extension which is No Answer Forwarded back to the VoiceMemo ports The Receptionist II port waits for that call forward to occur recognizes by an answer tone that it has connected to a VoiceMemo port and disconnects For this forwarding and call recognition to work correctly you must Norstar Program the VoiceMemo system to recognize the extension numbers of the ports running the Receptionist II application DP 6034 l Program the VoiceMemo ports to dial a DTMF when the system identifies a call forwarded
230. enance Menu U L gt System Verify Menu M L gt Event Recorder Menu w u gt Network Menu Additional Options L gt Menu Terminal Type Menu ae Status Maintenance Meny gt Set Console Type Menu L H er I L gt Lights Test Menu Alarms Maintenance Menu Online Software Update Menu Time and Date Menu Utility Menu Time Zone R Configuration Menu System Configuration Menu RH VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Hardware Configuration Disk Configuration gt Menu H ee peice Ly lost Configuration Menu Offline Menu Console Serial Port Setup
231. eneseecessseeseseneeenes 2 14 Signaling vsssessecccsecsesecseessesecneeeseeesuescnseesseesstecnsecsneenseesseesutecnseeenseeaterseeenestey 2 15 Trunk Configuration 2 15 Trunk Sequence Number sssscccsecseessssssnseeceestecnesensecsteeseeesneenecs 2 15 Framing Format 2 15 Coding Format 2 16 Table of Contents Clock Synchronization sin arsimin a R E A Pete hears IGM ed 2 16 Digital Trunk Online Maintenance iii 2 17 Configuration Task List and Procedures Index list of Figures Table 2 1 SF arid ESF Signaling Bits ini 2 2 List of Tables Figure 1 1 T D4 Frame Map wecccsscsssssssssssssssssssesssssscssssessssssessesssssseessesessseessnes 1 3 Figure 1 2 DC Voltage Shift in Digital Signal Transmission ue 1 5 Figure 1 3 AMA Lime Codinus e a R E EKR 1 5 Figure 1 4 B8ZS Line Coding cccccccsssssssscssssssssscssssussccssssusesessssseessssssnesssessees 1 6 Figure 1 5 T1 Digital Trunk Interface Connectivity 0 0 1 8 Figure 1 6 Digital Trunk Clock Synchronization s s s eseseeeererrerereereessessrsseessess 1 1 7 Figure 2 1 El Frame Organization 00 ccsesessessesccsesssssecccscseeseessescsecneeeeeeneeneaes 2 2 Figure 2 2 El Digital Trunk Connectivity Cards cscs 2 4 Figure 2 3 Digital Trunk Clock Synchronization eee eeeeeeeeeee 2 10 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure El or T1 in any of the Centigram Series 6 Communications Servers Model 640 e Model 120 e Model 70 W
232. entifies two procedural levels of CPs a high level CP and a low level CP A high level Cl provides instructions on how to do overall tasks such as installing a server A low level Cl provides instructions on more specific tasks such as how to install a line card Readers familiar with Centigram servers can use the CPs as a checklist if desired while readers new to Centigram servers can use CPs for step by step instructions After gaining experience with this documentation you can find your own innovative way of using the task list One possible approach on how to use the task list is provided below List Select from the task list the title of the task that you want to perform and note its high level CP number Flip through the CPs in this chapter until you find the correct CP number Follow the instructions given in the CP A reference column in each CP contains pointers when necessary to supplemental information such as another procedure a technical reference in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual another manual or menu maps Use the tabs included with this binder to find referenced supplemental information that is located within this manual If you need to interrupt a CP and seek reference information first mark the CP with your bookmark or otherwise note down where you are in the CP After you are finished with the reference information return to the CP and continue to execute the steps where you left off 5
233. entries 1 4 2 7 valid error action field entries 2 8 templates f creating 1 12 DP 7501 description 1 2 execution 1 7 1 9 execution completion 1 8 installing 1 12 loading 1 12 matching to data 1 7 modifying 1 12 non matching data 1 7 pattern matching 1 8 programming display 1 6 rules 1 9 sample 1 6 saving 1 12 structure 1 4 time out field description 1 5 2 12 transfer 1 2 Index 3 foiceMemo Configuration Main Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Online Menu Day Night Menu Dialing Plan Menu and Star Prefix Dplan Dial Strit Mailbox and enu Dial by Name Menu Passcode Menu or FPSA Menu l A eco a Allow Dial an Extension l Menu Receptionist Menu l I Analog Networking Configuration Menu data entry parameters Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions EI T 1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Manual 1w Trademark of Mitel Corporation Copyright 1996 Mitel Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada 2 Table of Contents About This Manual Who Should Read This Manual s ocicaicncecceiiachee ees vii How to Use This Manual ssessesessessessesessessesesseseessssessesesssseeeesssseesessessesee vii Reference Chapters ssssssessessssessnsesnseeseesneecnnessnsecsncecaseesneessneesneesnsesnnseenecs vii Task TISS rT E A A A
234. er Step 12 Exit the extra cost menu When prompted Do you want to install another extra cost feature Y N N 5 Press Enter You see a number of warning messages You can ignore the ones about activating the configuration and rebooting the system Step 13 When promptedEnter one of the names enter host status Enable all modules enabling the module connected to the server console last Select E Enable a module Which module Enter the number of the module to enable Repeat this choice until finally specifying the module connected to the server console When you do so you are prompted Rebooting module X Step 14 The server resets and resumes normal operation There are two ways to use the prompts once installed and enabled You can specify the prompts language as the default language for a line group Or create or modify an LCOS for the new prompt language then specify the LCOS for each mailbox using the language Complete information on how to perform these tasks are in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual in the Mailboxes and the Other Classes of Service chapters Updating Prompts This section covers updating prompts on a Series 6 server Refer to Section 3 for information on installing new prompts 41 Summary of Update To update prompts you must load the new prompt diskette set onto the server The update procedure differs from the installation procedure in that prompts do not need to be enabled 4 2 Update
235. er Step Reference C Connect Telephone Lines 5 Ask you project manager where the MDF is situated The MDF is usually situated in a closet or storage room of the building 6 Have the worksheets available that show the Model 120 or Model 70 line groups you plan to configure Make a list of the telephone numbers and their corresponding Model 120 or Model 70 ports 7 Mount the necessary number of RJ 45 modular connector blocks near the Model 120 or Model 70 8 Install standard 24 gauge twisted pair telephone wire between the MDF punchdown blocks and the RJ 45 modular connector blocks If E amp M signaling leads are used a second pair is needed for each modular connector block 9 Connect each pair to the terminals on the MDF punchdown block If you want to maintain Tip amp Ring integrity connect the Tip above the Ring connection on the punchdown block 10 Connect each twisted pair to the RJ 45 modular block 11 Label the modular blocks to identify which telephone lines are connected to which block Also indicate in your labeling which Model 120 or Model 70 port each line accesses 12 Install telephone cables from the modular blocks to the corresponding Model 120 or Model 70 ports Doc Rev A c 6270 Page of 2 Install Modem VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure explains how to connect a modem to the Model 120 or Model 70 Step Reference Verify Cabling Specifications l Obtain the c
236. er Y to continue N to abort the backup process 5 Specify what information to restore Prompt Do you want to turn on the tutorial for each mailbox restored Y N Response Y to restore the mailboxes with the tutorial activated N to restore the mailboxes with the tutorial turned off Prompt Do you want to restore the configuration security and billing information Y N Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Doc Rev A CP 5704 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 6 If you answered yes to restoring the configuration and billing information specify the information to be restored otherwise continue at step 8 Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore Billing rates file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore System name file Response Y to restore the information s N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore System code file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore Banner file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore System Revision History Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore Remote conso
237. eriods of low call traffic If possible the online version of this program should be run from the Hard Disk Utilities Menu so there is not a loss of call processing capabilities See CP 7029 for the online instructions Step Reference l Boot the module to the Maintenance From Hard Drive Menu Prompt Run MAINTENANCE from Hard Drive Response y 2 Start the Diagnose program and identify the disk s to be tested Select diagnose Prompt Enter the hard disk id bus scsiId to test or A for all or Q to quit Response aif you want to test all the disks in the system otherwise enter the bus and two digit SCSI ID numbers separated by a colon of the disk to be tested Doc Rev A cl 7030 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step 3 Identify which tests are to be executed Prompt All options default to Y Perform Controller Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Sequential Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Random Seek Test Y N Response YOY press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Spiral Seek Test Y N Response Yor press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test 4 If any test does not pass contact your Centigram Distributor or Centigram TAC 5 Ifall tests pass enable the module being tested Select host status P
238. erted 3 The Yellow Alarm is not cleared until the DS signal has been reframed for 15 5 seconds 4 The minimum time interval between the end of one Yellow Alarm and the start of another is 1 second Blue Alarm The Blue Alarm is an alarm indication signal AIS and consists of a continuous string of unframed one s hence the derivative all 1 s or AIS This signal is typically used to indicate to the far end that some kind alarm condition exists This condition could be nothing more than the circuit removed from service for testing or it could mean an equipment failure on the network The transmission of all ones permits the T clock to continue to be recovered from the network Rx signal in the absence of traffic while still communicating the alarm condition When the TJ driver is advised of the AIS by the hardware the affected T carrier goes into an OOF condition The VoiceMemo digital trunk connectivity software treats the condition like any other OOF except for setting the user accessible status bits and an entry in the system error log that the alarm is a Remote Blue Alarm Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Red Alarm A Red Alarm is asserted and the affected T carrier goes to a Carrier Group Alarm state when the T interface detects that an OOF has persisted for more than 2 50 5 seconds A Yellow Alarm is also asserted as long as the 1 remains in a Red Alarm condition Carrier Group Alarm CGA The CGA consist
239. erve Precautions 1 Put on a grounded wrist strap and attach the other end to the cabinet Doing so protects the component from electrostatic discharge 2 Shut down the system and turn off the power if you have not already done so CAUTION Removing a component while the power is on can severely damage the component you are working on and other peripherals 3 Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet 4 When removing a component place it on a nonconductive surface such as an anti static bag Make sure you have the anti static bags before you begin 5 Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables from the system Doc Rev A CP 6221 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference GCD Remove the Disk Carrier WARNING oD When the disk carrier is removed from the system the power switch terminals are accessible These terminals can have hazardous voltages present even when the power switch is turned off Unplug the system before performing the procedure Failure to do so can result in personal injury and or equipment damage 6 Remove cabinet cover CP 6224 7 Disconnect the data and power cables from both the hard disk and the floppy disk drive 8 Remove the four screws that secure the carrier to the chassis 6 32 hex head Phillips screws See Figure for details 9 Slide the ca
240. es not support any type of message waiting indication you can configure paging or message delivery to let users know when new messages arrive See your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details Reference IP 5402 JP 6028 P 7006 YP 7016 gt P 7501 Aenu Map 13 Doc Rev A ce 504 i Page of 8 Configure Omni Integration VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure summarizes the steps required to install and configure the Enhanced In band Integration to work with the Omni PBX Refer to the appendixes for reference information about this integration There are two sections to installing this integration installing and configuring the software on the VoiceMemo system and configuring the Omni PBX Refer to your Omni documentation for help when configuring the PBX if necessary Step Reference Configure the VoiceMemo System 1 Identify the line cards that will be used to integrate with the Omni PBX Shut down the VoiceMemo system and strap the line cards for Type 1 E amp M signaling See the VoiceMemo Installation and Service Manual for details If you plan to use DTMF to PBX message waiting identify at least one additional port and strap it for Type 1 E amp M signaling 2 Restore power to the VoiceMemo system and allow it to initialize 3 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette DP 5402 4 Define a line group for the integration DP 6028 5 Assign the E
241. es that should not be part of the line group Select D Drop Lines From Current Group Prompt Enter lines to drop Response Line s to remove from the line group values and formats are the same as described above for adding lines 8 Exit to the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Doc Rev A Assign the Enhanced In band Integration DP 7006 Page 1 of 1 Application to a Line Group VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure describes how to assign the Enhanced In band Integration application to a line group You must have first defined a line group DP 6028 Reference Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Venu Map 13 From the Offline Menu go to the LineGroup Only Applications Menu Venu Map 13 Assign the Enhanced In band Integration application to the line group Select G Group Selected Prompt Enter a group number Response If the current line group number is the one you want press Enter otherwise enter the line group number for the application you ase assigning Prompt APPL G U D E M P R V W X Response E for Enhanced In baud Integration 4 Exit and save your changes Select X Exit Prompt G M C Q X Response Exit and save Doc Rev A pp O11 Page 1 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Modify an Enhanced In band Integration Application This procedure explains how to modify all of the components of an Enhanced In band Integration application Besides
242. esssesseseseesees 1 3 Dual El Trunk Interface Card cctsesssssssecseesseeceseeceeceeeceesaeeeceeeeeceeeeee 1 4 Integration With Analog Trunk Interfaces scsi 1 5 Clock Synchronization oo cece cesescseseessseecseecseecsseseseseesseesseeeseeseseaees 1 5 Et Digital Carrier Events oo cescssscsecsseesseecescecnseceseesaeeceeeceeseenseseases 16 Configuration cesses O creeeeeeeeeeesescneesneesnsenesnessnesnnesneesneesesnesneenneenesseense 1 7 SIOPASSTSMIMENE Soe estes eae E aE e a Ee a Ee Hel a ES 1 7 Module Number mennaan aes eee ees ha RAT eee 1 8 Input Output Address oo eessseessssctecceecceesseeceescueeseceseseseseseeceeeseenseeessseeees 1 8 Si SMA g sicecceccccdesiessece cele teccececesdesdadesteeueds R RRE E ER ER 1 9 1H Table of Contents Trunk Configuration siyiteautauaeeact casein uae incaeeurutel mine tees 1 7 Trunk Sequence Number s sesererereerrerereereeeeeeeeerterreereeersresereereereeeresne 1 7 Framing Format 1 7 Codines POR at orearen Sed sac E EEE sve sites EA NA 1 7 Clock Synchronization ssschdanicehasiecastnevanaiertvitareriedetemesnnnnien 1 7 Digital Trunk Online Maintenance cccccsescsssssssssesssescssesssseesssessseeessseees 1 10 2 Dual T Digital Trunk Connectivity TI PCM Trunking Overview vaidihatianeandinnietinaeiaacdeaaees 2 1 T1 Digital Trunk Multiplexing sssssssssssnesssconsossseneheseemtsnassevnesessonees 2 1 Channel Associated Signaling CAS eeeeereeerereerereeeseseseseserse
243. et the following phone line exceptions for each line in the line group DP 7022 Exception Value Description 23 60 Flash hook Time 32 24 DTMF Receive Debounce Time 166 70 Interdigit Delay Time If your VoiceMemo system has the Receptionist II optional feature set the Pre DN dial string to 70 for blind transfers The Compact and Modular DR2 do not support supervised transfers over the VMI lines If you have a Norstar DR3 or DR4 and want to use supervised transfer set the Pre DN dial string to 2 set the Connect Dial String to 3 and set the Dial Suing for Return on Called Party Busy or RNA to 2 See your Receptionist II Manual for details Exit and save your changes If the systems are near each other connect the switch and VoiceMemo systems to IP 3021 the same ground point Configure a line group for DTMF to PBX Message Waiting with the following values Pre DN On Dial String S l Pre DN Off Dial String 1 See your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for procedures on configuring DTMF to PBX Message Waiting Document Rev A Step esa CD Configure the Northern Telecom Norstar l Install VMI modules for all integration lines as instructed in the Norstar Voice Mail Interface Installation Guide Connect lines from the Line Jacks on the VMIs to available telephone ports on the KSU Connect lines from the Terminal Jacks on the VMIs to line card ports on the VoiceMemo system Plug in the
244. etry count 4 Correction span 22 Head offset count 0 Data strobe offset count 0 Write retry count 0 Recovery time limit 0 Changeable page 1 data flags Oxef rd_retry 255 c_span 0 hd 0 ds 0 wt_retry 0 rev 0 Page 2 Disconnect Reconnect Parameters Buffer full ratio 0 Buffer empty ratio 0 Bus inactivity limit 50 Disconnect time limit 12800 Connect time limit 0 Maximum burst size 0 Data transfer disconnect control 0 Changeable page 2 data b _ratio 255 be_ratio 255 inact 0 disc 0 con 0 burst 0 dtdc 0 Doc Rev A CP 5313 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 04 and later Step Reference Page 3 Format Parameters Tracks per zone 6 Alternate sectors per zone 3 Alternate tracks per zone 0 Alternate tracks per logical unit 6 Sectors per track 14 Data bytes per sector 51 Interleave factor l Track skew factor 23 Cylinder skew factor 29 Flags 0x40 Changeable page 3 data tpz 0 aspz 65535 atpz 0 atpl 65535 sec_per_trk 0 data_bytes 65535 interleave 0 trk_skew 0 cyl_skew 0 flags 0x0 Page 4 Drive Geometry Parameters Number of cylinders 2380 Number of heads Write precomp cylinder Redunced write current cylinder 0 Step rate Landing zone RPL Rotational offset Rotational offset Disk capacity 039328 Press any key to continue 3 Press any key to return to the Hard Disk Utilities Menu Doe Rev A c 531 Page of2 Change Module Status
245. ets the server causing loss of call processing capabilities Centigram recommends that this process be completed during periods of low call traffic Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu go to the System Maintenance Additional Venu Map 12 Options Menu then select S to go to the Online Software Update Menu 2 Activate the software Select A Activate New Software Prompt Activating software will cause the system to shutdown and reboot automatically If you wish to activate the new software and reboot the system type activate Response activate Prompt Disk 1 has new software Release 6 00 This software was updated on Do you want to continue Enter Y to continue N to stop Response Y to continue the process N to abort the process Prompt Perform shutdown Response Y to warn the users of the impending shutdown N to skip the warning Prompt Wait for Message Waiting Response Y to wait for the message waiting queue to clear The server automatically shuts down and resets the entire system Phase II of the software update is run and the server resets a second time returning to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Doc Rey A ce 029 Page of 1 Diagnose a Disk With System Online VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to run the diagnose program to check the hard disk while the system is online processing calls Reference Step 1 Reach t
246. eturn to zero or NRZ Transmission for long distances over wire based media of bipolar signals has a problem where the transmission cable which appears as a resonant circuit integrates the DC voltage Figure 2 2 of the signal This is especially true if the voltage remains at positive or negative level for any length of time as would be the case for a digital signal with a series of or 0 conditions in it This charging of the transmission cable causes a progressively smaller and smaller differential between logic O and 1 voltage conditions This then results in the inability of a receiving circuit to distinguish between the logic conditions a distinction that is imperative for recovering the network clock To counteract this problem several coding techniques have been developed to balance plus and minus voltages that is prevent long strings of 1 s or O s The Series 6 server digital trunk interface can be configured to use one of three of the more common coding techniques alternate mark inversion AMI AMI with zero code suppression ZCS and binary with 8 zeros suppression BSZS Dud T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity V Reference Level Error Due To DC Wander Long String Long String Bit Stream Waveform of I s of O s x1886vm6 Figure 2 2 DC Voltage Shift in Digital Signal Transmission AMI AM 1 alternate mark inversion is a simple technique which converts a unipolar signal into
247. eues to be empty Response Y to wait for the queue to clear N to continue immediately with the shutdown The following messages are then displayed Message Indicator Request Queue Lengths active 0 untried 0 retrying 0 calls expected 0 Paging Request Queue Lengths a active 0 untried 0 retrying 0 calls expected 0 6 Specify if changes to the status of each module are to be made Prompt Enable or Disable Modules Response Y 7 A chart with the status of each module is displayed and then the Module Maintenance Menu is displayed Module Status 1 2 3 14 I ENA x a ENA gt Module is Enabled DIS gt Module is Disabled gt Module is not configured MODULE MAINTENANCE MENU D DISABLE a module E ENABLE a module X Exit 8 Change the status of all modules to disabled changing the status of the module the console is attached to last Select D DISABLE a module Prompt Which Module Response a Prompt type disable to confirm your request Response disable Doc Rev A Reference CP 6262 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 9 The server automatically boots to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu Select the prompts add program Prompt Enter one of the names Response prompts add 10 Load the prompts diskettes
248. ews 6 Standing behind the server hold both sides of the cover at the back and press against the back panel with your thumbs This pops the cover loose Slide it toward the back one inch Then lift the cover up See Figure for details Doc Rev A CP 6224 Page 2 of2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Remove Five Retaining Screws Slide Cover Towards Rear Then Lift Off 117a70c Figure 1 Remove the Cabinet Cover Install the Server Cabinet 4 Check the quality of your work and make sure no tools or loose parts are inside the system 5 Lower cover with front edge about one inch from bezel Slide the lip on the front edge forward under the bezel Make sure the side panels are outside the metal rails and sides of the cabinet 6 Reinstall the five retaining screws in the back panel 7 Reconnect external cables to the server Remove any identification tags you placed on the cables 8 Turn power on Dac Rev A 5 System Administration How To Use This Chapter Using the Task This chapter provides step by step procedures for system administration functions on a Centigram Series 6 Model 70 Additional information is also located in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual and the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual A task list and Centigram Procedures CPs describing system administration procedures are located at the end of this chapter The task list id
249. f this manual Instructions for completing the worksheets are in the Reference chapters Many of the CPs assume you have completed the appropriate worksheet Conventions Used in This Manual The procedures in this manual use the following conventions to describe how you enter El or T configuration information and how information is displayed on the Centigram Series 6 server console Press Enter Press the Enter key For example Press Enter if the current number is correct On some keyboards this key is labeled Return or has a return arrow 4 on it Enter Type the text shown then press the Enter key For example Enter the line number 1 24 means type a number from through 24 and then press the Enter key bold Words or characters in bold type indicate either a value to be entered by you exactly as shown or when used to indicate a variable entry describe the type of value to be supplied by you See example above What you select from A displayed prompt a displayed menu for information Select G Current Group a Prompt Enter a group number Response Number of the line group 1 24 to be used for the application What you enter in response to the prompt Note Unless otherwise stated press Enter after each response you enter About This Manual Reader Advisories Reader advisories used in this manual are shown below Note gt O FP e Information especially useful in relation to
250. fter sending any form of message across the link the PMS system does not reply even after four attempts At this point the ink is logged as down hissnd Configuration change Normal operation This data is logged after a message from eecomenu reports that the system administrator has changed the check in or check out mailbox configuration data This information is passed on to hisrcv so it will reread the information from the disk file It is this communication that allows changes to check in and check out handling without a system reboot hissnd Got send resyne message Normal operation This data is logged when hissnd is redirected a message from hisresyne via histcv VejceMemo sends a resync message out on the RS232C serial link to the PMS system hissnd Got send MWI Normal operation This data is logged when hissnd is redirected a message from hismwi via hisrcv to update g mailboxes message waiting VoiceMemo sends a MW status message with the requested mailbox number number of urgent and number of unplayed messages out on the R 232C serial link to the PMS system hissnd Got send bad mailbox Mailbox undefined in database This data is logged when hissnd is told by hisrcv tg report the bad mailbox number VoiceMemo sends a bad mailbox message out on the RS232C seria link to the PMS system hissnd Store MWI command Normal operation This data is logged when hissnd is actively sending or hisrev is a
251. g Port COS on Page 5 and is used by the SUPERSET Message key and Call Message Sender of Oldest Message PBX features The PBX dials the hunt group access code 2000 in this case When MITEL MA L answers the call the PBX tones out the remainder of the abbreviated dial string 6 The MITEL MA L system matches the to one of its programmed Enhanced In band application templates and the 6 is converted into the calling party s extension number i e the user s extension number which is also the user s mailbox number The MITEL MA L system plays the appropriate user login greeting and the user is prompted to enter a password Message Retrieval Messages can be retrieved from the MITEL MA L system by one of the following methods Both methods assume that users are calling from their own extension telephones The MITEL MA L system prompts for users passcodes before playing any saved messages 5 9 1 Message Retrieval Using a SUPERSET SUPERSET 4 SUPERSET 430 and SUPERSET 4DN 1 Press the Message softkey 2 Press Read 3 Press Call SUPERSET 420 1 Press the Message key 2 Press Call 1 SUPERSET 41 0 1 Press the Message key 1 SUPERSET 4017 1 Go off hook 2 Press the Message key 5 9 2 5 9 3 Message Retrieval Using Feature Code Go off hook and dial the Call Sender of Oldest Message feature access code This code is programed in Form 2 Feature Access Codes and is feature
252. g data It passes the PCM bearer channels with voice information and signaling CAS data to the Digital Signal Processing line card The line card connected to the Dual J trunk interface card by way of the MVIP bus separates the voice data and CAS information from the PCM data The line card then forwards them to the VoiceMemo application running on the CPU The Digital Signal Processing line card can be DSP24 or a DSP8 A DSP24 has 24 channels available to process the voice signal information from a full T1 trunk The DSP 8 cards with 8 channels available to process the voice signal information are used to support fractional T configurations Refer to TR1901 for DSP8 line card information and to TR1903 for DSP24 line card information in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual On the transmit side of the trunk for outgoing calls the DSP 24 line card formats the outgoing voice data voice and signaling data from the CPU for the Dual T1 Trunk Interface card MVIP Bus PCM Channels 1 24 gt Digital Signal Dual T1 Trunk TI Trunks Processing Fax Card interface Card Card gt 24 Channels Y Voice Channels Fax Data to CPU 1 Figure 2 5 T1 Digital Trunk Interface Connectivity Dual JT Digital Trunk Connectivity Integration With Analog Trunk Interfaces The T Digital Trunk Connectivity feature can coexist with analog trunks in the same Series 6 server module In such configurations the voice channel
253. gistered marks of their respective companies NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Corporation MITEL The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes MITEL MAIL on the SX 2000 PABX Contents OVERVIEW eee eee eee ee SO RDOR UREN SREP R CCRC ROSSER be UneeObtsebiognane PIRBPPNANPVVEFANFODPUIPOPPAATOOEOVOAFEDATENRDENUN EEITELELTELLLILELLEEL bepoopapppanss 4 GENERAL cccssesssosseesereesee Siescuctearparsigevstsitsecieseitoes sueavs dite ET e T fees 4 REQUIREMENT Soartcdt cached n aa fave deatade deck Caste c Gece A ats ava Ding EA HARDWARE INTER A OE EEEn 6 SX 2000 IGS PROGRAMMING ci neien anotaan aai aiaia ddite dda gee biel EAE A aaa aiana 7 MITEL MAIL HARDWARE eee eee ee COSTER ORF FG REDE REROE POUR ECO RCC RORE RATER EDD ROLO TRUER BRE RS Eee anna MITEL MAIL PROGRAMMING ccccccsessssssescscsscsssessesescscssssssssessescsssuseeseseecesssssssnssesesssceneseseesesess 11 Define Line Group in Offline Menu oc esssesssssssesssssescntessnsessssessasscesssstecseessssssssessassesstessnseesnsersasesss 11 Configure the Enhanced In
254. gital trunk interface card Select B DUAL El Prompt Input your choice for help A B C D E F X Response The card number according to the Model of the Series 6 server Model 640 server cards occupy slots 9 and 11 Model 120 server cards occupy slots 6 and 8 Model 1201 server cards occupy slot 6 Model 70 server cards occupy slot type 3 The confirmation message Board DUAL El is added to slot x where x is the slot number you added in step above Doc Rev A CP 3151 Page 2 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step 10 11 12 Exit back to the Resource Configuration Menu when done At the Resource Configuration Menu identify the logical number of the module This number is either 1 2 3 or 4 Select M set Module number Prompt Input Module Response 1 2 3 or 4 At the Resource Configuration Menu configure the Dual El Digital Trunk Interface card Select C Card Configuration Prompt Occupied slots are Slot Card XX DUAL El Input your choice Response The card number according to the Model of the Series 6 server Model 640 server cards occupy slots 9 and 11 Model 120S server cards occupy slots 6 and 8 Model 1201 server cards occupy slot 6 Model 70 server cards occupy slot type 3 From the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x where x is the slot number entered in step 6 reach Change IO Port Address Menu to configure the IO port address for the card
255. gn the slot at the Physical Resource Configuration Menu for the card you are configuring The module number is the Series 6 server module in which the digital trunk interface card is installed A four module Series 6 Model 640 server can support a total capacity of 240 PCM voice channels over 16 trunks In such a configuration the line groups would be configured to use only part of the total number of PCM channels that is fractional T available in each trunk Refer to T1 Connectivity Features on page 7 You assign the slot at the Physical Resource Configuration Menu for the card you are configuring The digital trunk interface card can occupy one of two possible AT bus addresses 0x300h and 0x2300h where address 0x300h is the default address occupied by card 0 and 0x2300h is assigned to card 1 These addresses can also be assigned to a Smartcard in Model 70 and 120 servers Before selecting the I O address check the addresses occupied by these cards if they are present in the affected Series 6 server module If these cards are and either of their addresses are set to the same to which the digital trunk interface card an address conflict exists and bus contention will occur Ensure that each card is set to a unique address The address selected in the Select IO Address Menu must match the address for which the card is physically jumpered Note The digital trunk interface card has jumper positions for setting interrupt request le
256. group of users Up to 64 bitmapped GCOSs and 32 000 affinity GCOSs can be assigned in the Model 70 Each mailbox must be assigned a GCOS Network Class of Service NCOS The NCOS works in conjunction with the MESA Net digital networking feature It is used to assign a user s access and priority on a network that is set up to connect multiple Series 6 servers Restriction Class of Service RCOS The RCOS is a parameter assigned to mailboxes that limits what telephone number can be outdialed Limits are placed on the area codes or exchanges a mailbox can outdial Tenant Class of Service TCOS The TCOS is a mailbox option used with the SMDI integration This feature governs mailbox interaction between user communities Product Description Special Application Mailboxes Administrator Attendant Broadcast Chain Greeting Only Guest 1 18 You can configure special application mailboxes in the Model 70 Two special application mailboxes are already preconfigured in the software the administrator and attendant mailboxes You can create combinations of special application mailboxes for special purposes You can find more information about special mailboxes in the VozceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual The Administrator s mailbox is included in the preconfigured software installation It belongs to the system administrator and has unique special privileges These privileges allow you to perform mailbox ad
257. gure TNPP fields prompt enter y For modifying a mailbox already configured for TNPP At the Modify TNPP fields prompt enter y For deleting existing TNPP configuration information At the Delete TNPP fields prompt enter y At the TNPP CAP or ID paging prompt enter either CAP or ID depending on what type of paging will be done for this mailbox Mailbox Parameters Message Waiting type 1 or 2 Enter message waiting type 5 for Pager Pager Access Code Index Enter the TNPP Pager system index number that was configured in the Offline TNPP Pager system configuration menu This is how the mailbox s page packet are directed to the correct TNPP serial link Configure TNPP fields This prompt is displayed if the mailbox does not have any TNPP information configured Answer Y to this prompt to configure the required TNPP information for this mailbox Delete TNPP fields This prompt is displayed if the mailbox has TNPP information configured Enter Y to clear the TNPP information and continue configuring a standard pager Enter N or a carriage return to continue Modify TNPP fields This prompt is displayed if the mailbox has TNPP information configured and the Delete TNPP fields prompt was not answered with Y Enter Y to modify the existing TNPP information Enter N or a carriage return to leave the TNPP information unchanged for this mailbox TNPP CAP or ID paging Enter the type of paging packets t
258. h a new SCSI disk You must TEMPORARILY set the SCSI id of the destination disk to be an id not used by any other SCSI device If all ids are being used then please power down the system TEMPORARILY substitute for the new disk any existing disk which is not the disk to be replaced or its mirror disk and then start this process again WARNING YOU MUST DISABLE ALL THE OTHER HOSTS TO BE ABLE TO USE THIS OPTION IF YOU HAVE NOT DONE SO REBOOT THIS HOST AND DO IT NOW IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO CONTINUE THEN RE BOOT THE SYSTEM OTHERWISE ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN Response Press Enter 22 Identify the replacement disks Prompt Which disk do you want to replace Enter the disk id path target lt cr gt to stop or for help Response Enter the SCSI ID of the disk to be replaced Prompt Which disk is the new disk Enter the disk id path target lt cr gt to stop or for help Response Enter the SCSI ID of the new disk 23 If the hard disks have not been prepared properly the following error message is displayed Prompt MOUNT Unable to find partition If this happens check the cables to the hard disks and try the disk conversion again If there is still a problem contact your Distributor a Doe Rev A CP 6572 Page 4 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 24 The server takes approximately 45 minutes complete the process The server displays the following mes
259. h account records and speech in the online verify it is possible to test each category separately To do a complete verify all speech and all records must be tested It is optional to log the results of the verify for use at a later time Since the server responds differently based on whether the results are logged this procedure includes steps to run the verify with and without logging the results If any errors are recorded contact the Technical Assistance Center Step Reference 4 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the System Verify Menu Then Menu Map 2 go to the task you want to perform Verify Records and log Results 2 Access the Record Verification Menu and specify that the results are to be logged for future use Select R Verify Records Prompt Log results Response Y Prompt Results of previous verify will be lost Please confirm by entering y Response Y Prompt Logging results to disk wove Record Verification Menu 3 Select the type s of records to verify For standard maintenance of the server use Verify All Records If there is a specific problem with the server select the appropriate record type to be verified Note that you must look at the results from the module where you ran the report Dac Rev A CP 7001 Page 2of4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Select A Verify All Records B Verify Sibling Lists C Verify Copy Lists D
260. hanges take effect Modify TNPP Timing Parameters Menu In this menu the following items can be changed during run time Inter char time within packet tict Timeout on response with idle revr tnri Timeout on response with busy revr tnrb Timeout on response to ENQ tnre RS flag hold off time thold Timeout idle link for keep alive ENQ tidle Number of retries by sending station per pkt Cretry Re transmits in response to RS holdbacks Chold Number of ENQ retries before error logging Cenq After the item s to be changed have been selected the Send changes to TNPPADMIN option must be selected to have the changes take effect Issue 1 Release 2 0 January 1996 Voice Processing Solutions PBX Integration SX 200 DIGITAL PABX SX 200 LIGHT PABX TM Trademark of Mite Corporation ae Copyright 1996 Mite Corporation All rights reserved Printed in Canada Contents 1 OVERVIEW 2A GENERA ehh ete Mannan a le aia E lena bist atid T es 3 3 REQUIREMENTS IMITATIONS aisits inici ioaea tia 3 Ap HARDWARE INTERFACE niin sass bd Sbudehh Menhicshae Anne anan e TAT AEE EEEE ten aan 4 5 SX 200 DIGITAL LIGHT PROGRAMMING ccceccccccccscssssesescscsceseessesescatstsceseaeeaees 5 1 System Configuration Form 10 oeeeseecsecsssecssesseecseeeseesseeeseessnceseesseeescesseesncesseesnseseessneeseessnseseesaeeeaaes 5 2 Feature Access Codes Form 2 wu cescssscsessessesesssesseeenseeee 000 Mia dtieduid ante dd 53 G
261. hard disk 1 9 Product Description Line Cards Specialty Cards Line cards are the primary interface between the Model 70 and the telephone network These cards control all incoming calls including fax messages All line cards support the Multi Vendor Integration Protocol MVIP which enables the Series 6 server to interface with a wide range of third party telephony cards Line cards are available in four or eight ports configurations and are full size AT cards that plug into empty slots on the Model 70 cabinet s backplane There are two general types of line cards offered analog and digital The analog line cards include 4 8 ports Loop Start Ground Start Trunk Direct Inward Dialing Trunk and E amp M Trunk The digital cards offered are T1 24 ports Loop Start Ground Start Trunk Direct Inward Dialing Trunk and E amp M Trunk and El 30 ports An external 48 volt power supply is also required when using DID E amp M or Ground Start line cards For detailed line card information see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual The line cards have the following features Speech digitization analog to digital and digital to analog and compression Line signaling and supervision l DTMF progress tone detection and synthesis Control and speech buffer memory for each of two channels and program memory Multi Vendor Integration Protocol MVIP support The Model 70 can also accommodate specialty cards
262. hat to Enter A short descriptive name for the application Default The default value is determined by the optional feature integration that is installed For example with the AT amp T System 25 integration installed this value defaults to SYS25 How It Works Enter the name of the application template set to use or the name of the new application template set Interactions amp Limitations There must not be any spaces in the application name The application name must not contain any reserved words from the template language The application name must be less than or equal to 10 characters Tips amp Techniques This is the name of the file that stores the application templates on the disk for example SYS25 Backup Application Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu Release 5 03 only What to Enter No entry required Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters How It Works When you select to backup an application the system will save a copy of the current template set on the hard disk You can later reload this application to put it into service or make more changes Tips amp Techniques Use an application name that is easy to remember Interactions amp Limitations If there is already an application with the same name on the hard disk the system will ask you if you want to overwrite the existing application You cannot overwrite any of the applications provided by Centigram See Also Save Applicati
263. hat will be created for this mailbox If the mailbox is CAP the Pager system index for this mailbox see above must refer to the correct TNPP link that is doing CAP paging The same holds true for ID paging If the mailbox has ID paging the pager system index must be supported by a TNPP link doing ID paging TNPP Destination Address Enter the four hexadecimal digit value that represents the address assigned to the message destination b TNPP CAP code This prompt is displayed if CAP paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the 8 characters that represent the CAP code of the mailbox owner s pager TNPP ID code This prompt is displayed if ID paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the 10 characters that represent the customer ID to be paged TNPP Page type This prompt is displayed if CAP paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the value that represents the signaling code scheme of the mailbox owner s pager The help text for this item contains a list of supported values TNPP Page class This prompt is displayed if CAP paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the value that represents the message encoding class of the mailbox owner s pager The help text for this item contains a list of valid values TNPP RF Channel This prompt is displayed if CAP paging was selected for this mailbox see above Enter the Radio Frequency channel designator for the mailbox owner
264. he Installing New Systems section The lists are alphabetized rather than sequenced to help technicians find the desired task and procedure quickly The following example shows how a task list is organized vii About This Manual Task List Page l of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later General Procedure Topic Principal Task Message Delivery Specific Tasks Message Delivery Configuration scccssccsccerssorssesssessserscnsncnsssssneassase Allow Mailbox Owners to Control Message Delay P 3339 Allow Receipt of Urgent Pages or Urgent Message Delivery Only Procedures Procedures follow the Task List of each reference chapter Follow the steps in Centigram Procedures CPs to accomplish the desired tasks The procedures are structured so that technicians can use the CPs as a simple checklist if desired or as step by step instructions When necessary CPs refer you to supplemental information such as additional procedures other manuals tables and menu maps These references are found in the procedures reference columns Each CP is numbered for document identification and referencing Numbering does not indicate a sequence of performance Menu Maps and Other Navigation Aids Most of the documents in the new Centigram document library have menu maps or a road map procedure You can refer to these document navigation aids at any point to
265. he System Maintenance Menu then go to the Hard Disk Utilities Menu Menu Map 8 2 Specify the disk s to be tested Select D Diagnose a disk Prompt Enter the hard disk id bus scsild to test or A for all or Q to quit Response Enter a if you want to test all the disks in the system otherwise enter the bus and two digit SCSI ID number of the disk to be tested 2 3 Identify which tests are to be executed Prompt All options default to Y Perform Controller Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Sequential Test Y N Response Yorpress Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Random Seek Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Spiral Seek Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test 4 If any test does not pass contact your Centigram Distributor or Centigram TAC Doe Rev A CP 7030 Page 1 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Run Diagnose From Hard Disk This procedure describes how to run the hard disk diagnose program from the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu It is assumed the module running the test has been shut down and disabled using the process described in Cl 6268 WARNING This version of the diagnose program requires one module to be removed from normal operation Centigram recommends that this process be run during p
266. he following sections are included when appropriate for each menu item Location in Menus The name of the menu the selection appears in For example the Reports menu choice is on the main menu so that entry would read Main Menu What to Enter What the system expects you to type All options are included here In most cases you can enter a question mark for on line help Default What the system assigns to this choice if you do not alter it or if you reset the system back to its defaults How It Works An explanation of what happens when you select this choice Other Requirements What you must do in other menus or have in terms of hardware or software to implement this choice Tips amp Techniques Suggestions and examples for using this menu choice Interactions amp Limitations How this parameter could affect others in another part of the VoiceMemo application See Also Other menu parameters or reference material that you may find useful Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Action 2 2 Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter The action to be performed when the received data matches Table 2 1 contains a list of all valid entries for the Action field Table 2 1 Valid Action Field Entries Description Dial DTMF digits 7 O 9 A D max 23 Hang up Go off hook Wink n 10s of a second Wait n 1 Qs of a second Play login prompt with passcode required Play login prompt passcode opt
267. he number of frames it contains that is 24 the doubling of framing F bits from a 12 bit pattern to 24 bit pattern and the addition of signaling bits C and Dused by channel associated signaling known as robbed bit signaling refer to Table 2 1 and the following paragraphs In networks whtre ESF is not fully implemented the SF signaling bits are repeated D4 and ESF are two of the formats for digital trunk connectivity feature that VoiceMemo Release 6 0A supports The standard D4 superframe format is known by domestic RBOCs as the M24 multiplexer format Table 2 SF and ESF Signaling Bits Z s Frame 6 Frame 12 Frame 18 Frame 24 Frame 30 Frame 36 Frame 42 w gt gt U U p 7 a w yaw Frame 48 Dual T Digital Trunk Connectivity D4 Super Frame 1 5 ms _ ee eee eee eee eee ee j EE C ea es E 1 24 Time Slots 1 24 Time Slots a Fach SIG Speech 7 Speech Time Slot Time Slot Time Slot ih Bits gee Bits ee Bits i Terminal Framing 1 0 0 0 FT Bit Odd Frames Signalling Framing 0 0 1 l 0 FS Bit Even Frames FS Bit I D A B A B B x1933vm60 jip 8 30 95 Figure 2 1 T D4 Frame Map 2 3 Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Channel Associated Signaling CAS Line Coding Release 6 0 digital trunk connectivity for T supports only channel associated signaling for ground start loop start E amp M and
268. he server off hook it continues by asking if a verify is to be executed Prompt Perform Offline System Verification Response Y to execute the verify 5 The server asks if the results of the verify are to be recorded The default is yes Prompt Log results Response Y or press Enter 3 Doc Rev A cl 5701 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step 8 Reference When the verify is complete the system continues with the shutdown asking if the server should wait while the message waiting indicators are updated If any errors were encountered during the verify contact the Technical Assistance Center Change the status of the modules if desired Prompt Enable or Disable Modules Response Y to change the status of modules N to keep the module status the same and continue at step 11 If you answered yes in step 7 a chart with the status of each module is displayed and then the Module Maintenance Menu is displayed 9 To enable a module 11 Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Which Module Response Enter the number of the module to be enabled If enabling multiple modules enable the module attached to the console last Enter 1 ora for Model 120 or Model 70 To disable a module Select D DISABLE a module Prompt Which Module Response The number of the module If disabling multiple modules disable the module attached to the console last Enter 1 or a for Model 120 or Mod
269. help you reach a menu or show you which task to perform next The List of Centigram Procedures at the back of the manual lists all of the procedures in the manual and tells you where to find them It also tells you how they are related to each other And don t overlook the index it is the fastest way to find all references to a specific topic About This Manual Which Document Do Use Topics listed below are described in the Centigram documents indicated This table lists documents for the base hardware and software only not optional features Topics Activating an inactive configuration E E Administration by Phone Call placement Card configuration Card replacement n ae o a E eee ad f Distribution Hsts U up Icating a configuration Hardware descriptions Imsrdlation procedures About This Manual Topics continued LCOSs and limits Mailboxes Message delivery Message waiting lights Paging Passcode mailbox Password console Phoneline exceptions Power information Prompts RCOSs NPA NXX Release Notes Repairing a Centigram Series 6 server Replacing a Centigram Series 6 server Reports Resource Manager Service procedures Site preparation System administration System maintenance System security System verify Testing a configuration Troubleshooting Updating Upgrading Verifying configuration parameters Voi
270. here is one hard disk in the server it must be configured as master Hard disks are shipped from Centigram configured as master If you are replacing one disk in a two disk system be sure to jumper the new disk to match the master or slave disk to be replaced 7 Slide the hard disk into the carrier beside the floppy disk drive and orient in the same direction The component side of the hard disk should be placed toward the carrier rather than toward the floppy disk drive 8 Align the mounting holes so that the front edge of the hard disk is between 0 5 inch to 1 O inches from the front edge of the carrier 9 Secure the hard disk to the carrier with three or four suitable screws 10 Make sure the drives are securely fastened in the carrier 11 Position the carrier above the cabinet The from of the floppy disk drive faces the front of the cabinet and should line up with the opening in the front panel Doc Rev A CP 6221 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 12 Lower the carrier into the cabinet lining up the front tab on the carrier with the slot that projects from the side of the 5 25 inch bay 13 Slide the carrier toward the front until the left front tab and the screw holes line up 14 Secure the carrier into the cabinet using four mounting screws 6 32 hex head Phillips screws Note If the floppy disk drive needs to be properly aligned with the front bezel loosen the mounti
271. ho Should Read This Manual Ly This manual is intended for technicians and administrators who are responsible for configuring El or T on the Centigram Series 6 server How to Use This Manual This manual contains detailed reference information a list of tasks that you can perform a collection of procedures for performing the tasks and reader aids such as menu maps Reference Chapters A gt Use the material in Chapters 1 and 2 for detailed inquiry into the configuration of El or T1 in a Centigram Series 6 Communications Server These chapters discuss how components are related elaborates on concepts gives operational details and contains all necessary tables and figures about configuration Use the Centigram Series 6 Installation and Service Manual appropriate for your platform for an actual server installation and the VozceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for VoiceMemo software configuration Task lists The task list is located in the Configuration section Use the task list starting with a principal task shown in boldface to configure El or T1 Each task listed is described in more detail in a procedure The task list is alphabetized which helps most readers find the desired task and procedure quickly No particular sequence of tasks is implied The following example shows how a task list is organized vii About This Manual Procedures Menu Maps and Other Navigation Aids Vi Task List
272. ial port and it is an lt ENQ gt This choice to send out the last message is made if VoiceMemo has not sent this message four times with the PMS system continuing to reply with an lt ENQ gt rather than the expected positive result lt ACK gt The information is sent by hisrcv to hissnd HISRCV Received an lt ACK gt Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a first character from the RS232C serial port and it is an lt ACK gt The information is sent by hisrcv to hissnd HISRCV Received a lt NAK gt Link failure test link protocol using data scope If error is not consistent suspect PMS system overload or stressed RS232C data connection This data is logged when hisrcv reads a first character from the RS232C serial port and it isa lt NAK gt The information is sent by hisrev to hissnd HISRCV data packet Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads in any packet that begins with an lt STX gt This message is displayed if it is a good or bad packet The packet is shown in the format lt STX gt message lt lt ETX gt LRC h HISRCV BAD LRC Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged when hisrcv reads a packet from the RS232C serial port and the LRC passed in the packet does not match hisrev s calculated LRC LRC is defined as longitudinal redundancy check XOR of all bytes after lt STX gt including the lt ETX gt character with a OOHex
273. iately after one character is transmitted over the RS232C serial link The character sent is an lt ENQ gt hex 05 hissnd Send h Internal error report condition This data is logged immediately after one character is transmitted over the R 232 serial link The character sent is in error and its value in hex is shown hissnd m Normaloperation This data is logged immediately after one data packet is transmitted over the RS232C serial link The packet sent should be of the form lt STX gt message lt ETX gt LRC 1 hissnd Received a bad request Internal error report condition This data is logged when hissnd receives an unknown request from another task on the WoiceMemo system The task hissnd tries to get that task to be reset in an attempt to keep the condition from reoccurring hissnd Use hissnd Sport hyatt Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started without a port first parameter The hyatt is the optional setting that tells the software to interface to an Encore PMS system at 1200 baud Without the setting the software assumes to interface to a HIS PMS system at 2400 baud hissad Bad RS232 port name Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hissnd is started with an undefined port parameter
274. ication Description MITEL ENHANCED INTEGRATION T Edit Templates Menu P Edit Parameters Menu O Show Application 03 Install Application L List Applications S Save Application X Exit IN BAND MENU 23 6 4 1 Enter to select Install Application Application name to install E IB 200D Enter the Application Name The name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as it appears in the application name field In this example the name is EIB 200D refer to page 17 2 Enter S to save application The system prompts for the following Do you want to overwrite existing copy YIN Y gt Enter Y to confirm the overwrite Application saved IN BAND MENU N D T P O LL S X 3 Enter X to Exit and return to the In band menu Step 4 Set Additional In Band Features Receptionist I The previous steps installed the Enhanced In band application Additional features for the application must now be set up IN BAND MENU A B X Press Enter key to expand menu ENHANCED IN BAND A Configure Application B Other Features X Exit 1 Enter B to select Other Features from the Enhanced In Band menu Group 3 lines ENHANCED IN BAND INBAND Application 1 Enable Receptionist y n N N Day Night D Dialing Pian Menu Z Dial String and Mailbox Menu K KEY O for attendant transfer during greeting y n NJ W Prompts Enter mailbox or wait y n Y M Allow m
275. ication that you wish to install Note that the name is case sensitive i e Sys25 is not the same as SYS25 Default No default How It Works The named application is loaded so that you can make changes or put it into service You should backup the application if you make any changes When you want to put an application into service you must exit from the Enhanced In band Menu to the Online Menu and then choose to exit and save changes The new application starts service on the next call into each phone port Tips amp Techniques If you are not sure of the application name or its spelling use the List Applications option before attempting to install an application See Also Application Name List Application list Applications Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu What to Enter No entry required How It Works This menu choice displays a list of all enhanced in band applications on the system Tips amp Techniques Select this option before choosing Install Application if you are not sure of an application name or its spelling See Also Application Name Install Application Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters MF Enable Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter Yes to enable MF signaling or No to disable Default No MF signaling disabled How It Works When enabled this parameter tells Voice Memo to expect MF signaling from the switching system Some switches and PBXs use Multi fre
276. icular switch Use this procedure if there is no default template set available for your switch Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette Define a line group for the integration Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group If your AIP system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks Create a set of Enhanced In band Integration templates to work with your switch capabilities The worksheet in the back of this manual can help you plan the templates Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu 1 Schedule Company Greetings Enable Call Placement Message Delivery Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers Exit and save your changes Configure message waiting for the VoiceMemo system either RS 232 Message Waiting or DTMF to PBX Message Waiting If your switch do
277. igital Trunk 1 E1 Digital Trunk 2 Switch El Digital Trunk 3 Known Clock Source Series 6 Server Switch Lo El Digital Trunk 4 Sync to Trunk x1883vm6 Figure l 3 Digital Trunk Clock Synchronization Digital Trunk Online Maintenance The VoiceMemo software features an online maintenance utility for monitoring digital trunk activity and statistics either individual trunks or all trunks changing the clock reference removing trunks from service and looping back trunks toward the facility Trunk activity includes the operational state of a trunk errored seconds frame slips and so forth The display presents trunk status and the configuration of the trunk a useful feature for quickly validating trunk setup The information displayed is dynamic and changes as trunk status changes For example if a trunk is taken out of service the utility immediately reports it to the display Refer to the Centigram Series 6 Server Systems Diagnostics Manual for more information 2 Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity This chapter has a description and brief technical overview of the T digital trunk connectivity available for Centigram Series 6 servers It is provided both as an introduction to the digital trunk connectivity feature and to provide planning and installation guidance for retrofitting a Series 6 server with the feature TI PCM Trunking Overview The Centigram Series 6 Communications Server incl
278. ignaling pits 1 2 3 4 s s 7 s S S7f21 EPS Figure 1 1 E 1 Frame Organization Common Channel Signaling CCS Common channel signaling refers to signaling information for a set of PCM channels In the case of a digital trunk CCS carries signaling information for multiple PCM channels in one or more trunks The signaling data uses time slot 16 Currently the Series 6 servers use one type of CCS Signaling System 7 also known as CCITT C7 Typically Series 6 servers equipped with El trunks as a standard feature will also be equipped with the SS7 Optional Feature refer to the SS7 Integration optional feature documentation for your system for further information Note The Series 6 Server supports SS7 as the only CCS optional feature Channel associated signaling will be available in a future release VoiceMemo and E 1 Applications Digital trunk connectivity in a Series 6 server is available as a standard feature where the system connects to the local switch through El digital trunks A Series 6 server module with digital connectivity has one or more Dual El digital trunk interface cards with one or more voice service cards DSP30 cards FaxMemo cards and so forth Digital and analog trunks can coexist in the same Series 6 server Though not typical such a mix could be implemented in an application where analog trunks exist and a digital trunk is added El Digital Trunk Connectivity E 1 Connectivity Features Model 120
279. in Menu MAIN MENU M Mailbox maintenance CallAgent maintenance R Report generation System maintenance X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND M C R S X gt Enter S to select System Maintenance The system displays the menu SYSTEM MAINTENANCE A B F G H M N 0 P R S T U V W X Automatic Wakeup Automated Receptionist Extensions Floppy backup Resynchronize HIS PMS room status Hard Disk Utilities Manual Message Purge Site Name Code Banner Additional Options Passwords Security Reconfiguration System shutdown Module Status System Verify Event Recorder Network menu Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A B F G H M N O P R S T U V W X gt Enter SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A Restore COS B Backup COS C Configure MWI suppression F Feature COS G Group COS L Limits COS M Restriction COS N Network COS T Tenant COS P Phoneline exceptions R Reconfigure system 0 OneView Administration X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A B C F G L M N T P R O X 11 System Maintenance R to select Reconfiguration The system displays the System Configuration menu Enter R to select Reconfigure System The system displays the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu VOICEMEMO CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU A Activate Configuration B Hardware Configuration C Increase System Hours D Def
280. ine Floating Modules E Modify Active Configuration F Modify Inactive Configuration G Offline Menu H Configure Unified Integration X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A B C D E F G H X Enter G to select Offline Menu The system displays the Offline Menu OFFLINE MENU configuration 0 Currently active configuration is 1 4 Reading configuration records Checking consistency between hardware configuration and OAA VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu A Linegroup Only Applications L Linegroup and RS232 Applications M RS232 Only Applications E RS232 or Smartcard Integrations D Linegroup and Smartcard Integrations T DTMF to PBX Message Lights D Pre Extension Dial Suing P SL I Phone Emulator Menu F Serial Redirect Float Menu G Define Line Groups and Fax Groups N MESA Net Async and TCP IP Menu O CSOIO Integration Menu S Auto Gather System Billing U Unified TCP IP Menu Y Configure Smartcard Table C Report Current Configuration B Duplicate Active Configuration Q Quit Forget Changes X Exit Save Changes OFFLINE MENU 2 Enter B to select Duplicate Active Configuration The system copies the active configuration into the inactive work area then re displays the Offline Menu in the abbreviated single line form Reading configuration records Checking consistency between hardware configuration and OAA MKCONF config I copie
281. ine group assignments for both are handled through the Configuration Manager refer to TR 1903 in the Technical Reference for configuration information Clock Synchronization The El clock can be synchronized to either to a clock recovered from the network receive data RxD signal of one of the incoming trunks or an internal clock reference free running master clock source on the Dual El card Both El carrier interfaces on the Dual El card recover a 2 048 Mb sec clock and 8 kHz frame clock from their respective far end carriers These recovered frame signals go to the on card clock source for use to control the synchronization of the MVIP clock and frame clock to the El RxD from the network An MVIP master clock is the actual source of the clock signals used by all cards common to the MVIP bus Only one master for each MVIP bus is allowed and only one active 8 kHz frame reference The El clock default source is the MVIP master on digital trunk interface card number 1 derived from the trunk 0 El RxD signal that is the only digital trunk interface card present in Model 70 and Model 1201 servers Trunk numbering is O through 3 starting with 0 on the first trunk card Through the configuration manager the reference source to the master clock is selected offline Sources include a free running oscillator on the digital trunk interface card and the network RxD signals that is from trunk 0 and trunk 1 Clock reference switching swit
282. ing information 5 After you have changed the status of the selected trunk to out of service exit to the Main Menu Doc Rev A CP 3155 Page 1 of 1 Place a Digital Trunk Into Service VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Digital trunks can be placed into and out of service OOS for maintenance purposes When a trunk is placed OOS the digital trunk interface card automatically turns off the AIS to the far end to indicate the OOS state of the trunk and restores traffic Step Reference l Reach the Digital Connectivity Status Maintenance Menu Vienu Map 13 2 Place a trunk into service Select E Place trunk out of service Prompt Host holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Trunk number Response The number of the trunk of interest 3 Monitor a selected digital trunk to verify that the trunk is in service Select B Monitor a single trunk Prompt Host holding digital board s Response The number of the module Prompt Reset counters Y N Response type N Prompt Trunk number Response The number of the trunk selected in step 2 The system presents the following statistics display DIGITAL CARRIER STATUS DISPLAY Tue Aug l 12 28 03 1995 TRUNK NO 0 CUR STATE IN SYNC CONFIG CEPT HDB3 CCS CLK REF TRUNKO Error Counters Error Sec 0000 OOF 0004 Slip 0000 AIS 0000 11 10 23 08 01 95 Fail Sec 0000 Bit Err 0000 Lcl Alm Q000 Rem Alm 0000 4 Check the CUR STATE of the trunk to en
283. instructions for modifying the individual components of a template it includes instructions for changing the inter digit timeout and the error action without using the edit templates menu You can change any or all of the values for an application or template The changes will take effect after you exit from the online menu You should always save your application after making any changes The instructions to save your application begin at step 20 Step Reference 1 Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu Aenu Map 13 2 Select the Enhanced In band Integration line group 3 Reach the second Enhanced In band Menu Configure Application Menu Map 12 C Set Name and Description 4 If desired enter a new name for the integration application Select A Application Name Prompt Enter application name Response Up to 10 characters as a name for the application The application will be stored on the disk using this name Note If you are modifying one of the default applications you must change the name in order to save your changes You cannot overwrite a default application using the same name 5 Enter a new description for the application Select B Application Description Prompt Enter application description Response Up to 128 characters as a description of the application C Modify Default Parameters 6 Reach the Edit Parameters Menu Menu Map 13 7 Change the default maximum wait between digits Sele
284. integration will update the room status Page 15 4 0 Text MWI As a new PMS feature it is possible for a guest to find how many if any text messages are waiting at the front desk in the PMS system This is done both upon login and logout of the mailbox Hello lt name gt you have N unplayed messages 2 messages total X text messages at the front desk Press P to play the first message You have 3 messages remaining No prompting done when there are NO text messages This announcement of text messages is controlled with a new FCOS Feature Bit 154 Announce text E Mail message count Installation Use the extra cost feature diskette for both the enabling of the feature and with the Hard Disk Maintenance Menu choice of prompts add to add the following additional prompts Prompt 2131 lt One gt text message lt at the front desk gt Prompt 2182 lt Two gt text messages lt at the front desk gt Prompt 2183 lt Two text messages gt at the front desk Note This prompt can be replaced with an optional in your E Mail System Note Only English prompts support this prompt Page 16 6 0 Console Administration Presently only the Hyatt Encore PMS has control over the Text message count field in the user s mailbox This count can be monitored via the Mailbox Dump utility The new field now shows immediately following the network statistics
285. ional Play Forward All greeting Play Ring No Answer greeting Play Busy Forward greeting Play General greeting Auto Receptionist or Message Center greeting The systemwiill not require callers to enter a passcode it FUUS bit 218 is enabled How It Works VoiceMemo matches the templates to the incoming data After a match has been reached the template performs the action Tips amp Techniques The Action Field entries are case sensitive w is different from W Interactions amp Limitations Line cards will wink automatically when line exception 24 is enabled Turn it off to control winks from the in band templates Note that you can control the time before a wink wn the duration of a wink Wn and the wait after a wink wn See Also Error Action Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Application Description Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu What to Enter A one line description of the application Default On integrations provided by Centigram this value is filled in automatically If you are creating a new set of application templates use this entry to describe the new application How It Works The application description provides more information than the application name allows Interactions amp Limitations This field entry is limited to one line E Tip amp Techniques This field is for the user s record keeping Application Name Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu W
286. ional Features Response Y 16 Load the Module Enable diskette or the optional feature Prompt Insert Optional Feature Setup diskette in the floppy drive Enter lt carriage_return gt when ready Response Insert the diskette then press Enter 17 The server loads the feature and asks if there are more Prompt XXX Optional Feature is now installed Is there another Optional Feature in the system Response XXX represents the name of the optional feature Enter Y if there are more Repeat steps 16 and 17 until the Module Enable diskette and all optional features have been loaded Enter N to end adding optional features and continue with the process 18 If the server is a multi module server or contains a QNET card in Module 1 the following message is displayed If the server is a single module go to step 19 Prompt WARNING Do NOT reset this module Press the reset button on all other modules then Carriage return Response Reset the specified modules and press Enter The server waits for the other modules to boot before it continues Prompt Waiting for the other modules to boot up Updating configuration Please wait Messages are displayed to the screen showing conversion of records if any and configuration information 19 Press Enter to reboot and complete the update Dac Rev A ce 6268 Page 1 of 2 Shut Down a System VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to shut down
287. ions Menu Doc Rev A Perform an Online Optional Feature DP 5 402 Page of 2 Installation VoiceMemo Release 5 04A and later The procedure describes how to install an optional feature with the system online Be sure the Optional Feature Diskette s and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial number s for all disk s in the system WARNING This process causes the system to automatically reboot resulting in an interruption to call processing Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the System Maintenance Menu Map 12 Additional Options Menu 2 Select the add optional feature program Select A Add Extra Cost Feature s Prompt WARNING Adding extra cost features here will result in a complete system shutdown followed by a system restart Enter Y to add extra cost features N to stop Response Y 3 Install the optional feature Prompt Insert extra cost floppy disk in the floppy drive Enter any key when ready Response Insert diskette press Enter 4 Following the installation the system prompts for another optional feature to be installed Prompt Do you want to install another extra cost feature Response Y to install another feature and continue from step 3 N to exit The system automatically shuts down and resets the entire system The system automatically edits and saves the
288. is 4 characters The maximum length of all other fields is 80 characters All actions that begin with Vn where n is a prompt number must be the last action in the template Except for rule 1 you can leave any fields blank All template fields are case sensitive You cannot leave any spaces between the variable length string source or destination number and the termination digit Except for rule 1 1 you can use spaces to enhance the readability of the template Spaces are sometimes required For example an eleven digit source extension followed by the digits 12 must be entered as sll 12 to distinguish it from s1 112 When a different application template set is activated the changes take affect on the next call placed to the system no reboot is necessary Enhanced In band Integration Deriving Mailbox Numbers The source and destination digits sent from the switch do not always match exactly with VoiceMemo mailbox numbers You can use two features with the Enhanced In band option to translate the incoming digits to an arbitrary VoiceMemo mailbox number Digit Absorption Digit Offset Digit absorption shortens the incoming extension numbers to a fixed number of digits For example if your switching system sends seven digit extension numbers and you want to use four digit mailbox numbers you can set the Calling and Called Extension Absorbed Digits fields to 3 to absorb the leading three digits Digit
289. isk Enter the disk id path target lt cr gt to stop or for help Response Enter the disk ID of the primary disk that the new redundant disk is attached to Prompt Now specify the REDUNDANT disk Enter the disk id path target lt cr gt to stop or for help Response The disk ID of the redundant mirror image disk The server configures the disk and repeats the prompt asking for another primary disk ID Continue entering the ID numbers until all the new disk pairs have been configured then press Enter to exit Doc Rev A Cl 6281 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 19 Acknowledge the end of the process Prompt BUILD REDUNDANT DISK DONE ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN TO REBOOT THE SYSTEM Response Press Enter 20 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the Module Maintenance Menu Menu Map 12 2 1 Update the redundancy of the new disk and all other disks that were affected by the CP 7015 shutdown Doc Rev A ce 6282 o l Page 1 of 5 Disk Addition add disk Anica craw Ree GG ona ates This procedure describes how to increase the storage capacity by adding a primary disk to a Centigram Series 6 server This procedure can be performed while the server is online For instructions describing how to add storage redundancy to a server by adding a single redundant disk see CP 628 1 Redundant Disk Addition make redundant FOR THE MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this
290. isk replacement This procedure requires that all data be transferred from the existing disk to the new replacement disk To accomplish this you must reconfigure the existing hard disk as the slave disk and configure the new disk as the master disk This conversion transfers all information from the existing hard disk to the new hard disk and maintains a one to one correspondence between the slave and master Be sure the Service Diskette all Optional Feature Diskettes and the Module Enable Diskette contain the serial numbers for the disk in the server and the disk to be added Note The Model 70 is equivalent to a one module server System prompts for the Model 70 can contain generic software references to hosts or modules WARNING During this procedure the server cannot process calls Centigram recommends that you perform this procedure during periods of low call traffic Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Reference Inventory the Conversion Parts 1 The items listed below are required to complete the conversion process Do not begin the conversion unless you have all of the items Release 6 0A or later already installed on the existing hard disk in your server A Floppy Boot Diskette A new hard disk This hard disk must be formatted by Centigram A new Service Diskette serialized for the new hard disk Prepare the System 2 Call your
291. ispatchers and field service representatives Dispatched message activity can be displayed on a terminal This application is used by customers with dispatch operations units to increase productivity and reduce dispatch costs Call Detail Recorder CDR CDR tracks server activity for billing purposes It records call information such as number of messages received faxes delivered and outdial notifications on a mailbox or system level CDR enables you to bill mailbox users cost centers or specific accounts directly J Configurable Data link and Electronic Set Emulation Integrations Direct Data Link enables the Model 70 to use a separate data communications circuit to receive call processing information from the PBX or CO With Electronic Set Emulation the Model 70 acts as an electronic telephone set to the PBX Both are optional integration features Foreign language Prompts The Model 70 plays all prompts in a maximum of four languages Some of the available languages are English French French hotel Spanish German Portuguese Japanese and Korean MESA Net MESA Net is a digital networking application that enables up to 1500 remotely located Series 6 servers to communicate with each other over 16 simultaneously operating digital links Some of the 1500 remote Series 6 servers must be shared if Administered AMIS is also being used Classes of Service 1 16 Classes of service define the features and capabilities of mailb
292. isplay link parameters This option will display the link number host port name etc that was configured for the link selected Display link status This option will display the enabled status link alive timer etc for the link selected Disable links This option will disable the TNPP link selected The link will not process TNPP packets The link will NOT remain disabled if the system reboots Enable links This option will re enable a TNPP link that has been disabled with the Disable Links option Test links This utility can be used to send a Zero packet ENQ EOT ACK etc on a TNPP link Configuration Adjustment Menu NOTE Configuration changes made here are run time and will NOT be retained if the system reboots Any permanent changes must be made in the Offline TNPP configuration menus Modify RS232 Link Menu In this menu there are several RS232 Link attributes that can be changed during run time The items that can be modified are Pager Systems Supported Number of data bits Number of stop bits Parity After the item s to be changed have been selected the Send changes to TNPPADMIN option must be selected to have the changes take effect Modify TNPP System Information Menu In this menu the following items can be changed during run time Source Address Paging type CAP or ID Inertia System message After the item s to be changed have been selected the Send changes to TNPPADMIN option must be selected to have the c
293. it control or one line card port for DTMF to PBX message wait control Additional line card ports to place any outgoing calls paging fax etc Fujitsu Starlog The Fujitsu Starlog software requirements are e Feature Package F1 or higher The Starlog hardware requirements are e One 1 8SLC port per VoiceMemo Receptionist port l One 1 8SLC port for message wait control Feature Interactions and limitations In Starlog systems with three and four digit extension numbers the PBX will insert a lead digit O to fill three digit numbers out to four digits The EIB software has templates set to accommodate sites with thre amp digit four digit and mixed dialing plans The PBX identifies direct trunk calls by a number which is defined by programming CMC 251 parameter 3 The VoiceMemo system expects that number to be 0000 and expects the leading digit of three digit trunk numbers to be 0 During a conference call Starlog electronic telephone sets do not generate the DTMF tones needed to control the VoiceMemo application The Starlog dialtone timeout is quite short about 5 or 6 seconds All calls from the VoiceMemo system must start dialing quickly Avoid using any pauses in the early parts of a dial string Itis possible to connect two Starlog switches to a single VoiceMemo system Call Fujitsu and Centigram for assistance Use of Receptionist II If the VoiceMemo system has the Receptionist II optional feature in
294. it for ring and then go off hook The system displays the programming as shown in Figure 1 4 The system always shows the first four fields separated by a comma even if some of the fields are blank Data Time out Action Error Action TL RT Next Templates Next 2345 6 Comment Wait for ring and go off hook Comment 3003EiB Figure 1 4 Template Programming Display The second template contains the pattern of DTMF MF tones that indicate a direct internal call Note that the EIB software compares incoming data with this template and with templates 3 4 5 and 6 simultaneously to find the first match Enhanced In band Integration The programming for template 2 is ll Data 00 sx Expect 00 followed by a variable length source extension number followed by Action Play a login prompt for the source mailbox Time out Wait a maximum of second between digits Error Action Hang up if an error occurs Next Templates No next templates required because the action field plays a prompt Comment Direct internal call play login prompt The system displays the programming like this T2 00 sx V1 10 H Next Comment Direct internal call play login prompt Template Execution The Enhanced In band Integration application goes through the templates matching incoming DTMF MF data and performing actions The process always begins with the first template listed in the application Templat
295. ital Loopstart 6 Digital DID or 7 Digital Groundstart Prompt Input your choice for help 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X Response 4 5 6 or 7 as appropriate After you select the signaling type you get this confirmation message The following confirmation message The following channels are set to Digital_xxxx Trunk y Channels a b c d where xxxx is the signaling type you selected in Step 8 above y is the number of the trunk 0 or I and a b c d are the numbers of the PCM channels you selected in Step 15 above LS loop start GS ground start DID direct inward dial and E amp M E amp M 17 Repeat Steps 15 and 16 until you have selected the trunk signaling the for each of the available PCM channels associated with the Dual TI digital trunk interface card that you are configuring 18 Exit back to the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x when you are done 19 At the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x display the current trunk configuration to review the signaling that you have configured for each PCM channel Figure 1 shows a typical trunk configuration list To correct any signaling configuration errors repeat Steps 15 and 16 as required 20 Exit back to the Resource Configuration Menu when you are satisfied with your trunk signaling configuration Doc Rev A DT CP 3150 Page 6 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later S tep Reference Card DUAL TL
296. l number s and the number of system hours ports and links in the server To run additional reports refer to the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 models are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or module always enter 1 or 66 a gt This procedure applies to servers using either SCSI or IDE hard disks Reference 1 Reach the Reports Menu vlenu Map 9 2 Run the System Information report Select System Information Prompt REPORT OUTPUT ROUTING C Console screen P Console with pause 1 Printer A F File A Append to file X Exit no report If you need help later type COMMAND C P I F A X Response C to send the report to the console without pausing P to send the report to the console pausing as the screen fills 1 to send the report to printer A F to send the report to a file on the Series 6 server A to append the report to an existing file on the Series 6 server or X to exit report output options no report You can have one or more serial ports on your server with different devices depending on the configuration of your server The
297. laced on hold c Repeat the test this time inserting a plus after the dialed telephone number many PBXs do not transfer properly if the hangup occurs too fast CD Test Message Indicators 19 Create a mailbox and assign it the correct FCOS to enable the Caller s Menu VoiceMemoa Reference and Configuration 20 Call the mailbox and leave a message Your message should complete under each of Manual the following conditions a You stop speaking and the server hears three seconds of dial tone b You enter a valid DTMF tone c The server hears five seconds of dial tone d You reach the maximum message length allowed by the mailbox LCOS Note The message waiting indicator should activate 2 1 Log into the mailbox and retrieve the message Log out The message waiting indicator should go out Doc Rn A Cl 6201 Page 5 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Test Feature Classes of Service FCOS 22 Create mailboxes with different FCOS 23 Test all features assigned to each FCOS Be sure that appropriate prompts are played and all server responses are correct 24 If while doing the above steps you find a problem check the FCOS programming Pay particular attention to possible feature conflicts Test limit Classes of Service LCOS 25 Create several mailboxes and assign each a different LCOS 26 Test mailboxes to ensure parameters are correct Test Group Classes of
298. lass of Service COS FOME 3 iasan Nadas eat tik Ritu Rel a nR En 5 3 1 Voice Mail Port COS tke adios tc tec edad ts De aedad bcd dst edidelatad leben chabeS a Siacholessda tints 5 3 2 Message Waiting Port COS sasssnsia shia cinisncndasinderinacstnisteatiningmaibousinantanbngating 533 User Extensions COS snis iriaren iaaa 5 4 System Options FOM Mesna mdai 5 5 Station Programming FOr Qu simirdi iinitan 5 6 Non Dial in Trunks Form 145 cs ccscssetscescascsssazductseascizeavsassdscisessatctscesatasaechasnsdiscenede cee tneeiteeaetsuaetaes Di Hunt Groups FOM IT soi anaes essen aces A cia aan aA A a aa in 5 8 system Abbreviated Dial FOr 31 orania 5 8 1 Message Forwarding Abbreviated Dial Number sssssssssssssssssesresnnsnennrnesnnnnennnrrninrinrrnennrnnrnnes 5 8 2 Message Retrieve Abbreviated Dial Number osteitis BOs Message EUV A ce asta cits cavexteats acess teat wh canis di cera vce tek octetai tactical 5 9 1 Message Retrieval Using a SUPERSET sscsssscsescssssssssesssesssessssesssersesstsressternsessiesees 5 9 2 Message Retrieval Using Feature Code sss sss cst Ler ee A gt o gt o OO oo o gt MD gt 2 gt OHO a a aT a Ha A 5 9 3 Message Retrieval by Outside Caller ssisssssisssrrrsserisssrersssrrrsnrrnssrrrsnnrrrsnernnnnrrrsnnrrrenernnt 6 MITEL MAIL PROGRAMMING nssseseseesenenenensnensnsnsnsrsrsnnrernrnrnrnsnenentnsnsnsnsnsnsnensnnnnnnnnnee 6 1 Step 1 Define Line Group in Offline Men
299. lay Busy Forward greeting Play General greeting Receptionist II or Message Center greeting The system will not require callers to enter a passcode if FCOS bit 2 8 is enabled This field tells the VoiceMemo system what action to perform if it receives unexpected data or if a time out occurs Valid entries for the error action are the same as for the Action field This field defines the maximum time in tenths of a second to wait for the next digit before performing the error action Next Templates Comment 1 6 a This is a list of the application templates to compare with the next set of incoming digits The VoiceMemo system simultaneously compares all of the templates listed in this field against each digit and executes the first template to completely match If the VoiceMemo system executes an error action it terminates the call and does not use the remaining templates This field is optional and can contain a one line comment for reference You can put a short description of the template here Enhanced In band Integration Example Templates The first two templates for the AT amp T System 25 integration tell the AIP VoiceMemo system how to recognize and handle a direct internal call The programming for template 1 is Data Wait for ring Action Go off hook Time out Wait indefinitely for ring Error Action Next Templates After ring compare data with templates 2 3 4 5 and 6 simultaneously Comment Wa
300. lboxes have been set up the integration will update the room status Page 8 EECO Trouble Shooting Guide Chapter 4 1 0 2 0 The EECO PMS Integration Trouble Shootina Guide Imolementation The EECO PMS integration within VoiceMemo polls the Property Management System once a minute in order to find out which rooms have been checked in checked out since the last poll This information is used to perform user configurable check in check out procedures to mailboxes on the VoiceMemo system For more information on the VoiceMemo Check in Check out procedures contact Centigram s Marketing Department In the following description the VoiceMemo system will be referred to as VoiceMemo s Protocol 1 After 60 seconds of no activity VoiceMemo sends an ASCII C followed by an ETN 03 2 The PMS replies with the character C within two seconds 3 If no reply is received within the two second window up to two additional attempts will be made by VoiceMemo If there is still no response from the PMS VoiceMemo will return to sleep for 60 seconds and start over at 1 4 Once the PMS replies it then has 6 seconds to start sending room info packets to VoiceMemo for processing These packets are as follows A B C D Stan of record character 2A Room status character A newly checked in V newly checked out Room number followed by the delimiter character semicolon 3B Room numbers are in ASCII rea
301. ld be Problems 10 Make sure the server is plugged in Make sure all cables are installed correctly Check for short circuits or defective peripherals by unhooking each peripheral one at a time and turning on power to the server When the server starts you have isolated the problem Communications Failure Server not answering Call all stations The problem could be associated with a bad calls station port rather than with the Model 70 or Check for loose connections Call is answered but Remove line cord from line card Plug into a single line loop followed by silence phone and call the station Does the phone ring Do you get dial tone of line If not then bad PBX port or bad line cord Replace 4 7 Replacing FRUs What Happens Console Terminal Problems Characters on screen are distorted or incorrect or Characters do not appear Console function is missing a prompt or does not react to entry Server resets terminal s baud rate on restart What to Do Make sure the terminal is plugged in and turned on Check the terminal cable connectors at both ends Check the brightness and contrast controls Check the console speed baud rate and setup Enter Crl Q to clear the Ctrl S Reset the console Restart the server 2 Check that Green LED on backplane is lit If not lit replace backplane fuse Check console terminal settings Reset then try again If still ma
302. le history file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore Remove console task commands file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore Current billing data file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore VoiceMemo configuration file Response Y to restore the information N to not restore the information Doc Rev A CP 5704 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 7 If you answered yes to restoring the VoiceMemo configuration file specify which configuration is to be restored otherwise continue at step 8 Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore VoiceMemo configuration file 0 Response Y to restore configuration file 0 N to not restore configuration file 0 Prompt Enter Y if you want to restore VoiceMemo configuration file 1 Response Y to restore configuration file 1 gt N to not restore configuration file 8 Insert more diskettes as specified by the server The server produces a report to the console when the restore is complete then returns to the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu Doc Rev A cp 6267 Page 1 of 5 Reload a System system reload VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to install the softwar
303. lfunctioning do a floppy disk backup first Then perform an update or reinstall server software using a different set of diskettes Disable auto baud detection on the terminal What Happens 3 5 Floppy Disk Drive Problems DD light does not zo on when drive is in JSE Cannot boot from Floppy disk drive Cannot backup to diskette Update install or increase hours fails Replacing FRUs What to Do Make sure floppy disk drive cables are properly installed l Make sure you are using the correct floppy book diskette 2 Make sure the floppy book diskette is in the floppy disk drive 3 Make sure the floppy disk drive light goes on when you turn on the server 4 Use On Site Diagnostics from the Maintenance from the hard disk menu 5 Turn power off remove the floppy disk drive and install the spare floppy disk drive CP 6222 Turn the power on and try again 6 If the server can be started from the spare floppy disk drive return the original floppy disk drive for repair 1 Diskette might be defective or it might be full Try another diskette 1 Is service diskette write protected If so disable write protection If it still fails call your technical support protection for a new diskette 2 Is the service diskette properly serialized 3 Check the floppy disk drive for failure 4 v Replacing FRUs What Happens What to Do Hard Disk Problems Light does not go on 1 Measure vo
304. line card Check to see if the problem is common to all line groups Check to see if user interface offline menu is set to standard Reload the prompts diskettes Cl 6262 Measure server voltage 12V 5V with voltmeter Voltage should be 10 Make sure fans are running and check ground Make sure power connections are properly isolated from other devices Check the telephone lines and related equipment for irregular activity If Tellabs equipment is present check the shelf voltage ground Check Logfile for errors If errors are found check configuration Check 5 volt power on the last line card on the server Run Diagnose to check for media problems CP 7029 Run System Verify of all records and all speech prompts CP 7001 Use a regular telephone re record the company greeting Do not use the Attendant console FRU Replacement Task list Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Task Procedure Replacing FRUs Remove Install Cabinet Cover naaa EEEIEE KAIERA EIEI LI ELI anes CP 6224 Remove Install Floppy Disk Drive ated CP 6222 Remove Install Hard Disk CP 6221 Remove Install Line Card CP 6220 Note Procedures for building the customer database are in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual For additional information refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the System Implementation Guide For detailed information about optional features refer to the respective
305. list the title of the task that you want to perform and note its high level CP number Flip through the CPs in this chapter until you find the correct CP number Follow the instructions given in the CP A reference column in each CP contains pointers when necessary to supplemental information such as another procedure a technical reference in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual another manual or menu maps Use the tabs included with this binder to find referenced supplemental information that is located within this manual If you need to interrupt a CP and seek reference information first mark the CP with your bookmark or otherwise note down where you are in the CP After you are finished with the reference information return to the CP and continue to execute the steps where you left off 2 1 Installing New Systems Site Selection and Preparation 2 2 The Model 70 is designed to work in a typical commercial environment Physical space requirements are nominal The following information describes general site selection and preparation details For detailed information refer to the System Implementation Guide Choose a site that is e Located near a grounded three pronged power outlet for the United States and Canada this means a NEMA 5 15R outlet for 100 120 volt AC or a NEMA 6 15R outlet for 200 240 volt AC for any other regions please refer to the electrical codes of that region Noise and surge p
306. ll show al the pager systems that have been configured in the VoiceMemo system RS232 Link Menu TNPP Link Number Enter the TNPP link number to be configured Active Enter Y or N TNPP tasks will only be started for links that are active Enter Y to make this an active TNPP link Select Current Serial Port Enter the name of a VoiceMemo serial port that will be used for this TNPP link term1 term2 Sctil etc Pager systems this link supports Enter the pager system s that this TNPP link will support The pager system can only support TNPP Baud rate i Enter the appropriate baud rate for the serial link between VoiceMemo and the Paging Terminal VoiceMemo s built in serial ports can be up to 1200 baud Smartcard ports can be up to 9600 baud Number of data bits This item has a default of 8 data bits which is standard for TNPP Number of stop bits This item has a default of 1 stop bit which is standard for TNPP Parity This item has a default of NONE which is standard for TNPP Display TNPP Serial Ports Select this option to display the TNPP serial port information that is configured for each TNPP link Dispiay System Wide Serial Ports Select this option to display the serial ports that are available on the VoiceMemo system and the applications that are using them TNPP System Information Menu TNPP Link Number Enter the TNPP link number to be configured Source Address Enter the TNPP network source address to be used by VoiceMemo
307. llowing commands to control scrolling To stop scrolling Press Ctrl S To restart scrolling Press Ctrl Q Verify that the system hours entry reflects the new hours for the system Dac Rev A 4 Replacing FRUs How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides troubleshooting instructions and step by step procedures for replacing FRU in a Series 6 Model 70 Additional information is also located in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manualand the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual A task list and Centigram Procedures CPs describing FRU replacement procedures are located at the end of this chapter The task list identifies two procedural levels of CPs a high level Cl and a low level CP A high level Cl provides instructions on how to do overall tasks such as installing a server A low level Cl provides instructions on more specific tasks such as how to install a line card Readers familiar with Centigram servers can use the CPs as a checklist if desired while readers new to Centigram servers can use CPs for step by step instructions After gaining experience with this documentation you can find your own innovative way of using the task list One possible approach on how to use the task list is provided below Using the Task list Select from the task list the title of the task that you want to perform and note its high level CP number Flip through the CPs in this chapter until you find the correct CP number
308. load or stressed R 232C data connection This data is logged when hisrcv gets a two second timeout while trying to read the full packet length from the RS232C serial port The data is thrown away and hisrcv resets to look for a first character AISRCY Received a good mailbox Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a good mailbox number in a check in or check out packet The mailbox was able to be found jy the open account database HISRCV Check in packet x Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a good check in packet The extension number x in the packet is used to read in the mailbox and change the state of the mailbox depending on the hismenu configuration If hissnd has sent hisrev a configuration change message the data stored on disk by bismenu is reread before the changes to the mailbox are made This allows the system manager to change how check in and check out effect mailboxes without a VoiceMemo system reboot HISRCV Check out packet x Normal operation This data is logged when hisrev reads a good check out packet The extension number x in the packet is used to read in the mailbox and change the state of the mailbox depending on the hismeau configuration If hissnd has sent hisrcv a configuration change message the data stored on disk by hismenu is reread before the changes to the mailbox are made This allows the system manager to change how check in and check out effect mailb
309. lock reference when the trunks are connected to channel banks Known Clock Source Series 6 Server Sync to Trunk Digital Trunk 1 Digital Trunk 2 Digital Trunk 3 Channel Rigial Trunk 4 Series 6 Server Switch Sync internal X1893vm6 Figure 2 6 Digital Trunk Clock Synchronization Digital Trunk Online Maintenance The VoiceMemo application has an online maintenance utility for monitoring digital trunk activity and statistics either individual trunks or all trunks changing the clock reference removing trunks from service and looping back trunks toward the facility Trunk activity includes the operational state of a trunk errored seconds frame slips and so forth The display presents trunk status and the configuration of the trunk a useful feature for quickly validating trunk setup The information displayed is dynamic and changes as trunk status changes For example if a trunk is taken out of service this utility immediately reports it to the display Refer to the Centigram Series 6 Diagnostics Manual for further information Configuration Task list Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Task Procedure E 1 T1 Configuration Change the Digital Trunk Connectivity Clock Reference see CP 3 152 Dual El Offline Configuration cl 3151 Dual T 1 Offline Configuration ssnacceccdoeeeanet es CP 3150 Monitor Digital Trunk Statistics ss seesessess
310. ltage 12V 5V with voltmeter Voltage should be when hard disk is in 10 nee 2 Make sure power and signal cables for the hard disk are properly installed 3 Check to ensure the hard disk is properly configured see the Series 6 Communications Server Technical Reference Manual You are receiving 1 Run Diagnose Cl 7029 a Doubly allocated speech blocks or N If Diagnose passes run System Verify CP 5701 If System Verify passes and you are still receiving the messages call Out of range your technical support group message number or Invalid Reference Count You are receiving 1 Check cable connections Self Test 78 error 2 Replace the hard disk CP 6221 Integration Problems Some extensions call Bring up the Configuration Report Centigram Series 6 Diagnostics forward properly with Manual Check that the correct PBX lines terminate in the greeting but some do corresponding Model 70 ports Check that correct line group for is not chosen If a data link is installed check it or run the event line monitor see VoiceMemo Troubleshooting Guide Compare PBX dial strings of working extensions with non working extensions Check extension forwarding targets in PBX Compare Message Waiting indicator types Check that the mailbox is properly configured 4 10 What Happens ine Card Problems oor voice quality on yutside calls Distortion and or chopping of words
311. m When the Dual T trunk interface card detects a loss of frame synchronizationit immediately attempts to reframe A loss of frame is determined to have occurred when the received data framing bits are in error two bits out of four When the loss of frame occurs the digital trunk interface driver the interface control software tracks the length of time the framing is lost and notifies all affected applications of the OOF condition Note A Blue Alarm an AIS from the far end results in an OOF condition Yellow Alarm The Yellow Alarm signal indicates that a DS1 connection has lost frame synchronization When the Dual T Digital Trunk Interface detects an incoming Yellow Alarm the affected T carrier goes into a Carrier Group Alarm state The Series 6 server module sends the alarm when the OOF condition has been detected for a set minimum time threshold The form of the yellow Alarm depends on the framing format in use For D4 framing a Yellow Alarm consists of setting bit 2 in every channel to zero An ESF Yellow Alarm consists of the repeating 16 bit pattern 0000 0000 1111 1111 The Dual T digital trunk interface card generates this pattern on the command of the driver software These are the timing conventions associated with a Yellow Alarm signal 1 The Dual T digital trunk interface detects an incoming out of frame within 335 to 1000 milliseconds 2 The out of frame persists for 2 5 seconds after which a Yellow Alarm is ass
312. m or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Centigram Communications Corporation 91 East Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 REPRODUCTION Licensed users and authorized distributors of Centigram products may copy this document for use with Centigram products provided that the copyright notice above is included in all reproductions PROPRIETARY TERMS The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Centigram Communications Corporation AIP CallAgent CallText Centigram PROSE Speaklit SpeechPlus SPEECH TruVoice VGS VoiceMemo FaxMemo OneView PROSE 2000 Version 1 01992 Centigram Communications Corporation All other brand and product names are claimed or registered marks of their respective companies NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Corporation MITEL The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes Tefocator Network Paging Protocol TNPP installation and
313. m with peripherals idle ESD 15 kilovolts AC power 100 120 volts AC 50 60 Hz 200 Watt 200 240 volts AC 50 60 Hz 200 Watt Product Description Major Hardware Components Cabinet The Model 70 consists of a standard desktop PC cabinet featuring seven available ISA slots two peripheral bays a 200 watt power supply a 486 66 MHz CPU an IDE hard disk a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive and a modular design for quick and easy component maintenance It also features a special Multi Vendor Integration Protocol MVIP ribbon cable bus that connects all line cards allowing them to switch to any shared resource within the module level The server backplane can accommodate up to seven analog or digital adapter cards that total between 4 and 30 ports 24 ports analog130 ports digital Both analog and digital cards can be mixed in the same server The server also accommodates up to two IDE hard disks for a maximum redundant speech storage capacity of 55 hours See Figures 1 2 through 1 4 for details 0 All major hardware components are replaceable and are referred to as field replaceable units FRUs The Model 70 standard configuration upon shipment includes the following major hardware components 1 Cabinet Hard Disk Floppy Disk Drive 1 Line Cards A VT100 compatible terminal administrative console is required for system administration and installation For remote administration an external modem is also required The
314. mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to re create original source mailbox x Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrev is unable to re create original source mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Failed to swap mailbox x with mailbox y Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to swap the source and the destination mailbox records during a move mailbox Thismessage follows the specific reason listed above listing the level of the failure in the swap HISRCV Invalid FCOS request f PMS system error This data is logged when hisrcv receives an invalid FCOS value in a modify FCOS message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Received an lt ENQ gt send lt NAK gt Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged when hisrev reads a first character from the RS232C serial port and it is an lt ENQ gt This choice to send out a C NAK gt is made if VoiceMempo has already sent a message four times and the PMS system continues to reply with an lt ENQ gt rather than the expected positive result lt ACK gt The information is sent by hisrcv to hissnd r HISRCV Received an lt ENQ gt send last msg Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged when hisrcv reads a first character from the RS232C ser
315. mation Menu in the Offline portion of the configuration TROUBLESHOOTING There are several things to check if TNPP pages are not being delivered 1 Check both the Offline configuration data for TNPP and the mailbox s configuration for accuracy a 1 Make sure the RS232 connection between VoiceMemo and the Paging Terminal is correct and that the link communication attributes are correct on each device baud rate etc Check the logfile for any messages that could indicate the problem For example if a mailbox s pager system index refers to a TNPP link configured for CAP paging and the mailbox is configured for ID paging an error message will be logged Make sure that the pager information configured in the mailbox is consistent with the actual target pager Check for any error messages on the Paging Terminal that mighf indicate what the problem is There are utilities available to aid in troubleshooting TNPP problems The utility menu is accessed through the System maintenance menu by choosing Additional Options selection From the Additional options menu choose the Utility Menu and then choose the TNPP Paging Utilities selection These utilities are mainly intended for use by technicians or Centigram TAC for run time troubleshooting It is not necessary to access any of these menus if the TNPP application is working correctly Each menu selection will prompt the user to enter a TNPP link number Link Utility Menu D
316. mber of multiline sets in each PBX and set to set messaging The following multiline sets must be considered in this count SUPERSET 4 SUPERSET 4DN and all SUPERSET 400 series sets NOTE SUPER SET Callback Messages can be flexed in PBX software level MS2007 only All Network PBXs require the following features for full use of Network voice mail Callback functionality from a voice mail hunt group and public network access Public Network Access via DPNSS if necessary MSDN DPNSS Voice MSDN DPNSS Voice III MSDN DPNSS Voice V NOTE Callback Messages from a voice mail hunt group is only available in MS2007 HARDWARE INTERFACE The MITEL MAIL system interfaces to the SX 2000 family of PBXs via Type E amp M trunks analog or digital for call processing and QNS port s for message activation deactivation See Notes below Receptionist Il and VoiceMemo functionality is performed on the same E amp M trunk ports through the use of AAN and Enhanced in band signaling Pager Notification and FaxMemo require additional dedicated ONS port s E amp M ports can be used but this is not practical from a hardware real estate perspective Mitel SX 2000 PABX MITEL MAIL Digital E amp M or Line Cards strapped Analog E amp M Trunk Auto Attendant amp Voice Mail Ports ONS Ports Message Waiting Line Card s strapped for ONS Interface or use Smart Card Interface See Note Pager Notification FaxMemo
317. mo system sends message waiting requests to the switch over a separate line or group of lines equipped with a VMI or AJA Analog Terminal Adapter The Receptionist II application if installed operates on the same line group as the VoiceMemo application The VMI units convert the Norstar digital telephone interface to standard loop start circuits for the VoiceMemo system They also serve as translators passing along the in band codes needed for the integration and message waiting Figure D 1 shows the strategy for Norstar to AJP VoiceMemo integration The Norstar integration templates are set to expect a prefix digit of 6 and a VMI hunt group pilot extension of 239 Since these are probably not correct for your switch you must modify the templates during installation The KSU does not distinguish between different types of forwarded calls It sends the same call information message to the VoiceMemo system regardless of whether the call was forwarded due to a busy no answer or forward all condition This means that mailbox owners cannot use conditional greetings The switch does send the number of the originally dialed extension for multi step forwarding so callers do hear the correct mailbox greeting The AIP VoiceMemo system has two types of message waiting notification that you can use with the Norstar DTMEF to PBX Message Waiting Type 3 uses VoiceMemo line ports to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the KSU Norstar
318. n Doc Rev A DP 7501 Page 2 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference Select B Application Description Prompt Enter application description Response AT amp T System 25 Test Application Define the Incoming Call Template 9 Go to the Edit templates menu Select C Edit Templates Menu 10 Set the current template to 1 Select A Current Template Prompt Current Template Response 1 11 Define the data that Template is to respond to For Template 1 the data is a ringing signal on a line Select B Data Prompt Data Response R detect ringing 12 Enter the action to perform when the data is received Select C Action Prompt Action Response T go off hook 13 Enter the next templates to compare against incoming data Select F Next Templates Prompt Next Templates Response 2345 There is no time out value and no error action associated with this template Define the Direct Inward Call Template 14 Select the next template to edit Select A Current Template Prompt Current Template Response 2 Doc Rev A DP 7501 Page 3 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Reference Step 15 Enter the data to match Template 2 handles the direct inward call type It is identified by a 00 The call type identifier is followed by a variable length calling extension and two symbols Select B Data Prompt Data
319. n CP 7025 Activate New Software CP 7000 CP 7029 Diagnose a Disk With System Online CP 7030 Run Diagnose From Hard Disk CP 703 1 Run Diagnose From Diskette Index A activating new software Cl 7025 add disk progr 6282 adding hard disks CP 6282 phoneline exception CP 7022 redundant hard disks CP 628 1 Administrator s mailbox 1 1 8 AMIS Analog 1 15 Attendant mailbox l 18 Auto Wakeup 14 Automated Dispatch l 16 automatic exit avoiding xiv B backup classes of service CP 5412 floppy CP 5703 Broadcast mailboxes 18 o cabinet description 1 5 installing CP 6224 removing CP 6224 Call Detail Recorder CDR 1 1 6 CallAgent 1 13 canceling phoneline exception CP 7022 cards Ethernet l 1 1 Fax l 11 line 1 10 Serial 16 32 1 11 Smartcards 1 1 1 specialty 1 10 Centigram Service Partners 4 3 Chain mailboxes 1 18 classes of service backing up CP 5412 defined 1 16 FCOS 1 17 GCOS 1 17 LCOS 1 17 NCOS 1 17 RCOS 1 17 restoring Cl 5413 TCOS 1 17 Configurable Data Link 1 16 configuration naming CP 7004 viewing names CP 7005 connectors A 2 console passcode recovering CP 5303 console installing CP 62 16 console tips xiii customer turnover 2 6 customization 1 12 Cut Through paging 14 defaults accepting xiii diagnose program CP 7031 CP 7030 CP 7029 Direct Data Link 1 1 6 disk See hard disk disks running diagnose CP
320. n Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter The number of leading input digits to absorb from the calling extension The acceptable range is from O to 12 digits Default 0 digits How It Works This absorbs a programmable number of digits from the beginning of the calling extension number Some switches and PBXs send digits O 9 before the extension this feature allows those digits to be removed After the digits have been absorbed the remaining digits are passed to the application templates Interactions amp Limitations Do not set this parameter to absorb the digits that identify different call types See Also Called Extension Absorbed Digits Calling Extension Signed Off set Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter The numerical constant to be added to the extension received Default O digits How It Works This feature adds or subtracts a specified offset to the incoming extension number Offsets are added to or subtracted from the extension digits on a digit by digit basis This allows for VoiceMemo mailbox numbers that are different from the switch dialing plan Interactions amp Limitations This adds or subtracts without producing any addition carry or subtraction borrow It is normally used to make a three digit extension into a four digit mailbox number or vice versa For example if an extension is 234 and the signed offset is 1000 the result is 1234 See Also Called Extension Sign
321. n Offline or Online menu Select Q Quit Forget Changes Prompt Quit and forget changes y n Response Y to return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Shortcut Commands You can use the Ctrl Control key or the slash key while simultaneously pressing another key to execute shortcut commands at an Centigram Series 6 server maintenance console Activate a timed out console From the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS GCOS menus return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Menu and save any entries From the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS IQY GCOS menus return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Menu without saving any entries Stop scrolling a displayed report Ctrl S Resume scrolling a displayed report Ctrl Q Return to the VoiceMemo application when a or Ctrl D or type prompt is displayed exit xiv About This Manual Preparing for Hardware Installation Before you begin to install any Model 70 hardware read the following warnings WARNING An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors must be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system Bare covered or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors must have a continuous outer finish that is either green or green with one or more yellow strips The equipment grounding conduct
322. n in the following example Template Data will vary from site to site depending on Feature Access Codes used in the SX 2000 i Press Enter to expand the template menu for each template Press Enter to re display each template and verify your entries Enter Template information as in the following Example Template 1 Data R Action T Timeout Error Action Next Templates 23456789 Comment Incoming Seizure Template 2 Data 62 dx sx 62 programmed FAC for Call Forward Busy External Action V4 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments CFB External Template 3 Data 63i dx sx 63 programmed FAC for Call Forward Busy Internal Action V4 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments CFB Internal Template 4 Data 65 dx Sx 65 programmed FAC for Call Forward No Answer External Action V3 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments CFNA External Template 5 Data 66 dx sx 66 programmed FAC for Call Forward No Answer Internal Action V3 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates Comments CFNA Internal Template 6 Data 64 2150 sx 64 programmed FAC for Call Forward Always Action V1 2150 Voice Mail Hunt Group for Messaging Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates 8 Comments Callback Login Template 7 Data sx i Action V1 Timeout 10 Error Action H Next Templates
323. n the telephone or a broken dial tone using either the DTMF to PBX or RS 232 Message Waiting feature Figure 1 1 shows the information exchanged between the two systems Switch VoiceMemo a System Call information 7 _ Message Waiting Information 3010INT Figure l l Integration Communications Enhanced In band Integration supports the following user features Enhanced In band Integration Mailbox owners can forward their calls to the VoiceMemo system so that callers hear mailbox owners personal greetings Mailbox owners can use conditional greetings to let callers know why they have reached the VoiceMemo system on the phone away from desk and so on Mailbox owners do not need to enter their own mailbox numbers when they call from their own extensions They only need to enter their passcodes to access the system Callers can choose to transfer to the operator or to some other defined answering point or they may dial another PBX extension The optional Receptionist II feature can answer outside calls that reach the VoiceMemo system directly Note Some of these features are not supported by all switches See the appendixes for information about specific switches VoiceMemo Release 5 04 allows Enhanced In band integrations to run on more than one line group This can be used for Different in band switches connected to a single VoiceMemo system A single switch with different protocols conne
324. nce Verify Terminal Compatibility 3 Make sure that the customer s terminal is one of the WI 00 compatible terminals listed in Tables 3 through 7 and set switches appropriately TR 1928 If the terminal is not listed in one of the following tables and it is VT1 00 3 compatible consult the terminal s documentation or TR 1928 in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual to determine switch settings Table 3 Zenith Z 19 Down Note Switches are located inside the cover Table 4 ADDS Viewpoint Parameter Parameter Note Switches are located at the left side of keyboard Bit 8 0 Keyboard Lower Parity 0 Linewrap On Stop Bits 1 Interface RS 232C Data Bits 7 Echo FDX Parity Odd or Even Speed 300 baud Note Switches are located inside the unit SP ADV ADV Power 60 Hz Case Lower Lines Screen 24 Keyboard Lock Disable Cursor Control Enable Clear Screen Disable Local On Protocols 103 202 Off Code Off Ext Off EOT Off Doe Rev A CP 6216 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Table 5 Ti Silent 703 Switch Setting Note Switches are located inside the cover latch Left Open Right Upper Case On Line Local copy Table 6 DECwriter IV Note Switches are located inside the top cover Note Set front panel switch to 300 baud Doc Rev A Step Cl 6216 Page 5 of 5
325. ned off Unplug the system before performing the procedure Failure to do so can result in personal injury and or equipment damage Remove cabinet cover CP 6224 Disconnect the data and power cables from both the hard disk and the floppy disk drive Remove the four screws that secure the carrier to the chassis 6 32 hex head Phillips screws See Figure 1 for details Slide the carrier toward the back of the system freeing the left front tab from the slot on the side of the adjacent drive bay Make sure all the cabling is clear and lift the carrier up and out of the system See Figure 1 for details Alignment 3 1 2 Drive Carrier 113a70d Doc Rev A Cl 6284 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference J Install the Redundant Hard Disk 10 Remove the plastic faceplate cover from the top slot in the front of the empty hard disk cage located next to the floppy disk drive 11 Remove the aluminum faceplate cover from the top slot of the empty hard disk cage 12 Jumper the redundant hard disk as a slave redundant drive If there are two hard disks in one server one must be configured as master and the other must be configured as slave Hard disks are shipped from Centigram configured as master 13 Slide the redundant hard disk into the top slot of the hard disk cage Use the screws that were holding the aluminum faceplate cover to secure the disk in position Ensure th
326. ng Type 3 uses VoiceMemo line ports to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the PBX System 25 e Pager and Message Delivery Message Waiting Type 5 uses one or more VoiceMemo line ports to outdial to external paging systems or telephone numbers System 25 AIP VoiceMemo System i Enhanced in band can Integration Ports and Receptions f ications Trunks pp Station 4 Forwarding 99 09 l Message Waiting Message 5 Reirieval or Sri hai Da at a ee OU DTMF to PBX Circular Message Waiting Hunt Group j Outdials Outgoing a Outdial Ports Paging Fax Trunks Ca Placem ni 3008EIB Figure C l System 25 Integration Structure Hardware and Software Requirements The AIP VoiceMemo system software requirements are Release 5 02 or later Enhanced In band Integration optional feature The AIP system hardware requirements are One line card port for every VoiceMemo Receptionist II line One line card port for DTMF to PBX message wait control or l One serial port for RS 232 message wait control l Additional line card ports to place any outgoing calls paging fax etc c 2 System 25 The AT amp T System 25 software requirements are R2V1 Release 2 Version 1 e R3V1 recommended The System 25 hardware requirements are One 1 ZTN 78 port per VoiceMemo Receptionist II port e One 1 ZTN 78 port for message wait control Use of Receptionist II The System 25 integration allow
327. ng or DIMF to PBX Message Waiting See your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual for details 9 Cross connect phone lines from the Legend to the VoiceMemo phone ports 10 Connect the Legend and VoiceMemo system to same ground point DP 3021 Doc Rev A cr 509 Page 1 of 1 Configure Northern Telecom MTX Integration VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure summarizes the steps required to install and configure the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature to work with the Northern Telecom MTX switch After completing the steps below you will need to program your switch to pass call information to the AIP VoiceMemo system Refer to your PBX manual for additional information Step in band Reference 1 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette 2 Define a line group for the integration 3 Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group i 4 Select the Northern Telecom MTX application for the line group 5 If your VoiceMemo system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks 6 Refer to the Task List in your VotceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach thes
328. ng screws holding it to the carrier by at most one quarter turn Adjust the position as needed Once the floppy disk drive is aligned tighten the two screws again 15 Connect the data cables Doc Rev A CP 6221 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 5114a70d Figure2 Remove the Hard Disk Install the Hard Disk and Disk Carrier Note If you are performing fault isolation and installing the hard disk into a spare cabinet remove the disk carrier as previously described 6 Configure the hard disk if required If there are two hard disks in one server one TR 1923 must be configured as master and the other must be configured as slave If there is one hard disk in the server it must be configured as master Hard disks are shipped from Centigram configured as master If you are replacing one disk in a two disk system be sure to jumper the new disk to match the master or slave disk to be replaced 7 Slide the hard disk into the carrier beside the floppy disk drive and orient in the same direction The component side of the hard disk should be placed toward the carrier rather than toward the floppy disk drive 8 Align the mounting holes so that the front edge of the hard disk is between 0 5 inch to 1 O inches from the front edge of the carrier 9 Secure the hard disk to the carrier with three or four suitable screws 10 Make sure the drives are securely fastened in the carrier 1 1 Position
329. ng to the administrator s mailbox Unauthorized users should not know that they have accessed a special purpose mailbox Instructions for Administration by Phone are located in the VeiceMeme Reference and Configuration Manual System Administration Administrative Hardware Note The customer must provide all administrative equipment You must have a standard V 100 compatible terminal for system administration An outboard modem is also required for remote administration If you plan to administer the Model 70 both on site and remotely an AJB box console or modem active is also required Worksheets 5 4 Worksheets facilitate installation and help you establish a paper trail backup for all work done on the server Worksheets establish system and individual mailbox parameters groups and classes of service special application mailboxes outdial notification operations message waiting indication and integration parameters These worksheets are found in the VotceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual If you do not have the necessary worksheets contact your sales organization System Administration Task list Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Task Procedure System Administration Activate New Software oo cscscsseessescsssceesseerseeesesesseceeseenseeeasees Cl 7025 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exception sesscsssseseesseeneeeseenees CP 7022 Back Up a Class of Service sees Cl
330. ng to the Model of the Series 6 server refer to the following Series 6 server matrix for Model 640 and Model 1208S For Model 1201 type 6 For Model 70 type 3 Model 640 60 ports module maximum Slot No Config No 1 Config No 2 Config No 3 Config No 4 8 DSP8 7 9 Dual TI 0 Dual TI 0 Dual TI 0 Dual TI 0 10 DSP24 0 DSP24 0 DSP8 1 DSP8 1 11 Dual TI 1 DSP24 1 DSP8 2 DSP8 2 12 DSP24 1 DSP8 3 DSP8 3 13 Dual TI 1 DSP8 4 14 DSP24 DSP8 5 DSP8 5 15 DSP8 6 DSP8 6 Model 120S 60 port maximum Slot No Config No 1 Config No 2 Config No 3 Config No 4 4 DSP8 7 5 DSP8 6 DSP8 6 6 Dual Tl 0 Dual Tl 0O Dual T1 0 Dual T1 0 Model 120S 60 port maximum 7 DSP24 0 DSP24 0 DSP8 1 DSP8 1 8 Dual T DSP24 1 DSP8 2 DSP8 2 9 DSP24 1 DSP8 3 DSP8 3 10 Dual Tl DSP24 1 DSP8 4 11 DSP24 1 DSP8 DSP8 5 5 Doc Rev A CP 3150 Page 3 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference DSP8 modules installed only if DSP24 not present Cards can e a mix of DSP8 24s and LC8s so long as total ports per module does not exceed GO Only count number of T channels enabled Fractional T1 Fax ports are not included n the total port count The confirmation message Board DUAL T1 is added to slot x where x istheslot number you added in Step 1 above 3 At the Add Board to Database Menu add the digital trunk interface card Exit back to the Resource Configuration Menu when done Select A DU
331. nges COMMAND A B C D E F G H X 7 Enter A to select VoiceMemo Active Configuration Menu VOICEMEMO ACTIVE CONFIGURATION MENU A Activate Configuration N Name Configurations V View Configurations X Exit If you need help later type COMMAND A NIV X Enter A to activate the inactive configuration Configuration last edited by OFFLINE CONFIGURATION is 0 CONFIG NAME ACTIVE DATE ACTIVATION DATE NUMBER 00 CONFIGURATION 0 NO 04 24 96 15 17 01 CONFIGURATION 1 YES 04 18 96 14 05 04118196 14 06 Activate inactive configuration CONFIGURATION O Y N Y Enter Y to activate Line states A active I idle S stopped for module I slot port 3 0 I 3 lml 32 I Message Indicator Request Queue Lengths active 0 untried 0 retrying 0 calls expected 0 Paging Request Queue Lengths active 0 untried retrying 0 calls expected 0 Wait for message waiting queues to be empty Y Press Enter key here 14 Wait for paging queues to be empty Y Press Enter key here Line states A active I idle S stopped for module 1 slot port 3 0 S 3 1 3 2 1 Message Indicator Request Queue Lengths active 0 untried 0 retrying 0 calls expected 0 Paging Request Queue Lengths active 0 untried 0 retrying O calls expected 0 4 SHUTDOWN COMPLETE cp Copying usr vm config tep init to usr vm config tep init old cp Copying usr vm config tep init 0 to usr vm config tcp init cp Copying usr
332. nging the status of multiple modules change the module attached to the console last The module you specify automatically resets itself and returns to normal operation 5 Repeat step 4 to enable multiple modules Not yajld for Model 120 or Model 70 Doc Rey A CP 5314 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step Disable The Module 6 Shut down the module Select D DISABLE a module Prompt Input a module id in the following range nm n N n Which module Response Enter the number of the module you want to shut down Enter ora for AIP120 70 Note When changing the status of multiple modules change the module attached to the console last Prompt Type disable to confirm your request Response disable The module you specify automatically resets itself and boots in the Maintenance from Hard Disk Menu 7 Repeat step 6 to enable multiple modules Not vaild for Model 120 or Model 70 Doc Rey A ce 5412 Page 1 of 1 Back Up a Class of Service VoiceMemoRelease6 0Aand later This procedure describes how to back up the defined Classes Of Service COS for the system This program should be run in addition to the floppy backup program This program is not a replacement for the floppy backup program Reference Step From the System Maintenance Menu go to the System Configuration Menu Menu Map 2 Start the backup Select B Backup COS Prompt VoiceMem
333. nhanced In Band Integration application to the line group IP 7006 6 Select the Omni integration application that matches your dialing plan three or DP 7010 four digit extensions 7 Use the Edit Parameters Menu to enter the dummy extension for message retrieval calls see step 8 of the Omni instructions below 8 Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to Venu Map 13 find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu Schedule Company Greetings Enable Call Placement Message Delivery 1 Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers Doc Rev A GP 504 Page 2 of 8 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 9 If your VoiceMemo system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band DP 7016 tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks 10 Set the following phone line exceptions for each line in the line group IP 7022 Exception Value _Description 08 10 Dead Line Time out 24 Y Enable Wink Start signaling
334. nk O when you are done From the Configure Menu for T1 E Carrier at trunk 0 reach the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk y Menu At the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk y Menu select the trunk coding format you want The coding type can be either AM1 or AM1 with ZCS zero code suppression From the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x where x is the slot number entered in Step 4 select the PCM channels you want to configure for a type of signaling Select PCM channels as a range for example O 4 or as a series for example 2 4 6 9 15 16 24 C hannel numbers begin at 00 and end at 47 where PCM channels 00 through 23 are carried by trunk 0 and PCM channels 24 through 47 are carried by trunk Select T set Trunk signaling type Prompt Input a range channels O 4 or 1 4 7 and so forth Response The numbers of the PCM channels whose signaling you want to configure Pressing Enter takes you to the Select Trunk Type Menu Doc Rev A cl 3150 Page 5 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 16 At the Select Trunk Type Menu select the signaling associated with the PCM lenu Map 13 channels you selected in Step 15 You can select only the options for digital trunks If you select signaling for analog signaling you get the error message Can not set Analog trunk type to Digital Trunk Select 4 Digital E amp M 5 Dig
335. nly Feature 5 1 Program a Feature Access code for Abbreviated Dial Access Feature 24 e Program a Feature Access code for Send Message Feature 41 Program a Feature Access code for Call Message sender of Oldest Message Feature 42 Class of Service COS Form 3 1 Voice mail lines and message sending line s should each be assigned a unique COS number The following COS options should be enabled for each 53 1 Voice Mail Port COS COS Option 212 Can Flash if Talking to an Incoming Trunk e COS Option 213 Can Flash if Talking to an Outgoing Trunk COS Option 216 Data Security COS Option 238 Override Security 1 COS Option 261 ONS Voice Mail Port 5 3 2 Message Waiting Port COS 1 COS Option 216 Data Security 1 COS Option 220 Do Not Disturb e COS Option 235 Originate Only COS Option 238 Override Security COS Option 259 Message Sending COS Option 261 ONS Voice Mail Port COS Option 265 Voice Mail System Speed Dial Index O 255 NOTE COS Option 265 must be set to the index number programmed in CDE form 31 for message retrieval refer to Section 5 8 2 Message Retrieve Abbreviated Dial Number on page 9 5 3 3 User Extensions COS COS Option 206 Call Forwarding Busy COS Option 207 Call Forwarding Don t Answer e COS Option 208 Call Forwarding External 1 COS Option 231 Message Waiting Setup Bell or COS Option 232 Message Waiting Setup Lamp in the COS of the mailbox holders exte
336. nother optional feature and continue from step 3 N if you are done installing optional features The system automatically edits and saves the configuration files then returns to the Additional Options Menu Exit the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline Menu You see the following prompt Prompt Wait for messagewaiting queues to be empty Response N to continue Doc Rev A Cl 5402 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step 6 The following prompt appears Prompt Wait for paging queues to be empty Response N to continue Exit to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu then go to the VoiceMemo Venu Map 2 Configuration Offline Menu 8 Duplicate the active configuration Select B Duplicate Active Configuration Exit to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu and activate the configuration Select A Activate Configuration Doc Rev A ce 6262 Page 1 of3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Perform an Offline Prompts Update This procedure describes the offline process of updating the prompts on the Model 120 or Model 70 FOR THE MODEL 120 AND MODEL 70 ONLY Some system prompts in this procedure may contain generic references to other multiple module Centigram Series 6 products In such cases shaded areas indicate a difference in operations for the Model 120 and Model 70 The Model 120 and Model 70 are equivalent to one module servers When asked for the number of the host or mo
337. nsion COS Option 245 Abbreviated Dial Access 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 System Options Form 4 Enable System Option 21 Incoming to Outgoing Call Forwarding Station Programming Form 9 Program the ONS lines and give the appropriate COS Voice mail ports must be in a separate COS from the message waiting ports Non Dial h Trunks Form 14 If required enter the Voice Mail Port Hunt Group Access Code in form 14 for DAY N1 and or N2 for trunks to go to Receptionist 4 Hunt Groups Form 17 1 Program all VoiceMemo ONS lines in a hunt group and give them a Hunt Group Access code Program the Message Waiting line s in a hunt group and give them a Hunt Group Access code NOTE Message Waiting Hunt Group is not the same as VoiceMemo ONS Hunt Group System Abbreviated Dial Form 31 Integration is based upon the use of system abbreviated dial numbers This eliminates several dialing steps involved in sending and retrieving voice mail messages Special codes entered in the System Abbreviated Dial Form CDE form 31 allow the caller to customize the PABX operation to suit the operation of the particular voice mail system The MITEL MAIL Enhanced In band application described in this document is set up to expect three pieces of information delimited by a character These digits are sent as DTMF tones by the PBX after the voice mail port answers a call sent to it The three fields expected are
338. nsseeeeseseaeses 4 3 Before You Starts rassin oreo e a a a E E a a Sa dees 4 4 Servicing and Expanding the Model 70 ssssssessssesrssssrrsessrserrsrssrrsessreersree 4 4 Troubleshooting Overview dvsie 08e detesssns eeteassnd ela annA OEA ERNO EARANN T EARE RI 4 5 General Troubleshooting Procedure sessereeeessetresserrerrerrsrrressrrersrerersee 45 Specific Troubleshooting Procedures ccccccccsseece nsec ee eecee ne eeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 4 7 Task List and Procedures 5 System Administration How To Use This Chapter abaviadcedd tubedaausitelernaudavsiadg ne eetneesseaeteeee 5 1 Using the TaskList ececee eee ete not Ak bale Sul EAEE ee E ee ere 5 1 System Administration s e Wath deesstwds ila suoedasnnanaansavacateasncqunenesanantieene D 2 Administration by Phone lt 24 s ca 4 c cuateaaaesccncedcsedsbrsebtvassvaneeluasvuetectevestoessslevesess 5 3 Administrative Hardware ssneserensssenscsscsnennnnsanegsestarsvscessaecaenentensecgunes 5 4 Worksheets ccecceuceceeeeeeeeeeues EC E A ENE E E E 5 4 Task List and Procedures Appendix Public Telecommunications Network Connection Model 70 Connections spostare ot kirse np oE EEN T REEE sh EEEN ATOE tanu meth am A 1 Shielded Cable Sernin nin naa A E Dewees A 1 Jack Py PSs crs sazess n a A E T A E AA A 2 Connectors and Loads eniin n peas A 2 Responsibilities of the Equipment Owner 0
339. nter one of the names thenrespond prompts add Load the first prompts diskette into the server Do not load the prompts setup diskette When prompted Insert the Ist diskette containing the prompts and press return Press Enter When prompted Wait until drive light is out insert language disk 1 hit CR when ready Press Enter Do not change disks When prompted for each additional diskette remove the previous one and insert the next one in sequence Press Enter when the correct diskette is inserted When the last diskette has been loaded the server displays the number of directory entries pointer sectors and speech blocks used by the prompt partition You are then returned to the Off Line Maintenance Menu The only prompts that do not need to be enabled are the full and hotel sets of American English prompts mnemonic version non numeric All other prompts must be enabled as described in the next two steps However you can also enable prompts online as described in section 5 2 Online Enable Skip to step 13 if installing American English mnemonic full set otherwise continue Page 6 Enable the prompts When prompted Enter one of the names enter add extracost The prompts are Enter y to addextra cost features N to stop N Enter Y to enable the prompts When prompted Insert Extra Cost SETUP disk in the floppy drive Enter lt carriage return gt when ready Insert the Prompts setup disk and press Ent
340. nter their mailbox number when they wish to retrieve their messages Users should not dial the VoiceMemo disectory number Doc Rev A Configure Fujitsu Starlog Integration Step cr 505 Page 1 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure summarizes the steps required to install and configure the Enhanced In band Integration feature to work with the Fujitsu Starlog PBX Refer to the appendixes for reference information about this integration There are two sections to installing this integration installing and configuring the VoiceMemo software and configuring the Fujitsu Starlog PBX Refer to your Starlog documentation for help when configuring the PBX if necessary Reference CD Configure the VoiceMemoSystem l 2 3 4 5 Install the Enhanced In band Integration optional feature diskette IP 5402 Define a line group for the integration i DP 6028 Assign the Enhanced In Band Integration application to the line group IP 7006 Select the Starlog integration application for the line group IP 7010 If your VoiceMemo system has Release 5 03 software set the number of in band DP 7016 tasks per module to 20 of the number of in band ports in each module If your system has Release 5 04 software the system automatically configures the required number of tasks Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integra
341. nts map directly to the physical slot into which the cards reside In addition to this configuration the trunk channels are assigned as ports in line groups in the same manner as for a server equipped with analog trunks Procedure CP 3150 lists the steps for configuring a Dual T1 digital trunk interface card Slot Assignment The Dual T Digital Trunk Interface card s are assigned and factory installed in specific physical slots in the Series 6 server backplane The system software requires these slot assignments to identify the hardware resources present in the backplane The configuration process for installing the digital trunk interface cards includes the following Configure the cards refer to TR 1905 in this volume 2 In the Physical Configuration Menu configure the slots assigned to the cards 3 In the Offline Menus continue the configuration needed by the applications The factory installs the digital trunk interface card in these slots in Model 70 Model 120 and Model 640 Model 640 Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number 2 13 Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Module Number Input Output Address Signaling 2 14 es ee E ee Model 70 and Model 120 supports only one digital trunk for a maximum system capacity of 24 PCM voice channels The Model 120S and the Model 640 module each supports up to 60 PCM voice channels between two digital trunk interface cards You assi
342. nual If you need to interrupt a CP and seek reference information first mark the CP with your bookmark or otherwise note down where you are in the CP After you are finished with the reference information return to the CP and continue to execute the steps where you left off 3 1 Upgrade and Update Task list Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Task Procedure Upgrading and Updating Systems Offline System Software Update aaan ncccccccccnonnnnnnnnnn Cl 6483 Install Optional Feature With System Online CP 5402 Perform an Offline Prompts Update Cl 6262 Perform an Offline Software Update occ cesessssseseceesseseeceeseeeeeseeeeees CP 6263 Perform an Online Increase System Hours eesecsssscscscseseeseceeseeseeeeens CP 702 1 Note Procedures for building the customer database are in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual For additional information refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the System Implementation Guide For detailed information about optional features refer to the respective optional feature manual Updates to procedures and the Model 70 are issued to the field in Centigram s Notices to Installers You should add them to this guide as appropriate For questions contact TAC before starting any of these procedures Be sure the following tasks have been completed before attempting any of these procedures System is stable and free of errors and corruption
343. null seed HISRCV Received a Resynchronize Normal operation This data is logged when hisrev reads a good resynchronize packet from the RS232C serial port HISRCV Received a Check in or Check out Normal operation This data is logged when hisrev reads a good cheek in or check out packet from the R 232C serial port HISRCV Received a Message Waiting Status Normal operation This data is logged when hisrev reads a good message waiting status packet from the RS232C serial port HISRCV Received a Move Mailbox Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a good move mailbox packet from the RS232C serial port HISRCV Received a Modify FCOS Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a good modify FCOS packet from the RS232C serial port HISRCV Received a Text Message MW Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcv reads a good text message MW packet from the RS232C serial port a HISRCV Received a bad packet Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged when hisrcv reads a bad packet from the R 232C serial port The information is sent by hisrev to hissnd The partial packet is displayed in a preceding message showing what data has been received complete or incomplete HISRCV Received lt STX gt and then a timeout Link failure test link protocol using data scope If error is not consistent suspect PMS system over
344. number 1 is RESYNC Message number 2 is ROOM OCC Message number 3 is ROOM VAC Page 11 5 0 6 0 7 0 Message number 4 is MESSAGE WAITING STATUS Message number 5 is BAD MAILBOX ADDRESS Message number 6 is SEND MESSAGE WAITING STATUS Mailbox Re synchronization With the HIS PMS integration an additional menu choice G has been added to the System Maintenance Menu to allow the system administrator to re synchronize the state of all the mailboxes being supported by the PMS Messaae Waiting The HIS PMS integration supports message waiting notification through the PMS system A message waiting type has been added to the system called HIS PMS See Chapter 6 section 3 for an example of this Diagnostic information See Appendix A for detailed diagnostic information available through the error log file the CDR file and the system console Page12 Hyatt Encore Configuration and Trouble Shooting Chapter 6 1 0 Encore Configuration and Trouble Shooting Introduction The Hyatt Encore PMS is an extra cost feature enhancement that allows integration between VoiceMemo and the Encore Property Management System Under this integration it is possible to not only automatically assign vacant and occupied mailboxes to guests checked in or out but it also allows for room reassignment and text message waiting indication The VoiceMemo to Hyatt Encore PMS Integration is designed to offer the Hotels a reliable and simple way
345. o Selective Backup Insert Backup Diskette 1 in floppy drive Enter Y when ready N to quit Response Insert the floppy diskette and press Y to continue N to quit 3 If the diskette has not been formatted in QNX format the diskette Prompt Invalid backup diskette need formatting Enter Y for formatting or N to quit Response Y to format the diskette N to abort the backup process The system formats the diskette if required then proceeds with the backup 4 Insert more diskettes as specified by the server 5 Store the diskettes in a safe location Doc Rev A cl 5413 Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0 and later Restore a Class of Service This procedure describes how to restore the defined Classes Of Service COS for the server This program is not the same as the restore program found on the Maintenance From Hard Disk Menu Step Reference 1 From the System Maintenance Menu go to the System Configuration Menu Vlenu Map 1 2 Start the restore Select A Restore COS Prompt VoiceMemo System Configuration FCOS and LCOS Restore Program Insert Backup Diskette 1 in floppy drive Enter Y when ready N to quit Response Insert the floppy diskette and press Y to continue N to quit The server verifies the diskette 3 Specify the types of Classes of Service to be restored Prompt Do you want to restore the FCOS s Response Y to restore N or Enter to not restore Prom
346. oblems may arise Run System regularly Verify monthly Refine your isolation process 1 Runa Logfile Report to see if there have been an unusual number of system errors or resets Do not delete the Logfile 2 Examine the Logfile for errors See if you can find patterns that indicate a single trouble source 3 Refer to the specific troubleshooting procedure 4 Run the Diagnose a Disk With System Online program CP 7029 This program should detect most problems with the hard disk 5 If the Diagnose a Disk With System Online program passes run the Run Verify With System Online program CP 7001 Check all records and all speech and prompts 6 If the Online System Verify program passes inform users that you are going to shut down the server Give users a reasonable amount of time to log out of the server 7 Shut down the system CP 6268 4 6 Replacing FRUs et Specific Troubleshooting Procedures The following troubleshooting procedures are groups by topic Application Software 1 Make sure all cables are installed correctly Problems sae Verify that server hardware configuration is set correctly Refer to the Centigram Series G Diagnostics Manual for assistance Verify server software is properly configured for the server Try to reload the software If this fails contact your technical support group for additional instructions Power Supply Measure voltage 12V 5V with voltmeter Voltage shou
347. ods This approach consists of four phases looped as one continuous process Verify the Problem Ask what has gone wrong Have any changes been made to the server Isolate the Faulty Unit Use a process of elimination Repair the Problem Make sure you determine how and when to make the repair Verify the Repair Use diagnostic tools to confirm In other words first you need to find out exactly what the problem is Then you must consider the cause s of the problem Finally you have to repair the server and check your work To determine possible causes you might pose the following questions 4 5 Replacing FRUs Q uestion Significance Did the server fail during hours If yes you could suspect software or of high peak traffic application problems or PBX problems Was the server working and then If yes you could exclude server software suddenly failed during low traffic problems hours Did the server fail after a If yes suspect defective new hardware a hardware expansion or upgrade hardware configuration problem a hardware incompatibility problem or an installation problem Are the problems intermittent If yes there could be a loose cable or other random component failures Has the company hired new If yes the server might be exceeding employees original capacities Have users been properly If no problems may be caused by misuse trained of the server Has the server been maintained If no pr
348. odule server When asked for the number of the host or module 66 always enter 1 or a All SCSI references in this procedure are for SCSI servers only Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual 5 tep Reference Introduction Primary drives in the Series 6 server store configuration data and voice message information Configuration data can be preserved by doing frequent backups However voice message information is so transitory that it is not possible to backup the disks with enough frequency to maintain their integrity To preserve the integrity of voice messages a different method must be used The Series 6 server allows the customer to install mirror drives to provide redundancy of primary drives The program to add a redundant disk is called Make Redundant There are two methods for accessing the Make Redundant program 1 From the Hardware Configuration Menu 2 From the Floppy Boot and Service Diskettes This procedure describes both methods Centigram recommends running the Make Redundant program from the Hardware Configuration Menu Both procedures prevent the system from processing calls during the upgrade Before you implement the upgrade please follow these guidelines Check that the serial numbers imprinted on the labels of the Service Diskette and the Optional Feature Diskette coincide with the serial numbers of the prima
349. of relaying communication between the voice messaging system VMS and the property management system PMS It is designed to work with VoiceMemo Release 5 00 and later releases of software This integration provides 1 1 Check In Automatic check in of a guest mailbox upon arrival PMS to VMS message 1 2 Text Message Notification VMS notification of number of text messages in the PMS 1 3 Message Waiting Indication Automatic voice message waiting indication controlled by the PMS 1 4 Played Message indication Automatic signaling from the VMS to the PMS when a message is played 1 5 Multiple Classes of Service Allows the automatic check in of guests with different classes of service which may include different language prompts 1 6 Check Out Automatic check out of a mailbox by disposing of any recorded messages recorded name ii any or recorded mailbox greeting if any a Page 13 1 7 Mailbox Modify The Hotel should be able to modify the mailbox number of a particular guest without losing any of the recorded information in that mailbox 2 0 Configuration See Chapter 2 for initial configuration information Once the application has been setup it is also necessary to access the following Menus SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E Configure PMS integration F Feature COS G Group COS L Limits COS N Network COS P Phoneline exceptions R Reconfigure system V Configure Video Dispatch W
350. oiceMemo System integration A 2 template execution 1 Y template pattern matching 1 8 template programming display 1 6 Fujitsu Starlog Enhanced In band integration A 1 GP 505 feature interactions A 3 integration limitations A 3 integration requirements A 3 template specifications A 4 with Receptionist II A 3 G grounding DP 302 1 in band signaling definition 1 1 information packet 1 3 sample 1 3 install optional features DP 5402 templates 1 12 inter digit time out See time out L line groups assigning Enhanced In band application DP 7006 defining DP 6028 M mailbox numbers matching to extensions 1 10 DP 7007 menu options action 2 2 DP 7501 add exception DP 7022 add extra cost feature s DP 5402 add lines to current group DP 6028 application description 2 3 DP 7501 application name 2 3 DP 7501 Index 2 backup application 2 3 called extension absorbed digits 2 4 DP 7007 called extension signed offset 2 4 DP 7007 calling extension absorbed digits 2 5 DP 7007 calling extension signed offset 2 5 DP 7007 cancel exception DP 7022 comment 2 6 current template 2 6 DP 7501 data 2 6 DP 7501 drop lines from current group DP 6028 duplicate active configuration DP 6028 error action 2 7 host number 2 8 DP 7016 install application 2 9 DP 70 10 list applications 2 9 DP 70 10 MF enable 2 10 next templates 2 10 DP 7501 number of in band tasks on this ho
351. oiceMemo will make before it logs an error message An ENQ retry occurs when VoiceMemo sends an ENQ and does not receive an EOT from the Paging Terminal If the link goes down an error message will be logged every 6 minutes Display TNPP Link Timing Parameters Select this option to display the timing information that has been configured for each link Display TNPP Pager System Configuration Select this option to display the TNPP configuration information for active links Verify TNPP Pager System Configuration Select this option to check a TNPP link configuration for missing information After this option is selected enter the TNPP link number to be verified Mailbox Configuration Mailbox configuration information for TNPP is entered after the message waiting type of Pager is selected and a pager access code index the TNPP Pager system is assigned to the mailbox If the WoiceMemo system has the TNPP extra cost feature enabled there is a prompt after the Pager system is assigned Mailbox Configuration Steps Create a new mailbox or modify an existing one At the Message waiting type prompt enter 5 for Pager Note that Message waiting type 1 or 2 may be used for TNPP Paging Message waiting type 3 may NOT be used At the Pager access code index prompt enter the TNPP pager system that was configured in the Offline TNPP configuration For creating a mailbox or adding TNPP to an existing mailbox At the Confi
352. on Called Extension Absorbed Digits Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter The number of leading input digits to absorb from the called extension The acceptable range is from O to 12 digits Default 0 digits How It Works Some switches and PBXs send digits O 9 before the extension this feature allows those digits to be removed After the digits have been absorbed the remaining digits are passed to the application templates Interactions amp Limitations Do not set this parameter to absorb the digits that identify different call types See Also Calling Extension Absorbed Digits Called Extension Signed Offset Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter The numerical constant to be added to the called extension received Default 0 digits How It Works This adds or subtracts offset to the called extension Offsets are added to or subtracted from the extension digits on a digit by digit basis This allows for VoiceMemo mailbox numbers that are different from the switching system dialing plan Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Interactions amp Limitations This adds or subtracts without producing any addition carry or subtraction borrow It is normally used to make a three digit extension into a four digit mailbox number or vice versa For example if an extension is 234 and the signed offset is 1000 the result is 1234 Calling Extension Absorbed Digits Location i
353. on S System maintenance X Exit COMMAND M R S X X Users will view the following Console shutdown Hit ctrl Z to reactivate Extra cost feature is now installed REBOOT TO START OPERATION At this point the VoiceMemo system will automatically REBOOT The PMS Integration is now installed and must be and configured completely see appropriate following chapter Page 4 Configuration of EECO and HIS Integrations Chapter 3 The EECO and HIS PMS Intearation Set Up ACCESS The PMS menu is accessed off of the Reconfiguration menu that is accesses from the System Maintenance Menu The menus are as follows MAIN MENU M Mailbox maintenance R Report generation S System maintenance X Exit Enter letter in to execute command When you need help later type COMMAND M P S X S SYSTEM MAINTENANCE A Automatic Wakeup B Automated Receptionist Extensions D Display modem passcode E Enable modem serial port F Floppy backup G Re synchronize HIS PMS room status H Hard Disk Utilities L tights test M Manual message purge N System name P R Passcode Reconfiguration S System shutdown D Time and date U Utility menu V Call Detail Recorder W Network menu X Exit Page 5 COMMAND Enter letter in to execute command When you need help later type A B D E F G H L M N P R S T U V W X R SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E Configure PM
354. on usability and increased functionality using MS2007 MR2 N11 4 0 or greater In older software loads Enhanced In band signaling can be used but is limited in functionality and complicated to implement REQUIREMENTS MTEL MA L includes Receptionist I and Enhanced In band signaling as part of the basic package PBX software MS2007 MR3 N16 1 1 is required for the Digital E amp M T1 E amp M interface Minimum software load of MS2007 MR2 N11 4 0 is required to support full functionality The following feature packages must be purchased on the PBX as required Advanced Analog Networking e Required on the Voice Mail PBX for Enhanced In band signaling or Direct Subscriber Login NOTE 1 Software load N1 1 4 0 MR2 provides enhancements to AAN for ease in integrating to M TEL MAIL for Enhanced In band Signaling 2 AAN can only be used for message retrieval not Forwarding in software versions older than N11 4 0 Answer Plus MCD e Required to make use of the System Reroute timer in station COS The System Option timer is used otherwise This timer is used only for 2nd alternative rerouting Flexible Dimensioning e If callback messages are applied from voice mail the maximum number of SUPERSET Callback Messages should not exceed the limit controlled by the purchased dimension level MFRD This should be considered separately on remote PBXs in a Network Consider the maximum nu
355. on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs A 3 List of Centigram Procedures Page 1 of 3 Procedure Chapter Number Number Title CPs Called Called By CP 1340 Run a System Information Report CP 6590 Cl 6483 CP 5303 Recover a Lost Console Passcode CP 5304 View or Edit History File CP 6483 CP 5313 View Hard Disk Operational Parameters CP 5314 Change Module Status From Hard Disk CP 6281 CP 6282 Cl 5402 Install Optional Feature With System CP 6483 Online CP 5412 Back Up a Class of Service cl 5413 Restore a Class of Service CP 5414 Set the System Time and Date CP 5415 Set the Site Name Banner and Code CP 5701 Run Verify With System Offline CP 6483 CP 5703 Do a Floppy Backup CP 6592 CP 6483 CP 5704 Do a System Restore system restore CP 6201 Test Basic Telephony Functions CP 6220 CP 6590 CP 6262 CP 6215 Install Printer CP 6590 CP 6216 Install Console CP 6590 Cl 6220 Remove Install Line Card Cl 6224 CP 6221 Remove Install Hard Disk Cl 6224 CP 628 1 CP 6592 CP 6282 CP 6592 CP 6222 Remove Install Floppy Disk Drive CP 6224 CP 6224 Remove Install Cabinet Cover CP 6220 CP 6221 CP 6222 CP 6281 CP 6282 CP 6284 CP 6592 CP 6258 Check Installation Quality CP 6590 List of Centigram Procedures Page 2 of 3 Procedure Number CP 6261 CP 6262 CP 6263 CP 6267 CP 6268 CP 6270 CP 6281 CP 6282 CP 6283 CP 6284
356. or all users must now be created on the MITEL MAIL system If conditional greetings are to be used ensure that FCOS given to mailboxes include feature bit number 161 Conditional Greetings 30 6 5 Test the Application 1 Set up a telephone to call forward on Busy or No Answer to the abbreviated number chosen to send callers to voice mail Refer to Section 5 8 1 Message Forwarding Abbreviated Dial Number on page 8 2 Call the telephone and let it ring No Answer gt Check that the call goes to voice mail and the correct No Answer greeting plays 3 Take the telephone off hook to put it in Busy condition and call it again gt Check that the call goes to voice mail and the Busy greeting plays 4 Test the message retrieve functionality by dialing the abbreviated dial number chosen to retrieve messages refer to Section 5 9 Message Retrieval on page 9 NOTE Message waiting lamp setup is not described in this document it is a separate MITEL MAIL application The message lamp indicator must be lit on the set to allow use of the SUPERSET Message key or Call Sender of Oldest Message Features described in Section 59 1 Message Retrieval Using a SUPERSET and Section 5 9 2 Message Retrieval Using Feature Code 31 7 CONSOLE AND REMOTE ACCESS TO MITEL MAIL This procedure shows how to connect the console and the modem to the MITEL MAIL system 7 1 7 2 Console Setup The console uses a 9 to 25 pin NUL
357. or is to be connected to ground at the service equipment WARNING The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system must be of a grounding type and the equipment grounding conductor serving these receptacles must be connected to earth ground at the service equipment DANGER Never install telephone wiring during a lighting storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone lines has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines About This Manual Protecting Your Equipment From Damage a CAUTION Many of the Model 70 components are easily damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD or rough handling line cards CPU cards and hard disks are particularly susceptible to damage Unless instructed otherwise observe the precautions listed below and in individual sections during the handling of all components If you follow these simple instructions you will reduce the risk of equipment trouble down time and customer dissatisfaction Wear a grounded wrist strap while handling components Doing so protects the components from electrostatic discharges ESD Do an orderly shutdown of your server before turning its power off Refer to Cl 6268 Shut Down a System for instructions Removing o
358. ork clock is always the clock reference Clock reference switching switchover is hitless that is the clock reference can be manually or automatically switched over to a second source without affecting traffic For digital trunk connectivity implementations where both trunks terminate in a single Dual T Trunk Interface card the Series 6 server provides automatic clock source switchover in the event of trunk failure On detecting a failure of the trunk from which the clock source is derived the Dual Trunk Interface card automatically switches over to the second digital trunk if the trunk in operation on the card When connecting to channel banks the Series 6 server module is the clock reference In this case all T links to a particular channel bank come from the same Series 6 server module Because clock references are independent for each Series 6 server module the server can connect to different COs a CO PBX combination or different PBXs These different connections however must go to different Series 6 server modules and must be the primary clock reference within their respective modules Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity TI Digital Carrier Events When the Dual T digital trunk interface card detects failures on the trunk receive data RxD When f amp iflures persists for more than 2 5 seconds the VoiceMemo carrier alarm function automatically generates a remote alarm to the far end For such failures the carrier al
359. orrect RS 232 cable for your modem Table 2 lists all signals present at the serial port connectors Note The Model 120 is shipped with a 9 pin D type female console cable which connects to serial port 2 The other end of this console cable is a 25 pin D type female connector To connect to a terminal personal computer modem or printer you need an RS 232 cable with a 25 pin D type male connector at one end of the console cable The other end of the RS 232 cable varies depending on the make and manufacturer of the device you are connecting to Table 2 Modem Pin Assignments Model 120 Side Modem Side Signal Name 9 Pin 25 Pin Pin 4 Pin 5 Carrier Detect Pin 2 Receive Data Pin 3 Transmit Data Pin 6 Data Terminal Ready Pin 7 Signal Ground Pin 20 Data Set Ready Pin 8 Request To Send Pin 8 Clear To Send No Connection Ring Indicate Doc Rev A Cl 6270 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step CD Connect Modem 2 Connect the 9 pin cable connector to Serial port 2 designated S2 in the VoiceMemo software 3 Connect the 25 pin cable connector to the modem Configure the modem software in the Console Serial Port Setup option in the System Maintenance Additional Options Menu 4 Test modem as recommended by the manufacturer s documentation Doc Rev A cp 6284 Page 1 of 3 Install Redundant Hard Disk VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes ho
360. ou check all other system diskettes to ensure that their serial numbers match Doc RN A CP 6282 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Prepare the New Disk 1 Determine how to jumper the new hard disk as an IDE slave disk TR 1923 2 Jumper the new hard disk If there are two hard disks in one server one must be I R 1923 configured as master and the other must be configured as slave If there is one hard disk in the server it must be configured as master IDE hard disks are shipped from Centigram configured as master CD Prepare the System 3 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Menu Map 8 4 Verify that all disks are in sync Select D Display Status of all SCSI Buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing the status of all disks Verify that all disks show the status as ENA Press Enter to exit 5 If any disk is out of sync with its redundant mate update the redundancy CP 7015 6 Execute a system shutdown Change the status of the modules based on which CP 6268 program you are using If running from the Hardware Configuration Menu leave all modules enabled Install the Disk 7 Turn off the system power and remove the server cabinet CP 6224 Ch 4 8 Change the hardware adding the new disk CP 6221 Ch 4 9 If you are running the Add Disk program from the Hardware Configuration Menu go to step 10 If you are running the Ad
361. ound to the Rack Mount VoiceMemo System DP 5402 Perform an Online Optional Feature Installation DP 6028 Define a Line Group for Applications DP 6034 Add or Delete Receptionist II Extensions DP 7006 Assign the Enhanced In band Integration Application to a Line Group DP 7007 Configure In band Digit Absorption and Signed Offset DP 7010 Install an Enhanced In band Integration Template Set DP 7011 Modify an Enhanced In band Integration Application DP 7016 Set In band Module Numbers and Number of Tasks DP 7022 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exception DP 7023 Enable Conditional Greetings DP 7501 Create a New Enhanced In band Integration Procedure Number list of General Procedures Page 1 of 1 Release Number Configure an Enhanced In band Integration Configure Omni Integration Configure Fujitsu Starlog Integration Configure AT amp T System 25 Integration Configure Northern Telecom Norstar Integration Configure AT amp T Legend Integration Configure Northern Telecom MTX Integration Task List Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and 5 04A and later Enhanced In band Integration Configure an Enhanced In baud Integration se e eeesrereeeeeesreerereereeee GP 502 Configure AT amp T Legend Integration ssss ssssssssseneeenseneenseseseseeee GP 508 Configure AT amp T System 25 Integration csesseecseesseeseesssnee G1 506 Configure Fujitsu Omni Integration ses eesseessersssessseesstessseeeseee
362. ower and boot from the diskette The server displays the self test results 15 The server reads from the diskette then requests the service diskette Prompt Insert floppy SERVICE 6 00 and hit return Response Insert the diskette and press Enter Doc Rev A CP 6281 Page 4 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 16 The server reads from the diskette and asks which process you want to execute Prompt Enter one of the names Response make redundant 17 The server reads from the diskette and issues a warning about the pending process Prompt WARNING REDUNDANT PROGRAM REDUNDANT program is used to make a primary disk have a mirror image secondary disk Any data on the primary disk will also be recorded on the secondary disk You must have the Redundancy Extra Cost Option installed to use this feature WARNING YOU MUST DISABLE ALL THE OTHER HOSTS TO USE THIS OPTION IF YOU HAVE NOT DONE SO REBOOT THIS HOST AND DO IT NOW IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO CONTINUE THEN RE BOOT THE SYSTEM OTHERWISE ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN Response Press Enter The Warning is for a server currently running Release 6 00 since most servers running these versions can run the Make Redundant program online If you do the procedure from the Floppy Boot Diskette you must disable all modules 18 Identify the disks to be made a redundant pair Prompt Please specify the PRIMARY d
363. owing From the console main menu enter S System Maintenance then enter V Call Detail Recorder then enter C Configure CDR For Host lines make sure line zero is configured For EVMON Host lines the selected data is not referenced For message levels enable 22 HIS EECO Encore PMS Enable CDR and select a name for the CDR log data tile then enter R Run CDR Do testing of the HIS Encore PMS integration a then enter S Show CDR log file View the CDR log file and confirm consistent results with system integration testing then enter D Delete CDR log file To remove accumulated data repeat these last two steps as required then enter T Terminate CDR Turn off the logging of diagnostic information to the CDR log file To monitor drive 4 disk space complete the following From the console main menu enter S System Maintenance then enter U Utility Menu then enter T Task then enter query 4 One line displays the number of bytes free number of bytes used percentage full number of blocks free number of blocks ful and the total number of blocks on drive 4 To free up additional space the CDR log file and or the log file may be deleted It is recommended to sean the contents of the files before deleting either one As an alterative to sending messages and deleting messages from g mailhox to activate message waiting type 16 for HIS Encore PMS integration complete the following From the console main menu enter S System Mainten
364. oxes Six distinct classes of service categories can be programmed and assigned independently of one another Classes of service can be used in combination to build multiple tiers of service offerings or privileges More information about classes of service can be found in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Product Description Feature Class of Service FCOS An FCOS determines what voice mail capabilities a mailbox user has and how each call is processed Each feature is called a feature bit Over 200 features bits are available The server allows a maximum of 640 FCOSs or combinations of features Each mailbox must be assigned an FCOS limits Class of Service LCOS The LCOS defines all of the time and storage parameters of a mailbox by restricting message greeting and outdialing digit lengths This class of service is used to control server resources Up to 640 LCOSs can be programmed to quantify different categories of parameters Each mailbox must be assigned an LCOS Group Class of Service GCOS The GCOS defines the number of users any particular user can exchange messages with This class of service provides software partitioning at the mailbox level without requiring partitioning at the line group level Two types of groups can be configured flexible or bitmapped GCOS which allows multiple groups to exchange messages and closed or affinity GCOS which restricts message exchange to within the defined
365. oxes without a WoiceMemo system reboot HTSRCV Request MW for mailbox x Normal operation This data is logged if a valid check out packet with an extension number that lead to a good mailbox was received And if the current configuration in hismenu for the check out packet is configured to delete all messages in the mailbox A message is sent to the mwla to eventually retum to fissnd turn off this station numbers message waiting HISRCV Ignored bad start character HEX h Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged if hisrcv is looking for a start character and the character read in from the RS232C serial port is unknown Walid start characters are lt ENQ gt lt ACK gt lt NAK gt and lt STX gt The received unknown start character is displayed in hex and the packet is labeled bad HISRCV Incomplete packet Link failure test link protocol using data scope This data is logged when the first characters of the packet lt STX gt has been wea in successfully but the two second packet timer expires before the full number of characters for a packet are read The packet is labeled bad The partial packet is displayed in a preceding message showing what data has been received complete or incomplete HISRCV Unable to locate hissnd Internal error may locate next transmission else report condition This data is logged when hisrcv needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay a
366. p Reference Verify Electronic Specifications I Verify that the customer s terminal meets the specifications given in Table 1 below Table 1 Terminal Specifications Parameter Requirement Baud Rate 9600 baud default Auto Scroll Enable Auto Line Feed Disabled Line Mode Full Duplex Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits Data Protocol X On X Off Doc Rev A CP 6216 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Verify Cabling Specifications 2 Obtain the correct RS 232 cable for your terminal Table 2 lists all signals present at the serial port connectors Note The Model 70 is shipped with a 9 pin D type female console cable which connects to the serial port The other end of this console cable is a 25 pin D type female connector To connect to a terminal personal computer modem or printer you need an RS 232 cable with a 25 pin D type male connector at one end of the console cable The other end of the RS 232 cable will vary depending on the make and manufacturer of the device you are connecting to Table 2 Terminal Pin Assignments Terminal 25 pin Signal Name Pin 4 Pin 5 Carrier Detect Pin 20 Data Set Ready Pin 2 Receive Data Pin 8 Request to Send Pin 3 Transmit Data Pin 8 Clear to Send Pin 6 Data Terminal Ready No connection Ring Indicate Pin 7 Signal Ground Dac Rev A CP 6216 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Refere
367. pecial local area networking capabilities For detailed Ethernet card information see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Product Description Major Software Components This section provides an overview of available user and server features and special applications Depending on your specific server configuration the Model 70 you are working with will include some or all of the features discussed in this section Software including support for some optional features is loaded in the Model 70 when shipped Additional hardware is required to implement some optional features For more detailed information refer to the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual Series 6 Communication Server gt The Model 70 is one of the Series 6 Communication servers Jt is a modular open standards based communication server that allows users to make send receive and answer voice and fax messages from a single mailbox 24 hours a day using a pushbutton phone The Model 70 is compatible with virtually every PBX and Central Office Switch The server is shipped with VoiceMemo Software Release 6 0 The Series 6 server uses the QNX operating system from QNX Software Mailbox User Features Voice Mail Messaging The basic function of the Model 70 is message taking and retrieval The mailbox user can receive review save delete and reply to or send messages Several delivery options are available to users Marking a mes
368. pected to be the primary trunk interface to the local switch Setup through the VojceMemo Physical Resource Configuration Manager the Series 6 server expects the Dual El trunk interface card to connect to an SS7 Protocol Conversion Card The Dual El trunk interface card handles El frame multiplexing and demultiplexing clock extraction and so forth However because it extracts and interprets the signaling data important to call setup tear down and routing the SS7 Signal Processor card must be present before call processing can occur 1 3 El Digital Trunk Connectivity On the receive side of the trunk the Dual El trunk interface card demultiplexes the voice overhead and signaling time slots to recover traffic data voice information framing and error checking bits and signaling data It passes the PCM bearer channels with voice information to the DSP 30 Digital Signal Processing line card and signaling data PCM channel 16 to the SS7 Signal Processing card Figure 1 2 Chan 16 Channels 1 15 17 31 MVIP Bus SS7 Data Traffic 1 El Trunk erface Card SS7 Signal Digital Signal El Trunks Processing Processing Fax Card Card Card 7 link amp voice traffic 30 Channels ISUP Voice Channels F to CPU Figure l 2 El Digital Trunk Connectivity Cards The DSP 30 line card separates the voice data from the PCM frame and hands the data off to the application running in the CPU Similarly the SS7
369. power supplies for the VMIs Mount the VMIs on the wall after connecting them to both the KSU and the VoiceMemo system Install ATAs or additional VMs for all VoiceMemo system outdial ports including any used for DIMF to PBX message waiting Use an M7310 or M7324 telephone to determine the feature codes assigned to each VMI The KSU automatically assigns feature codes to each VMI and assigns intercom numbers DNs to each VMI line Use the VMI feature codes to determine the intercom numbers assigned to each VMI line For Compact DR2 and Modular DR2 systems ensure that each VMI DN is configured as follows Under Permissions Held Line Reminder YES Full Handsfree NO Handsfree Answerback NO Pick Up Group NO Paging Zone NO Under Line Access Intercom line is assigned as the prime line GP 507 Page 3 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Reference Document Rev A GP 507 Page 4 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 6 For Modular DR3 and DR4 systems ensure that each VMI DN is configured as follows Under Permissions Capabilities Set Lock NONE Full Handsfree NO Handsfree Answerback NO Pick Up Group NO Page Zone NO Auxiliary Ringer NO b Hotline NO Priority Call NO Under Line Access Answer DN NO Line Pool Access NO fa line will be used for outdialing set to YES Two intercom lines are assigned with one assigned as the prime line
370. pt Do you want to restore the LCOS s Response Y to restore N or Enter to not restore Prompt Do you want to restore the NCOS s Response Y to restore N or Enter to not restore The server restores the specified Classes of Service and returns to the System Configuration Menu Dog Rev A ce 5414 Page 1 of 1 Set the System Time and Date VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to set the system time and date Step Reference 1 Reach the System Maintenance Menu then go to the System Maintenance Venu Map 12 Additional Options Menu 2 Change the time and date as necessary Select T Time and Date Prompt System time date current settings Enter new value or press lt CR gt to leave unchanged Enter date mm dd yy Response The correct date in the format of mm dd yy or press Enter to keep the current information Prompt Enter time hh mm am pm Response The correct time in the format of hh mm and the am or pm designation or press Enter to keep the current information The server responds with the entered time and date then returns to the System Maintenance Additional Options Menu Note that all modules are set to the same time Doc Rev A ce 541 Page 1 of 1 Set the Site Name Banner and Code VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to set the site name site banner and the site code Step Reference Reach the System
371. ptional feature includes two template sets for Omni integration one for a three digit dialing plan and one for a four digit dialing plan The default templates for Omni integration with a three digit dialing plan are i NAME OMN13 DESCRIPTION OMNI 3 digit Application by Centigram Tl R Next 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 Comment T2 02 T vV5 40 H Next Comment direct call with no Id T3 03 s30 d3 0 T V4 40 H Next Comment Busy forward T4 04 g30 d3 O T V3 40 H Next Comment RNA forward T5 05 s3 O 0000 T VI 40 H Next Comment Login prompt 000 is the VMEMO access point dummy extension T6 05 s30 d3 0 T V2 40 H Next Comment Forward all T7 06 Xx d3 0 T V2 40 H Next Comment Message desk Attendent forward T8 07 Xx d3 0 T V2 40 H Next Comment Message desk forward B 4 Omni T9 08 Xx d3 0 T V4 40 H Next Comment T10 Next Comment T11 Next Comment Trunk call Busy forward 09 Xx d3 0 T V3 40 H Trunk call RNA forward 1Xx d3 0 T V3 40 H Command code 10 16 will have the same greeting B 5 Appendix C System 25 Enhanced In band Integration This appendix contains supplemental information about integrating an AIP VoiceMemo system with an AT amp T System 25 See the Task List for procedures to configure the integration Features and Functions The System 25 integration operates over standard two wire circuits from Tip and Ring card
372. quency MF signaling others use Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF signaling The VoiceMemo system only looks for one type of signaling during call setup therefore you must set the integration to work with the signaling provided by the switching system Interactions amp Limitations This parameter only affects signaling during the in band call setup Normal user interaction with the AIP system is always via DTMF Next Templates Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter The number of the next template or templates separated by spaces to compare further data against Default Blank How It Works When incoming data completely matches a template specification and the template action does not play a greeting or hang up the system looks at the templates listed here to continue comparing against incoming data If more than one template is listed the system compares all of them simultaneously Number of In band Tasks on This Host 2 10 Location in Menus In band Integration Menu What to Enter The number of system tasks to service the in band ports on a given module The valid range is 1 32 Default 2 Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters How It Works This parameter works with the Host Number parameter to set the amount of system CPU resources assigned to an Enhanced In band Integration First select a module host and then use this parameter to set the number of tasks for the module Repeat the procedur
373. r 3 The server reads from the floppy disk and asks which process you want to execute Prompt Enter one of the names Response system reload Doc Rev A CP 6267 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 4 The server reads from the floppy disk and issues a warning about the pending process Prompt WARNING INSTALL PROGRAM 4 4x44 x INSTALL program should be executed only when a complete system installation is desired from scratch This means that all information on the system accounts speech programs etc will be lost If you have a current account backup diskette the account data but not speech can be reloaded via the system restore menu If this is not desired then reboot the system and execute the UPDATE program In order to do a complete INSTALL you must have as a minimum the following set of diskettes SOFTWARE DISKETTES PROMPTS DISKETTES IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO CONTINUE THEN RE BOOT THE SYSTEM OTHERWISE gt ENTER A CARRIAGE RETURN Response Press Enter 5 Enter the number of modules in the server Prompt How many HOSTS are in this configuration Response Enter the number of modules in the server Doe Rev A CP 6267 Page3 ofS VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 6 The system displayed the installed disks and the current configuration If the configuation is correct continue with the reload Prompt
374. r To leave blank enter a period and press Enter DEFAULT A B C E F G H X Press Enter key to expand menu to check changes Default PBX Options Menu A Post Directory number dial string H B Pre Directory number dial string Attendant xfer string C Connect Dial string on Called Party Accept E Dial string for Return on Called Party Refused F Dial string for Return on Called Party Busy S G Special actions on Reorder Tone Encountered OH H Dial sting for Return on Called Party RNA S X Exit Enter X to return to the PBX menu gt Enter X to return to the Receptionist menu Enter X to return to the In band Application menu Enter X to return to the In Band Menu IN BAND MENU A B X ENHANCED IN BAND A Configure Application B Other Features X Exit Enter X to return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Online Menu VoiceMemo Configuration Online Menu G Group selected 3 M Modify Application C Report Current Configuration Q Quit Forget Changes X Exit Save Changes 27 14 15 16 Enter X to save changes and return to the Writing new configuration report to usr vm config vm report 0 vmcemd_update performing cp usr vm config vm report 0 usr vm config vm report Enter X three additional times to exit back to the Main Menu Enter R to COMMAND M C R S X Press Enter key to expand menu c All Software Copyright 1983 1
375. r installing a component while the server power is on can severely damage both the component and its associated circuitry Always Wait 60 seconds after your turn the server power off The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet If you need to set switches or jumpers on a circuit card first place the card on an anti static mat If such mat is not readily available use the card s anti static bag as a temporary mat If neither a mat nor a bag is available do not work on the component until you have obtained one Store circuit cards and other components in anti static bags and their original shipping boxes 1 Product Description Introduction This chapter provides a high level description of the Centigram Series 6 Communications Server Model 70 hardware and software functions features and components It also provides general server specifications Expanded discussions of some of the topics in this chapter are found in other chapters of this manual Additional information is also located in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual and the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Model 70 Overview The Model 70 is based on a standard desktop PC cabinet featuring seven available ISA slots a 200 watt AC power supply a 486 66 MHz CPU an IDE hard disk a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive a special Multi Vendor Integration Protocol MVIP bus and a modular design for quick and easy component maintenanc
376. r the time out value Select D Timeout Prompt Timeout Response The number 1 Oths of a second that the system should wait between incoming digits before determining that an error has occurred Doc Rey A DP7011 Page 3 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 16 Enter the error action to perform if a timeout occurs or if the data does not completely match any templates Select E Error Action Prompt Error Action Response Characters that describe the error action to perform Table 2 at the end of this procedure lists all valid action characters 17 Enter a description for the template Select C Comment Prompt Comment Response Characters that describe the function of the template 18 Repeat any of steps 1 1 through 17 for each template that you need to modify 19 Exit to the Enhanced In band Menu Select X Exit C Check Your Work and Save the Application 20 Compare your templates with your worksheet to verify your work Select 0 Show Application Response The system scrolls all of the templates in the application onto the console screen If any of the information does not match your worksheet select the template and make the necessary changes 21 Backup save the application Select H Backup Application Release 5 03 systems or S Save Application Release 5 04 systems Prompt Do you want to overwrite existing copy Response Y Prompt Application backed up
377. ration Menu Parameters Table 2 2 Valid Data Field Entries DTME MF digits DTMF A through D column four digits MF digits KP and ST respectively Ring or seizure Dial tone Hang up Fixed length source extension containing digits 11 max Fixed length destination extension containing digits 11 max Variable length source extension 11 max terminated by DTMF MF character Variable length destination extension 11 max terminated by DTMF MF character 7 Ignore 7 digits Ignore all digits until the DIMF MF digit 7 Default This field defaults to empty no events expected How It Works When an incoming DTMF MF signal is detected it is converted to its numerical form and compared to the data listed in this field Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter The action code to take if a time out or incorrect data is received Table 2 3 contains a list of all valid entries for the Error Action field 2 7 Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Table 2 3 Valid Error Action Field Entries Dial DTMF digits 7 O 9 A D max 23 Hang up Go off hook Wink n 10s of a second Wait n I Qs of a second Play login prompt with passcode required Play login prompt passcode optional Play Forward All greeting Play Ring No Answer greeting Play Busy Forward greeting Play General greeting Auto Receptionist or Message Center greeting The systemw not require callers to enter
378. re inside the server 18 Install the cabinet cover P 6224 19 Reconnect external cables to the server Remove the identification tags from the cables 20 Turn server power on Doc Rev A CP 6224 Page 1 of 2 Remove Install Cabinet Cover VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to remove and replace the system cabinet in the Centigram Series 6 Model 70 DANGER Shut down the system and turn the power off before you begin any procedures in this section Failure to do so will result in severe electrical shock or burns CAUTION Removing a component while the power is on can severely damage the component you are working on and other peripherals a CAUTION Protect your server from ESD damage during handling of all components Step Reference CD Observe Precautions 1 Put on a grounded wrist strap and attach the other end to the cabinet Doing so protects the component from electrostatic discharge 2 Shut down the system turn off the power and unplug the unit Detach the power cord from the power input assembly 3 Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet Remove the Server Cabinet 4 Label and remove external cables from the server 5 Remove the five retaining screws from the cover 6 32 hex head Phillips screws at the back of the cabinet See Figure 1 for the locations of the scr
379. rnal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to lock the source mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message ent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to open source mailbox x Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrev is unable to open the source mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to delete source mailbox x Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to delete the source mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to lock destination mailbox x Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to lock the destination mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to open destination mailbox x Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to open the destination mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCV Unable to close destination mailbox x Internal en or report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to close the destination mailbox record as part of the move mailbox message sent by the PMS system HISRCY Unable to create swapped source mailbox x Internal en or report condition This data is logged when hisrcv is unable to create the swapped source
380. rompt Module Status Menu Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Input a module id in the following range non on an Which Module Response Enter the number s of the module s to enable The module s automatically resets and returns to normal operation Doc Rev A Run Diagnose From Diskette ce 03 1 Page 1 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to run the hard disk diagnose program from the Diagnostic Diskette It is assumed the system has been shut down and all modules disabled using the process described in CP 6268 WARNING This version of the diagnose program requires the system to be removed from normal operation Centigram recommends that this process be run during periods of low call traffic If possible you should run the online version of this program from the Hard Disk Utilities Menu so you do not lose processing capabilities See CP 7029 for the online instructions Reference Insert the Diagnostic Diskette in the floppy drive and reset the server Start the server from the hard disk then run commands from the floppy diskette Prompt IPL100 Boot system from Hard disk Floppy H F Response Press Enter Prompt Run commands from floppy Response Y The server reads from the floppy disk and asks which process is to be executed Prompt Enter one of the names Response diagnose Identify the disk s to be tested Prompt Enter the hard disk id bus sc
381. ror Action N Next Templates m 23456 7 C Comment Answer call and run templates 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Current Template I Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 2 to select template 2 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T EN C X Press Enter key to expand menu Press Enter to display Template 2 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 2 D Data A Action T Timeout E Error Action N Next Templates C Comment af X Exit 4 Enter the following information for Template 2 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data 632 dx Sx EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action V4 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T EN C X T Timeout 10 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X E Error Action 0 H EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X O Comment Call Forward Busy External EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 2 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 2 D Data 632 dx sx A Action s V4 T Timeout 10 E Error Action H N Next Templates m C Comment Cal Forward Busy External X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Current Template f 18 gt Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 3 to select template 3 EDIT TEMPL
382. rotection is required Clean and dust free Well ventilated and away from heat sources including direct sunlight e At least three feet from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices such as air conditioners large fans electric motors radio and TV transmitters and high frequency security devices Before You Start Installing New Systems Set up an equipment log to record server model and serial numbers the server configuration and options found on the worksheets provided to you by your system design engineer and other information about the server you might find helpful Check the power supply setting The 200 watt power supply is integrated into the server to provide power for all resources drives cards and peripherals A switch on the back panel is used to set the power supply to operate at 115 volts AC in the range of 100 120 volts AC 6 amps maximum current or 230 volts AC in the range of 200 240 volts AC 4 amps maximum current The switch is set at the factory for 115 volt AC operation To verify that your server has the correct setting check the input power selection switch on the rear chassis See Figure 2 1 for details 5106a70p Figure 2 1 Power Supply Setting Check the power cord In some cases the power cord supplied with the Model 70 might not be compatible with the type of AC wall outlet in
383. rrier toward the back of the system freeing the left front tab from the slot on the side of the adjacent drive bay Make sure all the cabling is clear and lift the carrier up and out of the system See Figure 1 for details Doc Rev A CP 6221 Page 3 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Reference Step Alignment 3 1 2 Drive Carrier 5113a70d Figure 1 Remove the Hard Disk CD Remove the Hard Disk 10 Remove all screws securing the hard disk to the carrier there are usually three or four Do not remove the EM1 shield and the filter panel at the front of the bay 11 Remove the hard disk from the carrier See Figure 2 for details 12 If required transfer data from the old disk to the new disk CP 6592 Ch 5 13 Place the hard disk on an anti static wrapper Note If you are performing fault isolation install the hard disk into the spare cabinet for testing If you are replacing the hard disk prepare it for return and repair Doe Rev A VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Ste Reference 5114a70d Figure2 Remove the Hard Disk Install the Hard Disk and Disk Carrier Note If you are performing fault isolation and installing the hard disk into a spare cabinet remove the disk carrier as previously described 6 Configure the hard disk if required If there are two hard disks in one server one CR 1923 must be configured as master and the other must be configured as slave If t
384. runk configuration to review the signaling that you have configured for each PCM channel Figure 1 shows a typical trunk configuration list Exit back to the Resource Configuration Menu when you are satisfied with your trunk signaling configuration Reference vienu Map 13 vlenu Map 13 vlenu Map 13 vlenu Map 13 vlenu Map 13 vlenu Map 13 Menu Map 13 Doc Rev A cl 3151 Page 4 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference EL El Carrier configuration Trunk 0 Configuration CEPT CRC HDB3 CCS Trunk 1 Configuration CEPT CRC HDB3 CCS Trunk Type for each channel gt 00 OL 02 03 4 05 06 07 08 09 10 dt 12 13 l4 ype CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS Te gt 15 16 17 18 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS Ha lt o gt 30 31 32 33 340 350 36 637 38 39 404444 e CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS Aaa y Chol 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 5 59 Type CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS 4 Figure 1 Typical Trunk Configuration list 22 From the Resource Configuration Menu reach the Digital Clock Reference Menu Map 13 Configuration Menu 23 From the Digital Clock Reference Configuration Menu select the clock reference Menu Map 13 for the digital trunks Your options include a reference derived from the network RxD
385. runks In such a configuration the line groups would be configured to use only part of the total number of PCM channels available in each trunk Refer to El Connectivity Features on page 3 You assign the slot for the card you are configuring at the Physical Resource Configuration Menu Input Output Address 1 8 The digital trunk interface card can occupy one of two possible AT bus addresses 0x300h and 0x2300h where address 0x300h is the default address occupied by card 0 and 0x2300h is assigned to Card 1 These addresses can also be assigned to a Smartcard in Model 70 and 1201 servers Before selecting the I O address check the addresses occupied by these cards if they are present in the affected Series 6 server module If these cards are and either of their addresses are set to the same to which the digital trunk interface card an address conflict exists and bus contention will occur Ensure that each card is set to a unique address The address selected in the Select IO Address Menu must match the address for which the card is physically jumpered Note The digital trunk interface card has jumper positions for setting interrupt request levels However the VoiceMemo application polls the hardware to detect status and service the cards and does not use hardware interrupt requests You set the card O address in the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x El Digital Trunk Connectivity Signaling The Series 6
386. rwise stated press Enter after each response you enter xi About This Manual Reader Advisories Reader advisories used in this manual are shown below Note Information especially useful in relation to this procedure CAUTION Information that helps you prevent equipment or software damage CAUTION Information that helps you avoid electrostatic discharge ESD damage to the equipment WARNING Information that helps you prevent an interruption to telecommunications traffic WARNING A hazard that can cause you personal injury DANGER Warns of a condition that could severely injure or kill you gt e 9 gt gt About This Manual Before You Start This manual assumes that you are familiar with using a console and keyboard This section describes how to use the Centigram Series 6 server effectively Console lips and Techniques The tips and techniques offered in the following paragraphs can make configuration entry sessions at the Centigram Series 6 server maintenance console more productive Viewing Menus When you finish entering a value for a parameter the server displays an abbreviated form of the current menu called the short menu To view the complete current menu when a short menu is displayed just press Enter To return to the Main Menu from any VoiceMemo application configuration menu press X Exit until the Main Menu appears Accepting Defaults To accept a default
387. rwrite any of the applications provided by Centigram See Also Backup Application Enhanced In band Integration Menu Parameters Show Application Show Number Time out Location in Menus Enhanced In band Menu What to Enter No entry required Other Requirements This option shows all information about the current application including the application name and description its installation date and last modification date and all of its templates Tips amp Techniques Use this option to see all of an application s templates at once especially before editing the application of In band Tasks on Each Host Location in Menus In band Integration Menu How It Works This displays the details for each in band task on each module This feamre allows you to check your previous work Interactions amp Liiitations This option is only available in Release 5 03 Location in Menus In band Edit Template Menu What to Enter The time in tenths of seconds between received digits to wait before an error condition occurs Default This field defaults to O tenths of a second How It Works The value of the timeout is set in the template If there is too much delay between digits coming from the switch the time out timer expires When the timeout has expired the system carries out the error action for the template List of Detailed Procedures Page 1 of 1 Procedure Release Number Number DP 3021 Connect the Chassis Gr
388. ry disk and the disk that you are adding Note Centigram recommends that you check all other system diskettes to ensure that their serial numbers match Doc Rev A Cl 6281 Page 2 of 5 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Prepare the New Disk 1 Determine how to jumper the new hard disk as an IDE slave disk TR 1923 2 Jumper the new hard disk If there are two hard disks in one server one must be TR 1923 configured as master and the other must be configured as slave If there is one hard disk in the server it must be configured as master IDE hard disks are shipped from Centigram configured as master Prepare the System 3 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Menu Map 8 4 Verify that all disks are in sync Select D Display Status of all SCSI Buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing the status of the disk s Verify that the disk s show the status as ENA Press Enter to exit 5 If any disk is out of sync with its redundant mate update the redundancy CP 7015 6 Execute a system shutdown Change the status of the modules based on which CI 6268 program you are using If running from the Hardware Configuration Menu leave all modules enabled Install the Disk 7 Turn off the system power and remove the server cabinet CP 6224 Ch 4 8 Change the hardware adding the new disk CP 6221 Ch 4 9 If you are running the Add A Redun
389. s 3 Select the exception number to set Prompt command Response The phonline exception number 4 Enter the new value for the exception Prompt Va lue Response The desired new value 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the phoneline exceptions for the selected line are set When you are finished press Enter 6 Select a new line to change or press Enter to finish Cancel a Phoneline Exception 1 To return a phoneline exception to the default value reach the Phoneline Menu Map 10 Exceptions Menu 2 Select a line to change Select C Cancel exception Prompt Keep entering triplets then enter lt CR gt on a line by itself line triplets to change Response The line triplets to change module number line card number port number Press Enter when ou are finished entering triplets Doc Rev A Cl 7022 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Relase 6 0A and later Reference Step 3 Select the phoneline exception to reset Prompt command to cancel Response The number of the phoneline exception to reset Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each phoneline exception you want to change When you are finished press Enter 5 Enter the next line to be changed or press Enter to exit Doc Rev A cr 025 Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Activate New Software This procedure describes how to activate new software loaded via the Online Software Update program IN WARNING This procedure res
390. s Switch sends R 0 0 123 Tl R gt T Next 2 3 4 5 5 T2 gt gt 0 gt 0 gt sx gt gt SSVI T3 gt gt 0 1 T4 gt gt 0 2 sx dx T5 gt gt 0 3 dx 3005EIB Figure l 5 Template Pattern Matching The ring from the switch matches the Data Field in Template 1 completely and the VoiceMemo system takes the line off hook The switch then sends the data packet shown by the digits in the figure The EIB software compares those digits with templates 2 3 4 and 5 in parallel Templates 3 4 and 5 drop from the matching process when the first non matching digit 0 is received Template 2 matches all the way to the end and the VoiceMema system performs the action for that template V1 play the mailbox login prompt Figure l 6 is a flowchart that shows the process of template execution Enhanced In band Integration No Start aa Get Next Digit Time out i Maten Digisto No Match Execute Error Templates Drop or Dropped Action Failing Templates AlempIates Go to Next Templates Match Completely Matched Terminate Yes Z y Execute Action Continue with Standard VoiceMemo Session 3004EIB Figure 1 6 Template Execution Note Template Rules Templates only describe the protocol during call setup Template execution is complete once the VoiceMemo system starts to play a greeting or perform an error action
391. s The switch routes direct and forwarded calls to the VoiceMemo application over one group of lines The VoiceMemo system sends message waiting requests to the switch over a separate line or group of lines The Receptionist IT application if installed operates on the same line group as the VoiceMemo application The System 25 integration allows call transfers from the VoiceMemo system such as return to operator or to another extension The switch also correctly passes the original called extension number to the VoiceMemo system when a double forward occurs Although the switch allows all types of call forward busy ring no answer all calls it only sends one type of call forward message to the VoiceMemo system Because there is no distinction mailbox owners cannot use conditional personal greetings Figure C shows the strategy for System 25 to AIP VoiceMemo integration The AIP VoiceMemo system has three types of message waiting notification that you can use with the System 25 RS 232 Message Waiting Type 7 also called Modem Message Waiting uses an VoiceMemo serial port and an external 1200 baud modem to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the PBX This does not use a VoiceMemo line port and is usually the most economical type of message waiting The limitation with this type of message waiting is that any confirmation tones from the PBX are not passed from the modem back to the VoiceMemo system DTMF to PBX Message Waiti
392. s either by time and day period rotation or with every call index rotation Tree mailboxes route calls to preselected mailboxes when callers enter a single digit Callers hear a greeting which gives instructions on which single digit to enter to reach the desired destination Tree mailboxes can be configured to process callers with rotary dialers Shared Extensions is a type of Tree mailbox which allows more than one individual or telephone number to access the same mailbox Discrete passcodes are assigned to each partition within the mailbox to provide privacy for the sharing users Optional Special Application Mailboxes Guaranteed Fax A Guaranteed Fax mailbox is associated with the FaxMemo optional feature and creates a never busy fax machine If the fax machine is busy the call can be forwarded to the Guaranteed Fax mailbox which will receive the fax Once received the mailbox attempts delivery to the fax machine until it gets through The operation is transparent to the fax sender Fax Publishing With fax publishing mailboxes can be configured to supplement prerecorded outgoing messages with related hardcopy documents such as product or company information This feature provides a convenient way to disseminate frequently requested information to employees customers and outside callers Fax Store and Forward This feature enables users to store and forward fax messages the same basic way they store and forward voice
393. s in the confirmation Also because CCS is the only signaling type available for El trunk connectivity CCS appears in the confirmation as the selected signaling type Exit back to the Configuration Menu for El El Carrier at trunk 0 when you are done From the Configuration Menu for EIEl Carrier at trunk 0 reach the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL EIl in AT slot x Trunk y Menu At the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Trunk y Menu select the trunk coding format you want The coding type can be either HDB3 recommended or AMI From the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x where x is the slot number entered in step 4 reach the Select Trunk Type Menu At the Select Trunk Type Menu set the type of signaling for Common Channel Signaling When you are done exit to the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Note To be operational the El Digital Trunk Connectivity feature requires the installation of the SS7 Integration You can only select the CCS option for digital trunks If you select any other option you see the error message Can not set xxxx trunk type to Digital Trunk Select 4 Common Channel Signaling Prompt Input your choice for help 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X Response 4 After you select the signaling type the configuration display shown in Figure 1 At the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL El in AT slot x display the current t
394. s of the local node either being in a Red Alarm state or of receiving a Yellow Alarm from the far end The Yellow Alarm from the far end indicates that the far end cannot frame on the near end signal The CGA is canceled when the Red Alarm condition is removed or when the Remote Yellow Alarm is removed for 100 to 1000 milliseconds When then CGA state has been entered the T digital trunk interface software logs an error message in the system error logfile to indicating the CGA It also sends notice of the CGA to all applications affected by the T 1 carrier Digital Trunk Status The VoiceMemo digital trunk status maintenance utility presents a display of summary counters that shows the occurrences of the following events Errored seconds where any event with at least one code violation within one second Out of frame where two or more framing bit errors out of 16 or fewer consecutive framing F bits are detected within a 3 millisecond period Frame slips where the digital trunk interface looses frame synchronization Also where the transmission facility or switch drops or repeats a frame without loosing frame synchronization e Alarm indication signals AIS the transmission facility or switch sends to indicate that a trunk has been put out of service from the network end e Errored seconds where an errored second is any second with at least one impairment e Failed second where an impairment lasted for an entire second
395. s section is written for you If you need an introduction to the El Digital Trunk Connectivity Feature as a general review before configuring it or troubleshooting it this section is also for you This section briefly reviews the structure of an El frame and time slot assignment for common channel signaling It also discusses Series 6 server El applications El features functional operation alarms and specifications This section is not intended to be a comprehensive discussion of digital trunking For more information on digital encoding of voice signals and digital transmission refer to the many external resources on the subject Also contact Customer Training for the use of digital transmission in Centigram equipment Digital Trunk Multiplexing The standard El frame Figure 1 1 contains 256 bits divided into 32 time slots of 8 bits each At 8 000 frames per second the El bit rate is 2 048 Mbps Time slot O in each frame is used for framing bits and for error checking bits Time slots 1 through 15 carry PCM channel circuits through 15 and time slots 17 through 31 carry PCM channel circuits 16 through 30 The PCMchannel circuits carry data that is digitized voice signals Time slot 16 in the El trunk PCM frame is reserved for line supervision and signaling 1 El Digital Trunk Connectivity Time Slot 0 1 2 3 30 31 Voice Channel 1 2 3 i er 29 30 ss7 Common Bits 1 a Channel Bits Framing 249 256 Error Checking S
396. s the following Expansion Slots Slots are numbered 0 6 Slot 6 is closest to the offboard battery e Offboard Battery for CMOS RAM e Power Supply e Bay Not used Front Bezel Assembly Contains reset button power on off button drive activity lights power on light and speaker between bezel and metal chassis e Bay and Carrier Disks Carrier contains hard disk and 3 5 inch floppy disk drive e Auxiliary Front Fan and motherboard guides e Motherboard 1 8 Hard Disk Product Description eas Slots Offboard Battery Power Supply Front Fan and Front Bezel Bay Motherboard Guides Assembly Not Supported Motherboard Bay and Carrier for Hard Disk and Floppy Disk Drive 5105a70c Figure l 4 Model 70 Internal Components The Model 70 features a 3 5 inch IDE hard disk M155 that stores the operating system speech names greetings prompts messages and applications For specific hard disk specifications see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual This server can accommodate up to two disks for a maximum of 55 storage hours with redundancy at 18 5Kbps Floppy Disk Drive The Model 70 features a 3 5 inch 1 44 MB floppy disk drive that uses 3 5 inch double sided double density diskettes The floppy disk drive is used to install reconfigure and update the server software backup mailbox and account data files and increase the memory storage capacity of the
397. s the optional Receptionist II application to perform supervised transfers The switch can recognize a switch hook flash on the line and return dial tone The Receptionist II port then dials the desired DN and monitors the call The Receptionist II application can also perform blind unsupervised transfers See the Receptionist I manual for more information about programming for Receptionist II VoiceMemo Template Specifications The default templates for System 25 integration are NAME SYS25 DESCRIPTION AT amp T System 25 Application by Centigram Te RS AP as Nexte 223 lt 4 5 36 Comment T2 00 sx V1 50 H Next Comment direct call T3 O1 V5 50 H Next Comment direct Trunk call T4 02 sx dx V2 50 H Next Comment Internal Forwarded call T5 O3 dx V2 50 H Next System 25 Comment External Forwarded call T6 O8 dx w30 H 50 H Next Comment Port bad call from the switch C 4 Appendix D Norstar Enhanced In band Intearation This appendix contains supplemental information about integrating an AIP VoiceMemo system with a Northern Telecom Norstar KSU See the Task List for procedures to configure the integration Features and Functions The Norstar integration operates over a group of digital lines that is equipped with VMI Voice Mail Interface modules The switch routes direct and forwarded calls to the VoiceMemo system over one group of VMI lines The VoiceMe
398. sage as urgent Making a message confidential so that it cannot be passed on to another user Specifying message delivery dates future delivery Requesting a return receipt verification that the message was listened to Customization Users can customize mailboxes This customization includes greetings distribution lists fax delivery and reminder calls Product Description Distribution lists A distribution list allows a mailbox user to send the same message to several other users simultaneously Mailbox user distribution lists are established over the telephone Each list is assigned an individual distribution list number Two types of lists are available mailbox user distribution lists which are accessible only by the mailbox owner and master or system distribution lists which are established by the system administrator and accessible by all users of a line group The ability to create access or be part of a distribution is determined through class of service assignments A distribution list can contain up to 65 535 members The server allows a maximum of 200 personal distribution lists per mailbox and 200 master lists Distribution lists can be nested enabling one list to contain other lists Message Waiting This feature provides a stutter dial tone or flashing light indication at the user s phone to signal that a new message has arrived This audio indication is only available on the telephone n
399. sage sent Normal operation This data is logged when hisrcesync sends a resync message to the PMS system HISRESYNC Resync message failed Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisresyne fails to send a resyne message to the PMS system HISRESYNC Unable to locate hissnd Internal error report condition This data is logged when hisrcesyne needs hissnd to send a resyne message to the PMS system The task hisresyne returns to hisrcv without completing the command HISRESYNC Unable to send to hissnd data lost Internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hisresyne needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name The data is lost and hisresync returns to hisrcv without completing the command HISRESYNC Unable to re send to hid data lost Internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hisresync needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name It tries to send once to hissnd and fails then it is temporarily able to attach by name to hissnd again tries to send a second time and fails The data is lost and hisresync returns to hisrcv without completing the command hisinit hisinit Mailbox x MWI update Normal operation This data is logged for each mailbox in the system that has a message waiting type 16 HIS P
400. sage when the replace disk is done Prompt RRR KR RK KKK KKK KERR KEK KKK KEK KK KEE KEKE EKER KE KER KERR KEKE Set hard disk parameters by selecting option from the HARD DISK UTILITIES MENU after system reboot Please shutdown system and adjust disk 1 1 to disk 1 2 then reboot If needed update redundancy by updating disk 1 2 from its mirror image disk by selecting option K from the HARD DISK UTILITIES MENU KKK KR RRR KK RR KR RRR RRR KEK KEK KE KKK KEK KK KEK KRM KKK Specified disk replaced System Configuration Number of Hosts Hosts present Number of disks Active disk IDS Redundant disk IDs Configuration has been changed Response Turn off the power to the system C Remove the Old Disk 25 Detach the connectors from both hard disks 26 Install the new hard disk Prepare the old hard disk for return and or repair If UP 6221 required reconnect the second primary hard disk to the second disk cable connector and resinstall Return the System To Normal Operation 27 Turn on the system power 28 Run an Online System Verify cl 7001 29 Reinstall cabinet cover Cl 6224 30 Complete your post implementation documentation Doc Rev A ce 7004 Page 1 of 1 Name the Configurations VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedures describes how to name the two system configurations Use descriptive names to help you remember the differences between
401. scharge ESD can damage disks boards and other components Wearing an anti static wrist strap attached to a metal part of the server chassis will reduce risk significantly DANGER Before removing or replacing hardware on your server make sure the power is off Be sure to do each procedure in the correct order Servicing and Expanding the Model 70 Follow the steps shown in the Centigram Procedures CPs of the Task List at the end of this chapter to service repair and expand the capabilities of the Model 70 Replacing FRUs Troubleshooting Overview This section addresses general hardware troubleshooting or corrective maintenance Detailed hardware and software troubleshooting information is located in the Centigram Series 6 Diagnostics Manual This section assumes the Model 70 has been in service and has subsequently failed If you experience problems during installation double check your work to ensure it was done properly and try to restart the server If the server still fails call your technical support group for additional instructions The troubleshooting process is actually a series of linked processes that include problem recognition diagnosis problem or fault isolation repair and repair verification General Troubleshooting Procedure Troubleshooting methods depend on a technician s experience and therefore can vary widely Centigram recommends a systematic approach that you can adapt to most meth
402. server displays the report to the output device you select If you are sending it to the console use the following commands to control scrolling To stop scrolling Press Ctrl To restart scrolling Press Ctrl Q Doc Rev A CP 1340 Page2o0f 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference The following is a sample System Information Report SYSTEM INFORMATION Fri Apr 28 14 55 52 1995 VoiceMemo SERVICE Release 6 00 Rev A17 01 Tue Apr 25 12 56 46 1995 Partion Table m mmr um Serial number for hard disk is 1234 Serial number for hard disk is 1234 System hours 240 Hour Lock 0 Port Lock 0 Link Lock 8 UI Lock 0 Floppy Type 1 44M OneView session licenses 100 OneView client licenses 300 Figurel Sample System Information Report Doc Rev A ce 620 1 Page 1 of 5 Test Basic Telephony Functions VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure explains how to test basic telephony functions in a newly installed Model 70 Step Reference D Test Telephone lines 1 Set up your equipment as shown in Figure 1 2 Use the telephone test set to verify the following parameters Ringing voltage or proper E amp M Signalling End to end transmission of voice End to end transmission of DTMF 1 Sound quality of lines no noise or static Hunting capability of hunt lines Telephone Test Set B Private Branch Exchange PBX Equipment Model 70 Test Station
403. server supports only CCS for CCITT recommendations and ANSI specifications for digital trunk connectivity And currently only SS7 CCITT C7 is supported as the signaling optional feature integration Refer to the SS7 Integration Manualfor complete information You set El trunk signaling in the Select Trunk Type Menu The menu has options for both analog and digital trunks However when you are configuring a digital trunk interface card the configuration manager accepts only the digital trunk common channel signaling CCS option for El trunks Trunk Configuration Trunk configuration includes the trunk number framing forma and coding format Trunk Sequence Number The trunk number is the logical number of the trunk beginning with trunk number 0 You set the trunk number at the Configuration menu for T1 E Carrier trunk x Menu Framing Format The VoiceMemo application supports CEPT framing and CRC framing You select the framing format the trunk uses at the Configure Frame Format for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Trunk y Menu The configuration manager accepts only the CEPT and CRC framing formats Coding Format The VoiceMemo application supports HDB3 high density bipolar three coding formats for El trunks AM1 alternate mark inversion and You select coding for the trunk at the Configure Frame Coding for Board DUAL El in AT slot x Trunk y Menu The configuration manager accepts only CCITT standard HDB3 or AMI alternat
404. seseeseseseeeet 2 4 Lime Godino 35 ca gigas dP deed 2 4 EAL Gt ee eRe ee ener RT eee Pee 2 5 AM with 2 GS iaia nae ina Aah eae RRR 2 6 BIZ Si n E N R E AA NERAN 2 6 The Series 6 Server and Tl Applications sessssssssssssssessesssessesseesseeseeseee 2 6 T 1 Connectivity Features serere e i 2 7 T1 Connectivity Functional Operation ssscsssssssssecccssscscessnesessnnneeseeeses 2 7 Dual T 1 Trunk Interface Card 1ss sscsssesesssseseseccsesesessseseesesesescessensnseeeseeees 2 8 Integration With Analog Trunk Interfaces s sssrserrsrerreeseessteteess eerie 2 7 Clock Synchronization e084 sonido Maida 2 7 T1 Digital Carrier Events c cccssssssssssssssesssssssssssssessssssesssssuessssssssssssnses 2 10 Alarm Handling and Reporting ssseseecsssesseeeseeeseecnsseensensteeseennseensenees 2 10 Out Of Frame OOF Alarm oo ccesesessesssessesessssesecsescsecsenees 2 11 Yelow Alamit nananana i eraa eR 2 11 Bl e Alarm oinarri i EE RE aE E a 2 11 Red Alarm ee aip riei ie EEEE RE E i 2 12 Carrier Group Alarm CGA ssssssssseesesseseesssessseessteereressessssessseeseeeesee 2 12 Digital Trunk Status srein 2 12 Configuration ove eee teeeseeescseesnseseneesnseeseneesuscessnessnseessnesenseessaees 2 13 Slot ASSIQNMENE ceeccsesssseesssessssesssessneessscessceeseceseessuessscessceeseecssessseeenseease 2 13 Module Number oe 2 14 Input Output Address cceccsseesssesesssseseeseeeenesseneneseenesese
405. sesesssssssssssssssttessstessssssessssesssseet CP 3153 Place a Digital Trunk Into Service 20 ssesesesesceesescseeeeeseeeceeeeeceeseneaees CP 3155 Put Digital Trunk Out of Service sssssssccssssssssssssccccesssssseeccsssessssnessee CP 3154 ce 3150 Page of 6 Dual T1 Offline Configuration E cane E Ok ane tne Though typically a factory installed standard feature the Dual T digital trunk connectivity feature can be retrofitted to a Series 6 server in the field Use this procedure if you are adding a Dual T1 Digital Trunk Interface card to a Series 6 server that you already have This procedure presumes that you have already set the card jumpers and switches and installed it in the Series 6 server This procedure gives you the instructions for configuring the feature software to support a TI digital trunk T1 trunk configuration is done offline using the Resource Manager In this procedure you will set Module number in which the Dual T card resides J O port address of the card Signaling used on the trunk channels Trunk number 0 through 60 framing format D3 D4 or ESF and coding AMI or AM1 with ZCS Doc Rev A cl 3150 Page 2 of 6 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference l Reach the offline Resource Configuration Menu Menu Map 13 2 Add a resource card number Select A Add resource card Prompt Available slots are x x x 9 x Il x x x Input your choice Response The card number accordi
406. sesssseceseseeseseeeeseseeseseeeeseseeneneees CP 7015 View Hard Disk Operational Parameters CP 5313 View or Edit History File cccccecssssscssssssssssesssessssecssseesssncsseseesees CP 5304 View the Configuration Names s scsssssssseseseseesssesseseeneeeees CP 7005 Note Procedures for building the customer database are in the VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual For additional information refer to the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual and the System Implementation Guide For detailed information about optional features refer to the respective optional feature manual Updates to procedures and the Model 70 are issued to the field in Centigram s Notices to Installers You should add them to this guide as appropriate ce 5303 Page 1 of 1 Recover a Lost Console Passcode VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to access the console after the Root or Super user console passcode has been lost It is assumed the module attached to the console has been shut down following the procedure listed in CP 6268 WARNING This procedure requires the server to be removed from normal operation Centigram recommends that you run this process during periods of low call traffic Step k Reference Start the Series 6 server and bypass the normal login and password Prompt Login Response bypass Prompt Password Response bypass 2 When prompted insert the Service diskett
407. set cccccccceeceeeecceeece eee eneeneeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeaees 2 5 Procedures Comment sireeni AE aaa a dake ved eats ean thes ETETNEK EEEE odd hb aa eaten eee 2 6 Curtent Templates estes cask at se ee ee eer DACA i Mets te Gar westerns eta Oa a E E Rad a Set ns lide a ee aI 2 6 Error Action erennert ca reia o in an E a ET NESANA ENAERE nar T Host N umbererarosta aaa ia ve A A lis a n ie a aS 2 8 Install Application imi e ini a AE EAA ESENE EEA NAE EATE iaaiiai 2 9 List Applications enS ouei O a eea En E NEENA i DEE a T TAVA Oa D ttt 2 9 ME Enablers cmenn ao tha agen ia rA da OEA A EON in OEA EEE 2 10 LD E 1 AEE OE E OES BEEE BE VEEE EE E 2 10 Number of In band Tasks on This Host eee 2 10 Save Applicaton merren A A T a A aan 27 LA Show Application ccccesssscccsceseeceersscsesegececeassessceeseesceseesauuers pibesttaalesiatrondentel 2 11 Show Number of In band Tasks on Each Host ees 2 12 Time Out aret foci iiie iia eves ET TA O A EA aa 2 12 Task List List of General Procedures General Procedures List of Detailed Procedures Detailed Procedures Appendix A Fujitsu Starlog Enhanced In band Integration Features and Functions 5 c3psiscsstsoesaisbsvedaouecsssseyenscdesesssornmeecasosertoveaovienedanrs A l Hardware and Software Requirements s sscsessecsssceseseessseesseseeseeeseseeneens A 2 Feature Interactions and Limitations ss ssessesressrssssssssssoresreesersersreseesse A 3 Use
408. siId to test or A for all or Q to quit Response aifyou Want totest all the disks in the system otherwise enter the bus and two digit SCSI ID numbers separated by a colon of the disk to be tested Doc Rev A CP 7031 Page 2 of 2 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later step Reference 5 Identify which tests are to be executed Prompt All options default to Y Perform Controller Test YN Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Sequential Test Y N Response Yor press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Random Seek Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test Prompt Perform Spiral Seek Test Y N Response Y or press Enter to perform the test N to skip the test 6 If any test does not pass contact your Centigram Distributor or Centigram TAC 7 If all tests pass enable the modules Select host status Prompt Module Status Menu Select E ENABLE a module Prompt Input a module id in the following range no on on n Which Module Response Enter the number s of the module s to enable The module s automatically resets and returns to normal operation Doc Rev A Appendix Public Telecommunications Network Connection This appendix describes supplemental product information that you can use to ensure that your Series 6 Model 70 is correctly installed and complies with various requiremen
409. so forth The T digital trunk connectivity feature supports from one to four T trunks with up to 60 ports per module to a single PBX or to a single CO On the receive side of the trunk relative to the Series 6 server the T Trunk Interface Card demultiplexes the voice overhead and signaling time slots to recover traffic data voice information framing bits and signaling data For connectionsto differing PBXs COs or a mix of PBXs and COs with Tls the trunks should be connected to different modules 2 7 Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Dual T1 Trunk Interface Card The Series 6 server uses a Model MB89 110 Dual T1 Trunk Interface Card This card is the interface for up to two per card T digital trunks The interface card an AT bus compatible adapter card plugs into the server backplane in Series 6 Model 70 Model 1201 and Model 120S and Model 640 The interface card supports balanced standard 8 pin RJ 48C trunk connections The T1 Digital Trunk Interface and the DSP24 line cards interconnect through the MVIP bus Figure 2 5 Configuration and line group assignments for both are handled through the Configuration Manager refer to TR 1903 in the Technical Reference Manual for configuration information On the receive side of the trunk the Dual T trunk interface card demultiplexes the voice overhead and signaling time slots to recover traffic data voice information framing and error checking bits and signalin
410. sreess GP 504 Configure Fujitsu Starlog Integration ccs GP 505 Configure Northern Telecom MTX Integration eres csesseseeeeeees GP 509 Configure Northern Telecom Norstar Integration s s GP 507 Add or Cancel a Phoneline Exception ccccsecsseessesessesesessessseeneseees DP 7022 Add or Delete Receptionist II Extensions 1 DP 6034 Assign the Enhanced In band Integration Application to a Line Group DP 7006 Configure In band Digit Absorption and Signed Offset sss DP 7007 Connect the Chassis Ground to the Rack Mount VoiceMemo System DP 3021 Create a New Enhanced In band Integration csccsssesseseeeteenesenes DP 7501 Define a Line Group for Applications ssse ssssssssecssseesssssessssneees DP 6028 Enable Conditional Greetings ssesssssscssssssssssescesssecesssuesssssessssneees DP 7023 Install an Enhanced In band Integration Template Set DP 7010 Modify an Enhanced In band Integration Application 1 DP 70 11 Perform an Online Optional Feature Installation 0 DP 5402 Set In band Module Numbers and Number of Tasks 1see DP 7016 Doc Rev A Configure an Enhanced In band Integration cr 502 Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later This procedure describes the steps required to configure your AIP VoijceMemo system with Enhanced In band Integration These steps include a Detailed Procedure that is a sample for reference when creating in band templates for use with your part
411. ssage Waiting uses an VoiceMemo serial port and an external 1200 baud modem to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the PBX This does not use a VoiceMemo line port and is usually the most economical type of message waiting The limitation with this type of message waiting is that the confirmation tones from the PBX are not passed from the modem back to the VoiceMemo system Fujitsu Starlog Incoming Trunks Station Forwarding Message Retrieval Outgoing Trunks DTMF to PBX Message Waiting Type 3 uses VoiceMemo line ports to pass DTMF message waiting requests to the PBX e Pager and Message Delivery Message Waiting Type 5 uses one or more VoiceMemo line ports to outdial to external paging systems or telephone numbers Starlog PBX AIP VoiceMemo System Enhanced In band and Receptionist II DiLs Applications ny N R Integration Ports m Queue RS 232 eo Message Waiting a r or Message Waiting Port s DTMF to PBX Circular Message Waiting Hunt Group Outdial Ports Outdials Paging Fax Call Placement 3007E18 Figure A 1 Starlog to VoiceMemo System Integration Structure Hardware and Software Requirements A 2 The AIP VoiceMemo system software requirements are l Release 5 02 or later l Enhanced In band Integration optional feature The VoiceMemo system hardware requirements are One line card port for every incoming phone line One serial port for RS 232 message wa
412. st 2 10 DP 7016 save application 2 11 show application 2 1 1 show number of in band tasks on each host 2 12 time out 2 12 DP 7501 message waiting with AT amp T System 25 C l with Fujitsu Starlog A l with Northern Telecom Norstar D 1 with Omni B 2 message waiting indicators l l MF signaling enable 2 1 0 N next templates field description 1 5 2 10 use during template execution 1 7 Northern Telecom Norstar Enhanced In band integration D 1 feature interactions D 3 integration limitations D 3 integration requirements D 2 template specifications D 4 with Receptionist II D 3 0 offline menus 1 11 Omni Enhanced In band integration B l GP 504 feature interactions B 3 integration limitations B 3 integration requirements B 3 template specifications B 4 with Receptionist II B 3 online menus l l 1 optional features install with system online DP 5402 P phoneline exceptions adding DP 7022 canceling DP 7022 setting DP 7022 port number to line number conversion D1 7022 R Receptionist II adding extensions DP 6034 deleting extensions D1 6034 dial string DP 6034 with AT amp T System 25 C 3 with Fujitsu Star log A 3 with Northern Telecom Norstar D 3 with Omni B 3 revert see transfer Index S spaces use in templates 1 10 Starlog see Fujitsu Starlog T tables port number to line number conversion DP 7022 valid action field entries 1 5 2 2 valid data field
413. stalled it can extend a call to an extension which is No Answer Forwarded back to the VoiceMemo ports The Receptionist II port waits for that call forward to occur recognizes by an answer tone that it has connected to a VoiceMemeo port and disconnects For this forwarding and call recognition to work correctly you must Program the VoiceMemo system to recognize the extension numbers of the ports running the Receptionist II application DP 6034 A 3 Fujitsu Starlog e Program the VoiceMemo ports to dial a DTMF when the system identifies a call forwarded from one of its own ports Set line exception 9 for ringing timeout to be greater than the Starlog s Forward No Answer timer See the Receptionist Manual for more information about programming for Receptionist I VoiceMemo Template Specifications A 4 The Starlog templates have a default inter digit timeout of 2 seconds and are set to hangup on an error condition Without actually editing the templates you can change the inter digit timeout and the error action by using the Starlog Edit Parameters Menu a The default templates for Starlog integration are NAME STARLOG THE RS Es 3 Next 23 4 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 LI 229 3 Comment Wait for ring Te Cs fy 22 070 Next 34 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Comment In case we lose C T3 1 0 sx V1 20 H Next Comment Direct internal call Stuffed 0 T4
414. stem Shutdown You are prompted WARNING This will terminate call processing Type shutdown if you really want to do this Enter shutdown Step 2 Specify the modules to shut down When you are prompted modules to shutdown enter a for all modules Step 3 You arepromptedwait for message waiting queues to be empty Y Press Enter to wait for the message waiting queues to clear Step 4 You arepromptedwait for paging queues to be empty Y Press Enter to wait for the paging queues to clear Step 5 Wait until all lines are off hook When prompted Perform Off line System Verification respond N to skip the Verify Step 6 Reach the Module Maintenance Menu as follows and disable all modules Disable the module connected to the server console last The prompts are Enable or disable modules Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Page 5 Enter Y This takes you to the Module Maintenance Menu Select D Disable a module Which module Enter the number of the module to disable Repeat this choice until finally specifying the module connecting to the server console When you do so you are prompted Warning Disabling module 1 will result in system reboot Do not confirm disable if you do not want this to happen Type disable to confirm your request Enter disable to disable the module 4 The server resets Wait for the maintenance mode prompt Run the prompts add program When you see the prompt E
415. sure that it is in service If it is not repeat Step 2 to set it in service If the trunk status does not change refer to the Centigram Series 6 Communications Server Diagnostics Manual for troubleshooting information After you have changed the status of the selected trunk to out of service exit to the Main Menu Doe Rev A T1 E1 Menu Map 13 Physical Resource Configuration Menu A Add resource card Add Board to Database Menu A Dual T1 B AG 24 30 C AG 8 D ATI E CGRM 2 DUAL El G MTP Processing H Analog FAX I M VIP FAX 2 4 8 X exit Cc Card configuration Configuration Menu for Board in AT slot xx A IO Port Address change Select IO Port Address Menu A 0x300 B 0x2300 T set Trunk signalling type Select Trunk Type Menu 0 Analog E amp M 1 Analog E amp M Type 1A 2 Analog_Loopstart 3 Analog DID 4 Analog_Groundstart 5 Digital E amp M 6 Digital Loopstart 7 Digital DID 8 Digital Groundstart 9 Digital CommonChannel N None digital support X eXit C Configure T1 E1 carrier Configuration menu for T1 E1 Carrier at trunk x T set Trunk number F configure Framing format Configure Frame Format for Board Jin AT slot xx Trunk x Menu A D3 D4 framing B ESF framing C CEPT framing D CRC framing X eXit C Configure Coding format Configure Frame Coding for Board in AT slot xx Trunk x A AM coding B AMI with ZCS coding C B8ZS coding D
416. t Message Waiting Permanent Do Not Disturb All Other Incoming Trunks No Answer Recall Timer O 45 s Yes 10 No Yes Yes Yes 30 Yes Yes Yes 30 15 is default must be less than System Reroute and No Answer Recall timers optional applies to the Voice Mail PBX only required on the Voice Mail PBX in a Network or Pager Notification through a Remote PBX required on the Voice Mail PBX if trunk to trunk connections are to be permitted 17 is default must be greater than call forward and system reroute timers optional MS2007 only 17 is default must be greater than call forward and system reroute timers System Options Assignment Call Rerouting Timer 5 60 s 22 default must be greater than Call Forward No Answer and less than No Answer Recall timers Ringing Cadence for Tie Line Calls Internal External Internal required if MITEL MAIL performs screened transfers Disable End of Dial Character Yes No No ONS OPS Circuit Descriptor Assignment Default values can be assigned for the ONS voice mail ports which will be used for Messaging Pager Notification or FaxMemo Single line sets on the PBX subscribing to voice mail and equipped with a message lamp must include the following option gt Message Waiting Lamp Yes No Yes Single Line Set Assignment Assign directory numbers to the ONS voice mail ports and apply the proper Circuit Descriptor Number
417. t on a nonconductive surface such as an anti static bag Make sure you have the anti static bags before you begin 5 Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables from the server Doc Rev A Cl 6220 Page 2 of4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 6 Remove the cover to the server 7 Identify the line card you want to remove Disconnect all cables from the board you are going to remove 8 Looking at the line cards from the front of the cabinet locate the screws that secure the cards in the mother board along the back panel Remove the screw that holds the line card retaining bracket to the cabinet as shown in Figure 1 9 Holding the card at each end carefully pull the card straight out until the edge connectors are free Be careful not to scrape the card against other components CAUTION If removing a line card and not replacing it install a slot cover over the vacant guide slot in the server back panel a If you are not replacing the removed line card also remove the cables associated with it 10 Place the line card in an anti static protective wrapper and prepare it for return and repair Doc Rev A CD Remove the line Card SP 6224 4 Place the lower end of the cover so that the metal tab fits outside hooking over the cabinet edge Let the cover lean inward do not push in or down yet Pull the slot cover up far enough to hook the prong over
418. t terminate in CA1 1A connectors for loop circuits or CA2EA connectors for E amp M circuits The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device and prevents overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices but the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices cannot exceed 100 The LN for a Model 70 is 100 No other terminal devices can share the same telephone line while the Model 70 is connected Public Telecommunications Network Connection Responsibilities of the Equipment Owner The following paragraphs describe the responsibilities of the equipment owner subject to the rights of the telephone company and government regulations Incidence of Harm If your equipment harms the telephone network the telephone company can discontinue your service temporarily If possible the company will notify you in advance If this is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Rights of the Telephone Company The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures which could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If this occurs you will be notified in advance so you can maintain uninterrupted telephone service Coin Service or Party line Use This equipment may not be used
419. ta sx A Action m VI T Timeout 10 E Error Action m H N Next Templates C Comment Local Login X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Current Template w 1 21 Enter M to select Modify Template option Enter 7 to select template 7 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter key to expand menu Press Enter to display Template 7 in its expanded form IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 7 D Data A Action m T Timeout Error Action N Next Templates w C Comment X Exit 9 Enter the following information for Template 7 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU D Data EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X A Action V EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X T Timeout m 10 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X E Error Action V5 EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X C Comment A uto A ttendant Receptionist Il EDIT TEMPLATE MENU M D A T E N C X Press Enter to re display Template 7 and check that the information you entered is correct IN BAND EDIT TEMPLATE Menu M Modify Template 7 D Data A Action V5 T Timeout m 10 E Eror Action V5 N Next Templates s C Comment Auto Attendant Receptionist 1 X Exit EDIT TEMPLATE MENU gt Enter X to Exit from templates menu Press Enter to display Enhanced In band menu in its expanded form ENHANCE
420. technical support group for assistance in adding the serial number of the new hard disk to the Service Diskette the Module Enable Diskette and all Optional Feature Diskette s if the server contains any You can do this while the server is processing calls a Doe Rev A CP 6592 Page 2 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference oN e Run an Online System Verify CP 7001 Perform a floppy backup CP 5703 Shut down the system CP 6268 Turn off the system power Set Up the Hardware 7 Remove cabinet cover CP 6224 r 1 8 Disconnect the disk cable from the existing hard disk and remove it from the C1 6221 cabinet 9 Rejumper the existing defective or malfunctioning hard disk from master to slave TR 1923 10 Reconnect the disk cable to slave hard disk Do not reinstall the hard disk 11 Jumper the new hard disk to master if required IDE hard disks are shipped from TR 1923 Centigram configured as master 12 Attach the second connector on the disk cable to the new master hard disk fa second primary hard disk is already connected to this cable connector temporarily remove it until the master slave data transfer process is complete Do not connect the new master hard disk to a third connector Run the Disk Replacement Program 13 14 15 16 17 18 Note In general you should never operate the Model 70 with the cover removed This is an exception Proceed with cau
421. tegration Installation Date 16 May 95 3 35 02 pm Last Modify Date 21 Sep 95 4 14 55 pm T1 R T Next 23456789 Comment Incoming Seizure T2 62 dx sx V4 10 H Next Comment CFB External T3 63 dx sx V4 10 H Next Comment CFB Internal T4 65 dx sx V3 10 H Next Comment CFNA External T5 66 dx sx V3 10 H Next Comment CFNA internal T6 64 2150 sx V1 10 H Next 8 Comment Callback Login T7 sx V1 10 H Next Comment Local Login T8 64 dx sx V2 10 H Next Comment CFA T9 V5 10 H Next Comment Auto Att VM Group 2 ONS MESS WAIT lines 2A Application DTMF TO PBX DIALER Initiai Dialtone Detect Y Access dial string Dial tone confirmation 0 Pre DN ON dial string 90 Pre DN OFF dial string 91 FACs for Message Act Deact Post DN ON dial string Post DN OFF dial string Enable End of Dial in System Suppress message light updates Y Wait for dial tone N Options Alternate Code J Phone Line Exceptions Flash Hook Timer change required Exception Number 23 Set to 20 for all Enhanced In Band Lines as shown below Host 1 1 Line 1 configuration 23 Flash hook time Host 1 2 Line 2 configuration 23 Flash hook time Host 1 3 Line 3 configuration 23 Flash hook time Host 1 4 Line 4 configuration 23 Flash hook time FCOS 20 Ol sec 20 01 sec 20 01 sec 20 Ol sec
422. templates for your switch Feature Interactions and limitations VoiceMemo Releases 5 02 and 5 03 allow only one Enhanced In band Integration line group per system Unpredictable system behavior is likely if you use more than one integration Release 5 04 supports multiple line groups of EIB integration Not all switches support all of the features and call types available with Enhanced In band Integration Refer to your switch documentation for more information on the features available with your particular switch 2 Menu Parameters This chapter lists menu choices available in a Voice Memo system You can use this information when planning and installation or when filling in the VoiceMemo worksheets At an AIP maintenance console most menu choices require input from you such as numbering a line group or answering yes to a yes no question These choices change the configuration of the system depending on what you enter Many other menu choices change the system s status such as starting a program or printing a report Still other menu choices are navigational only they go to a submenu or return you to a starting point Navigational choices are excluded from this chapter since they have no effect on the system How to Use This Chapter Refer to this chapter when you need more information about a menu item and what kind of input is needed what ranges are acceptable and what units are used for any numerical entries T
423. tenance of software files System backups and restore System Administration System diagnostics and fault isolation The Model 70 application comes pre installed with default values that can easily be changed through the console The server issues prompts to guide the administrator You can enter a question mark 2 in response to any prompt to receive online help Administration security features include console passcode protection so that unauthorized users can not access the Model 70 from a terminal Administration by Phone Limited system administration can be performed over the telephone through the administrator s mailbox These functions include Creating deleting and modifying mailboxes Changing mailbox passcodes Changing the system clock Getting usage statistics Backing up server to diskette if the back up fits on one diskette In addition to passcode protection the timing parameters built into the server are used to prevent unauthorized access to and from an administrator s mailbox The timing parameters function as follows The Model 70 allows three to five seconds of response time for each prompt before announcing no change and returning to the Administration Menu If more time is needed the administrator can press 1 in response to a prompt to restart the timer The server issues an error message and repeats the prompt Centigram recommends against assigning a name or individual greeti
424. ter The server waits for the other modules to boot before it continues Prompt Waiting for the other modules to boot up Updating configuration Please wait Messages are displayed to the screen showing conversion of records if any 19 Exit and reboot to complete the update Doc Rev A ce 6483 Page 1 of 1 Offline System Software Update VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to update the system software on your Centigram Series 6 server to a new release while the server is offline Step Reference 1 Review the System History File for any software modifications made to the server CP 5304 Ch 5 2 Runa System Information report and verify that the serial number s of the server CP 1340 Ch 2 hard disks are listed on the Service Diskette and all Optional Feature Diskettes 3 If you use billing reports perform a gather of all billing information VotceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual 4 If you use billing reports print out the billing reports 5 Print out the logfile for future reference VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual 6 Print out any CDR Logfiles you need for future reference 7 Runa System Verify Use either the online or offline verify program CP 5701 Ch 5 or CP 7001 Ch 2 8 Perform a floppy backup A backup is done before and after the update procedure CP 5703 Ch 5 9 Shut down the system CP 6268 Ch 5 10 Update the software prompts Module
425. ternal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started with an undefined port parameter HISRCV Unable to open serial port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started and it is not able to open the serial port that it just attached to this task HISRCV Unable to get stty on RS232 port Internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started and it is not able to get the current TTY options of the serial port HISRCV Unable to SET stty on R 232 port internal error or serial port error check serial port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started and it is not able to set the desired TTY options of the serial port This ineludes baud rate Parity data and stop bit settings HISRCV Unable to SET device attributes for RS232 port Internal error or serial port error check serial Port and report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started and it is not able
426. the guide and bring it flush with the cabinet wall Push down to secure the slot cover in place The slot opening must be covered to maintain the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the server and ensure proper cooling inside See Figure 2 for details CP 6220 Page 3 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Figure 1 Remove the Line Card 2 Slot Cover Figure CP 6220 Page 4 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference Install the line Card 6 Verify that you have the correct kind of line card for this server I R 1920 7 Ifyou are expanding the server and installing a line card into a previously unused slot remove the slot cover a Insert the tip of a small flat bladed screwdriver in the slot at the lower inside end of the slot cover b Slightly twist the screwdriver popping up the slot cover From inside the cabinet lift the slot up and out CAUTION Be careful not to damage other components when removing the slot cover You might want to remove cards on either side of the empty slot before you begin to remove the slot cover 8 Remove the line card from its wrapper and place it on a grounded static free surface component side up 9 Record the card s serial number in your equipment log 10 Set the line cards ID jumpers configuration jumpers and channel switch settings For detailed line card configuration procedures see the Centigram Series 6 Technical Referen
427. the two configurations Reference Step l Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu then go to the VoiceMemo Venu Map 12 Active Configuration Menu 2 Name the configuration Select N Name Configurations Prompt Enter the configuration number to name CR for no change Response Number 0 or 1 of the configuration to create or modify name for Prompt Enter a name for this configuration or lt cr gt for default or existing name The name can be up to 24 characters long Name Response Enter a name that describes the configuration 3 Repeat step 2 to create or modify the name for the other configuration Doc Rev A a 005 Page of VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later View the Configuration Names This procedures describes how to view the names of the two system configurations Step Reference Reach the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu then go to the VoiceMemo Venu Map 12 Active Configuration Menu 2 View the report Select V View Configurations Prompt Configuration last modified by OFFLINE CONFIGURATION is n Where is the number of the configuration gt The system displays the report and returns to the command line Doc Rev A ce 7014 Page of 1 Enable a Module VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later This procedure describes how to enable a module to return it to normal call processing operation When changing the status of multiple modules always change the one
428. tion Insert the Floppy Boot Diskette Turn on the system power and boot from the diskette When prompted select the option to change the CMOS configuration Once in the CMOS set up go to the entry for Hard Disk 1 and set the parameters to correspond to the new hard disk which you are installing as the new master hard disk Go to the entry for Hard Disk 2 and set the parameters to correspond to the existing hard disk You have just reconfigured the existing hard disk It was the master hard disk now it is the slave hard disk Save these changes by pressing the Esc key and then the F4 key The server boots from the floppy disk drive displaying the Copyright and the Revision history It prompts you to select from two options floppy or service 19 Select the service option The server then asks for the Service Diskette 6 0 Dac Rey A CP 6592 Page 3 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference 20 Insert the Service Diskette and press Enter From the menu of options select REPLACE DISK 2 1 The server displays a warning message This is your prompt to verify that both hard disks are correctly connected and that you did a floppy backup before you started this procedure If you failed to complete these requirements stop the procedure at this point and complete them Prompt WARNING REPLACE PROGRAM REPLACE program should be run only when you want to replace a SCSI disk wit
429. tion is also located in the VozceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual and the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual A task list and Centigram Procedures CPs describing upgrading and updating procedures are located at the end of this chapter The task list identifies two procedural levels of CPs a high level CP and a low level CP A high level CP provides instructions on how to do overall tasks such as installing a server A low level CP provides instructions on more specific tasks such as how to install a line card Readers familiar with Centigram servers can use the CPs as a checklist if desired while readers new to Centigram servers can use CPs for step by step instructions After gaining experience with this documentation you can find your own innovative way of using the task list One possible approach on how to use the task list is provided below Using the Task list Select from the task list the title of the task that you want to perform and note its high level CP number Flip through the CPs in this chapter until you find the correct CP number Follow the instructions given in the CP A reference column in each CP contains pointers when necessary to supplemental information such as another procedure a technical reference in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual another manual or menu maps Use the tabs included with this binder to find referenced supplemental information that is located within this ma
430. tion line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu Schedule Company Greetings Enable Call Placement Message Delivery Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers Doc Rev A GP 505 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step Reference 7 Set the following phone line exceptions for each line in the line group DP 7022 Exception Value Description 3 2 Dial Tone Detect Time 9 20 Ringing Timeout 25 Y Enable DTMF Column 3 14040 Loop Break Detect Time 14490 In ring Off Time 148 3 In ring On Time Low 1521500 In ring Minimum Power 1648 DTMF Output Duration 1762 DTMF Output Level Note Ifthe VoiceMemo system has the Receptionist II optional feature the Ringing Timeout line exception 9 must be 3 seconds ess than the switch s Ring No Answer timer 8 If desired add feature bit 017 to users FCOS s to reduce the amount of time that DP 5011 the VoiceMemoa system waits before clearing a port after an undetected caller hangup 9 If desired add feature bits 161 and 162 to users FCOS s and have users activate DP7023 their conditional greetings 10 If your AIP VoiceMemo system has the Receptionist II optional feature installed DP60
431. tion will proceed as expected HISRCV Unable to re send to hid data lost Internal error message lost report condition This data is logged when hisrcv needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name It tries to send once to hissnd and fails then it is temporarily able to attach by name to hissnd again tries to send a second time and tails The data is lost and hisrcv continues to run looking for further link data The PMS system is probably not getting any data from hissnd and so it will consider the link down When hissnd successfully restarts and attaches it s name hisrcv and hismwi can locate it and link communication will proceed as expected HISRCV Unable to read eeco OAA record Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started and it is not able to read from disk the configuration data set by hismeau HISRCV Use hissnd port hyatt Internal error report condition Error condition causes abort error displayed on console and task restart This data is logged when hisrcv is started without a Port first parameter The hyatt is the optional setting that tells the software to interface to an Encore PMS system at 1200 baud Without the setting the software assumes to interface to a HIS PMS system at 2400 baud HISRCV Bad RS 232 port name In
432. to set the desired device attributes for the serial port This includes disabling break X on X off escape and other features hismwi HISMWI MWI ON for station number x Normal operation This data is logged after the following task communication completes The task mwla requests hismwi to send a message waiting request for station number x The task hismwi in turn requests hissnd to send out the specific message waiting packet The task hissnd completes the packet transfer and replies to bismwi At this time the CDR message is logged and hismwi replies to mwla HISMWI MWI off for station number x Normal operation This data is logged after the following task communication completes The task mwla request 3 hismwi to send a message waiting request for station number x The task hismwi in turn requests hissnd to send out the specific message waiting packet The task hissnd completes the packet transfer and replies to hismwi At this time the CDR message is logged and hismwi replies to mwla HISMWI Unable to locate hissnd internal error may locate next transmission else report condition This data is logged when hismwi needs hissnd to send data allowing the link to stay active but the task hissnd can not be found by name Each time data is received over the data link from the PMS system hismwi retries to locate hissnd If itis again unsuccessful this message is again logged When hissnd successfully restarts and
433. ts and standards Refer to the regulatory compliance statements at the front of this manual for other requirements Model 70 Connections The following paragraphs describe the requirements for connecting the Model 70 to the Public Telecommunications Network PTN Shielded Cables You must supply and use shielded cables when making connections to any of the following ports 1 Console ports Serial ports Text to Speech TTS card ports MESA Net ports Disk drive ports A l Public Telecommunications Network Connection Jack Types Use standard modular telephone jack types when connecting to the telephone network Use RJ 11 C or RJ 2 1X for tne cards in a two wire loop start or DID configuration Use RJ 2EX or RJ 1CX jacks for E amp M operation Use an RJ 11 C jack for the modem port Refer to the following table for facility interface codes port identifications service order codes RENs and network jacks by port type MTS WATS Service Registration Facility Port Order Network Status Interface Code Designation Code REN Jacks 2 wire loop E line card or AT 9 0F 0 2A RJ 11C or start line card ports 0 31 RJ 21X 2 wire loop Modem 9 0F 0 3A RJ 11C start E amp M E line card or AT 9 0F 0 0B RJ 2EX or line card ports 0 31 RJ 1CX For fax cards the REN is O OB and the network jack is RJ 11C or RJ 21X Connectors and Loads The Model 70 is connected to the telecommunications network via telephone line cords tha
434. tures can be enabled disabled from the server console Callers who leave messages can Replay and rerecord their messages Make their messages urgent placing them in front of the normal message queue Leave messages in additional mailboxes on the server Product Description Be transferred to the operaror or any other extension on the switch System Features Distribution lists also see Mailbox User Features A distribution list allows a mailbox user to send the same message to several other users simultaneously Mailbox user distribution lists are established over the telephone Each list is assigned an individual distribution list number integrations Integrations establish the connection between the telephone switch and the Model 70 They provide call information for direct and forwarded calls and message waiting signals for the user Integrations are transparent to bothuusers and callers In band DTMF integration is standard and allows the switching system and Model 70 to communicate by exchanging tones in the voice frequency band Optional System Features AMIS Analog AMIS Analog is a system networking application that enables the Model 70 to communicate with other vendors voice processing systems OneView OneView is a multimedia desktop messaging program that works with the Centigram VoiceMemo and FaxMemo applications It allows you to send and receive fax messages on your PC and to exchange messages using your
435. tutes the proper data in its place Because of the predictable nature of B8ZS encoding this encoding technique does not interfere with the transmitted data In the example shown in Figure 2 4 AM is used to code 1s O s are represented by a return to the baseline that is O volts Data Sent Line f Signal Substituted Byte x1887vm6 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 BPV BPV Figure 2 4 B8ZS line Coding The Series 6 Server and T1 Applications Digital trunk connectivity in a Series 6 server is available as a standard feature where the system connects to the local switch through T digital trunks A Series 6 server module with digital connectivity has one or more J digital trunk interface cards with one or more voice service cards DSP24 cards FaxMemo cards and so forth Digital and analog trunks can coexist in the same Series 6 server Such a mix could be implemented in a Model 20 30 port configuration where the maximum number of digital circuits allowed is 24 that is one T1 trunk and the balance of ports are analog trunks Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity T1 Connectivity Features Series 6 servers Model 120S and Model 640 can support a total capacity of 60 PCM voice application channels per module Note Port as used elsewhere in Centigram Series 6 documentation when used in the context of digital trunk connectivity equates directly to PCM channel channel and circuit
436. u sitet ea leanne se ety aa oD 6 2 Step 2 Configure the Enhanced In Band Application sssssssssssssssssssesssssessssessssssssssssees 6 3 Step 3 Install the Enhanced In Band Application ssssssssssseseseisiiiiiiririrrsssssssssssssssrrererrnnnniss 6 4 Step 4 Set Additional In Band Features Receptionist I oo csceessesesseesesseeeseesneeseeeeeees 6 5 Test the Application onc eciccscccscsssesssessssssseessecsstessesssssssssssesssssssessssessessecsssessuessasesenssneesese 31 No mv gt c 7 CONSOLE AND REMOTE ACCESS TOMIT EMAL its scomtonswe dat cas Pednmaateaw tad rnrn 32 7 1 Console Setup PeeRRC ESET R OCS SCCUCOOSCOCOCSLOSe re Cer errr rrr este severe ses 7 2 Remote Maintenance ACCESS 0 2 cece ce eee e teueccnausateseutsssescssseeeesansseesseecssuscessenstsvesseserscessenses D MITEL MAIL Enhanced In Band Integration Software Rev 6 0B on SX 200 DIGITAL and SX 200 LIGHT Systems OVERVIEW This document is intended to show the necessary hardware connectivity to the MITEL SX 200 DIGITAL PABX and the SX 200 LIGHT PABX as well as to define the Customer Data Entry CDE requirements to integrate the MITEL MAIL Enhanced In band application with the PBX GENERAL Full integration between the MITEL MAIL system and the SX 200 is achieved through the use of the Enhanced In band signaling application on M TEL MA L and the Abbreviated Dialing and ONS Voice Mail features on SX 20
437. udes T digital trunk connectivity as a standard feature This feature facilitates serverjntegration with switches which predominantly use digital trunks for connection to the telephone network and to special service equipment such as the Series 6 server All Series 6 server products can be equipped with digital trunks The Model 70 and Model 120 both support only one T trunk the Model 1205 and each Model 640 module support up to four T trunks configured to use all trunk channels or fractional T1 up to the maximum 60 port system capacity If you need an introduction to the T Digital Trunk Connectivity Feature of the Series 6 server for overall applications information this section is written for you If you need an introduction to the T Digital Trunk Connectivity Feature as a general review before configuring it or troubleshooting it this section is also for you This section briefly reviews the structure of a T frame and the bit assignments for channel associated signaling CAS It also discusses Series 6 server T 1 applications T1 features functional operation alarms and specifications This section is not intended to be a comprehensive discussion of digital trunking For more information on digital encoding of voice signals and digital transmission refer to the many external tutorials on the subject Also contact Customer Training for the use of digital transmission by Centigram equipment T1 Digital Trunk Multiplexing When
438. ultiple messages for outside caller y n Y L Default prompt language English E Delay Before Answer 0 1 sec increments SO F Dial by Name Menu P Passcode Menu O OneCall Menu A Allow Dial an Extension Menu Q Speech Quality Menu R Receptionist Menu S Analog Networking Configuration Menu B Mailbox On Demand Menu X Exit 2 Enter to select Enable Receptionist from the In band Menu Receptionist Enabled y n N Y Enter Y to enable to enable Receptionist 24 3 Enter N to select Day Night Menu Day Night Menu S Start time of the workday hh mm am pm 08 00 AM End time of the workday hh mm am pm 05 00 PM W Weekend Days Monday thry Sunday DN DDDDDNN X Exit Make any required changes from the default settings Enter X to Exit back to the In band Application menu 4 Enter D to select Dialing Plan Menu Dialing Plan D Dialing plan w 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 E Optional Star Prefix Dpian X Exit gt Make any required changes from the default settings Enter x to Exit back to the In oand Application menu 5 Enter Z to select Dial String and Mailbox Menu Dial String and Mailbox Menu A System Attendant s extension 0 B Attendant s transfer string S C Administrator s mailbox 998 D Attendant s mailbox m 999 E E mail transfer string G General Greeting mailbox H Disconnect String
439. umber 87 5 CMC 104 Include feature number 89 in the classes of service for all VoiceMemo users 6 CMC 200 Assign a phantom station for use as a VoiceMemo pilot number Use an easy to remember number for this station 7 CMC 201 Set each message waiting port as an originate only port I 2 2 8 CMC 204 Set P3 for each VoiceMemo port to disable distinctive ringing 9 CMC 204 Set P4 1 for each 500 2500 set with a message waiting lamp 10 CMC 206 Set P4 1 for the VoiceMemo lines that are used for message waiting Include the ACD pilot if you have placed the VoiceMemo ports in an ACD 11 CMC 251 Set the trunk directory numbers to all zeros P3 0000 on all trunks that can reach VoiceMemo 12 CMC 254 Lengthen the duration of DTMF sending to 128 milliseconds as follows Pl o P2 10 P3 2 13 CMC 301 Create a circular hunt group that contains all of the phone lines connected to the VoiceMemo system You must include the message waiting line s to allow the message waiting return call to reach the hunt group 14 CMC 308 Build an ACD group consisting of the phantom pilot and only those lines assigned to the Enhanced In band Integration Do not include the message waiting ports 15 Forward VoiceMemo user telephones to the phantom extension Doc Rev A cr 506 Page 1 of 1 Configure AT amp T System 25 Integration Voted Memo Remax 5 05 cu Inter This procedure summarizes the steps required to install
440. umber associated with the user mailbox Outdial Notification There are two types of Outdial Notification Paging and Message Delivery Paging notification uses a radio pager to let the mailbox user know in real time that there is a message waiting If the pager is a voice pager the server delivers the first 30 seconds of the voice message Message length is dependent on the pager company It can also send customized alphanumeric messages The user can customize this feature so that the server calls up to two primary and two alternative pager numbers Notification can be given at specified intervals for all messages or set to notify only when urgent messages are received Message Delivery provides notification to a telephone number not associated with a pager The Model 70 calls the designated telephone number at specified intervals announce the number of messages waiting for review and ask the user to log into their mailbox Optional Features CallAgent CallAgent adds call processing capabilities to your Model 70 while working in conjunction with your VoiceMemo software It allows you to create automated attendant and call processing applications letting you control the time destination and method of each call processing event CallAgent gives you the option of Product Description arranging the presentation of what callers hear and where callers go within the server It can be programmed or changed over the telephone using simpl
441. unk Type E amp M E amp M Supervisory Incoming Wink ID Supervisory Outgoing Wink a Configure Trunks for the Enhanced In band line Group 6 Use the following RC transactions to add the Enhanced In band trunk group You configure the message wait trunk and the analog lines in later steps RC 161 Add Change Trunk Group Characteristics 1 TRUNK SIGNALLING IN ouT PAD TRK N RTN DIAL ALT CLASS GRP TRUNK DSP DSP TRK SGNL DIAL SGNL TONE TRK 2 3 AGENT NO APPL COS COS DIR TYPE TONE TYPE RTND GRP WAY WAY GROUP XXX TIE YY ZZ TW TC a TC N 03 4 DO YOU WANT DTMF SIGNALS BLOCKED Y N gt N Where XXX is the trunk group number YY is the displayable COS ZZ is the non displayable COS RC 169 Add Change Trunk Group Characteristics 2 Doc Rev A GP 504 Page 4 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step of 8 RC 212 RC211 wmroryHrPHH nem MAAS Reference Change Show Non Displayable Class of Service 1 R E CD AP EI DH ID MO Vv IN E NE Y N Change Show Displayable Class of Service 1 A 0 TC N OC M M LE E EN LS R RE s s ST Y Y Y 7 Use RC 218 to assign a directory number for the Enhanced In band trunk group This DN is the destination for all forwarded calls If your system has the Receptionist II application it is also the termination point for incoming trunk calls DIR NUM TYPE IDENTIFIER XXX VMS yyzz Where XXX is the directory number Note Doc Rev A yy is number of
442. vels However the VoiceMemo application polls the hardware to detect status and service the cards and does not use hardware interrupt requests You set the card O address in the Configuration Menu for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Each channel in the digital trunk interface can be set for one of these four types of channel associated signaling according to the requirements of CSUs channel banks or other related equipment to which the Series 6 server is connected Dual T1 Digital Trunk Connectivity Loop start Ground start l Direct Inward Dial DID E amp M You set the trunk signaling in the Select Trunk Type Menu The menu has options for both analog and digital trunks However when you are configuring a digital trunk interface card the configuration manager accepts only the digital trunk options Trunk Configuration Trunk configuration includes the trunk number framing format and coding format Trunk Sequence Number k The trunk number is the logical number of the trunk beginning with trunk number O on trunk card 1 You set the trunk number at the Configuration menu for T1 E1 Carrier at trunk x Menu Framing Format The Series 6 server supports D4 12 channel frames and extended superframe ESF 24 channel frames You select the framing format the trunk uses at the Configure Frame Format for Board DUAL T1 in AT slot x Trunk y Menu Coding Format The Series 6 server supports B8ZS AMI alternate mark
443. ves should be updated Status Drives to be updated ENA Drives are not out of synchronization OUTSYN Software speech and accounts OUTDAT Speech and accounts OUTSFW Software Step Reference 1 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the Redundancy Update Menu Menu Map 8 2 Update the redundancy If multiple drives are out of synchronization update the redundancy of all drives using the Update all out of synchronization hard disks option Select A Update all out of synchronization hard disks Prompt Type update to confirm your request Response update Note Any drive listed as ENA is not updated To update a specific disk use Select Q Update system software drives or Select S Update eechan dccount drives on a hard disk 3 Reach the Hard Disk Utilities Menu then go to the SCSI Status Menu Menu Map 8 4 Verify that all disks are in sync Select D Display Status of all SCSI Buses and disks Response Server displays a report showing the status of all disks Verify that all disks show the status as ENA Press Enter to exit A note and timestamp are recorded in the logfile as each disk is placed back in service Doc Rev A cp Q17 Page 1 of 1 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Shut Down a Hard Disk This procedure describes how to shut down a hard disk removing it from service This process requires the server to contain redundant disks Step Referen
444. w to install a redundant hard disk in the Centigram Series 6 Model 70 DANGER Disconnect the system from its power source before connecting cables components or both CAUTION Protect your system from ESD damage during handling of all components b Note You can find TRs referenced in this procedure in the Centigram Series 6 Technical Reference Manual Step Reference Observe Precautions 1 Put on a grounded wrist strap and attach the other end to the cabinet Doing so protects the component from electrostatic discharge 2 Shut down the system and turn off the power if you have not already done so CAUTION Removing a component while the power is on can severely damage the component you are working on and other peripherals 3 Wait one minute after you turn off the power before you remove any components The hard disk should stop spinning and be quiet 4 When removing a component place it on a nonconductive surface such as an anti static bag Make sure you have the anti static bags before you begin 5 Put identification tags on all cables and disconnect cables from the system Doc Rev A Cl 6284 Page 2 of 3 VoiceMemo Release 6 0A and later Step Reference C Remove the Disk Carrier 6 7 WARNING When the disk carrier is removed from the system the power switch terminals are accessible These terminals can have hazardous voltages present even when the power switch is tur
445. ware the system automatically configures the required number of tasks 5 Select the Norstar template set D1 7010 6 Use the Edit Templates option to modify the Data field in templates 2 and 3 The DP 7011 Data field for template 2 must contain the prefix digit used by your switch if any and the pilot number of the hunt group of VMI lines The Data field for template 3 must contain the prefix digit if any and d3 which means to expect a fixed length extension of three digits Alternatively you can use XI in place of the prefix digit in the Data field This causes the VoiceMemo system to ignore one digit The system still expects a digit the prefix digit from the Norstar but it will accept any digit Document Rev A GP 507 Page 2 of 4 VoiceMemo Release 5 03 and later Step 10 11 12 Reference Refer to the Task List in your VoiceMemo Reference and Configuration Manual to Aenu Map 13 find procedures to configure any of the options below for the integration line group You can reach these options by selecting Other Features from the online Enhanced In band Menu 1 Schedule Company Greetings 1 Enable Call Placement Message Delivery 1 Configure for Transfer to System Attendant Define an Administrator s Mailbox Define an Attendant s Mailbox Configure Passcode Parameters Enable Dial by Name Set a default language for the line group Enable multiple messages for outside callers S
446. y or the slash key while simultaneously pressing another key to execute shortcut commands at an Centigram Series 6 server maintenance console Activate a timed out console From the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS GCOS menus return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Menu and save any entries From the offline or online menus or FCOS LCOS IQY GCOS menus return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Menu without saving any entries Stop scrolling a displayed report Cul S Resume scrolling a displayed report Ctrl Q Return to the VoiceMemo application when a or Ctrl D 97 type exit prompt is displayed 1 El Digital Trunk Connectivity This chapter has a description and brief technical overview of the El digital trunk connectivity available for Centigram Series 6 Communications Server ElI PCM Trunking Overview The Series 6 Communications Server includes El digital trunk connectivity as a standard feature This feature facilitates Series 6 server integration with switches which predominantly use digital trunks for connection to the telephone network and to special service equipment such as the Series 6 server f The Model 70 and Model 1201 both support only one EF trunk the Model 120S and the Model 640 each support up to 3 El trunks up to the maximum 60 port system capacity If you need an introduction to the El Digital Trunk Connectivity feature of the Series 6 server for overall applications information thi
447. you do not enter anything at the console for 15 minutes the server automatically exits from the current program When this happens all work that has not been saved on the disk is lost To avoid being timed out and losing your work follow these steps 1 When you need time to think write down the name of the current menu 2 Exit to the server Main Menu 3 When you want to continue your work enter the appropriate menu options to regain your place xi About This Manual If you find that the Centigram Series 6 server has timed out follow the steps below If your screen is blank press any key to reactivate the screen and then continue with these steps 1 Press any key to start the login sequence 2 Enter your user ID and password if requested 3 Starting from the Main Menu enter menu options to proceed to the menu from which the server timed out 4 Reenter data as needed to regain lost work Quitting an Entry Session At any point during entry of offline or online parameters you can quit Quitting discards all parameter entries you have made and leaves the VoiceMemo application configuration the way it was before you started entering parameters To quit from the VoiceMemo Configuration Offline or Online Menu Select Q Quit Forget Changes Prompt Quit and forget changes y n Response Y to return to the VoiceMemo Configuration Main Menu Shortcut Commands You can use the Ctrl Control ke

Voice Processing Solutions Installation and Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents